HomeMy WebLinkAbout2019 06 19_Carmel_IFP_B SpecsSPECIFICATIONS FOR
PNC BANK
PENNWOOD OFFICE
PREPARED FOR:
PNC Bank – PENNWOOD OFFICE
11405 North Pennsylvania Street
Carmel, Indiana 46032
Date: June 18, 2019
Job Number: 2019190.32
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DRAWING INDEX
TITLE SHEET
TS-001.......Title Sheet ...............................................................................................................06-18-19
TS-002.......Matrix of Responsibility .............................................................................................06-18-19
TS-003 ......Egress Plan..............................................................................................................06-18-19
DEMOLITION
D-101 ........Demolition Floor Plan ...............................................................................................04-16-18
D-101.1......Demolition Floor Plan ...............................................................................................04-16-18
D-110 ........Demolition Reflected Ceiling Plan ..............................................................................04-16-18
D-110.1......Demolition Reflected Ceiling Plan ..............................................................................04-16-18
ARCHITECTURAL
A-100.........Dimension Plan ........................................................................................................06-18-19
A-100.1......Dimension Plan ........................................................................................................06-18-19
A-101.........Floor Plan ...............................................................................................................06-18-19
A-101.1......Floor Plan ...............................................................................................................06-18-19
A-110.........Reflected Ceiling Plan ..............................................................................................06-18-19
A-110.1......Reflected Ceiling Plan ..............................................................................................06-18-19
A-601.........Door Schedule and Details ........................................................................................06-18-19
A-611.........Interior Finish Schedules...........................................................................................06-18-19
INTERIOR
I-101 .........Finish Floor Plan ......................................................................................................06-18-19
I-101.1.......Finish Floor Plan ......................................................................................................06-18-19
I-201 .........Interior Elevations ...................................................................................................06-18-19
I-202 .........Interior Elevations, Interior Wall Sections and Details..................................................06-18-19
I-501 .........Casework Details......................................................................................................06-18-19
MECHANICAL
MD-101......Mechanical and Plumbing Demolition Plan..................................................................06-18-19
MD-101.1...Mechanical and Plumbing Demolition Plan..................................................................06-18-19
M-101 ........Mechanical Plan........................................................................................................06-18-19
M-101.1 .....Mechanical Plan........................................................................................................06-18-19
M-501 ........Mechanical Details and Schedules..............................................................................06-18-19
PLUMBING
P-101.........Plumbing Plan ..........................................................................................................06-18-19
ELECTRICAL
E-001.........Electrical Details.......................................................................................................06-18-19
E-101.........Power and Systems Plan...........................................................................................06-18-19
E-101.1......Power and Systems Plan...........................................................................................06-18-19
E-103.........Security Plan............................................................................................................06-18-19
E-103.1......Security Plan............................................................................................................06-18-19
E-110.........Lighting Plan............................................................................................................06-18-19
E-110.1......Lighting Plan............................................................................................................06-18-19
TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
E-501.........Electrical Schedules and One-Line Diagram ................................................................06-18-19
E-601.........Lighting Control Details.............................................................................................06-18-19
E-602.........Electrical Details.......................................................................................................06-18-19
SPECIFICATION INDEX
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
007200.......GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................1
011000.......SUMMARY................................................................................................................3
011400.......WORK RESTRICTIONS..............................................................................................1
012300.......ALTERNATES............................................................................................................2
012600.......CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES .................................................................3
012613……..REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI’S)………………………………………………………………4
012900.......PAYMENT PROCEDURES ...........................................................................................5
013100.......PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION...........................................................5
013200.......CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION..........................................................4
013300.......SUMBITTAL PROCEDURES ........................................................................................11
014000.......QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.........................................................................................6
015000.......TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS..................................................................3
016000.......PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................4
017300.......EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................3
017419……..CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL.............................................5
017700.......CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES..........................................................................................5
018119.......AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT.....................................................................................6
DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 5 - METALS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061053.......MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY...................................................................................4
064023.......INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK..................................................................8
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
081113.......HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ......................................................................10
087100.......DOOR HARDWARE ...................................................................................................9
088000.......GLAZING..................................................................................................................11
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
092216…….NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING………………………………………………………………………. 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
092600.......GYPSUM BOARD....................................................................................................... 10
095113.......ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS.................................................................................. 6
096513.......RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES......................................................................... 5
096813.......TILE CARPETING...................................................................................................... 6
099123.......INTERIOR PAINTING................................................................................................ 9
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
122413.......ROLLER WINDOW SHADES .......................................................................................4
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SURPRESSION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
220500.......GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK...........................................................18
220501.......BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS ............................................................................9
220502.......PLUMBING WORK.....................................................................................................2
220503.......PLUMBING TESTS.....................................................................................................2
220700.......PIPE INSULATION ....................................................................................................3
221116.......HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS.............................................................................6
221316.......SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS .................................................................3
224000.......PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT.....................................................................2
DIVISION 23 – AND HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
230500.......GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK ..................................................................7
230593.......TESTING AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS....................................................................4
230700.......DUCT INSULATION...................................................................................................2
230900.......CONTROLS...............................................................................................................4
233113.......DUCTWORK .............................................................................................................4
233300.......DUCT ACCESSORIES.................................................................................................3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260210.......ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS.......................................................................... 9
260210.10..ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS.......................................................................... 2
260210.15..WORK INCLUDED..................................................................................................... 1
260210.16..CODES, FEES ........................................................................................................... 1
260210.17..REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES................................................................................... 2
260210.18..GUARANTEE............................................................................................................. 1
260210.22..EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION ..................................................... 2
260513.......WIRE AND CABLE..................................................................................................... 3
260526.......GROUNDING............................................................................................................ 2
260533.......RACEWAYS AND BOXES............................................................................................ 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
260533.10..TELEPHONE RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES .............................................................. 2
262416.11..LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS..................................... 4
262416.12..PANELBOARD LOW VOLTAGE (CLASS 2) LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
WITH INTEGRAL TIME SCHEDULER.......................................................... 4
262719.......SURFACE METAL RACEWAY ...................................................................................... 1
262726.......SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES.................................................................................. 3
262816.......DISCONNECT SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 2
265100.......LIGHTING................................................................................................................ 6
END OF SECTION
GENERAL CONDITIONS 007200 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 007200 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1997 Edition,
hereinafter referred to as General Conditions, are hereby made a part of this Specification.
1.2 The Contractor is hereby specifically directed, as a condition of the Contract, to acquaint himself
with the Articles contained therein, and to notify and apprise all Subcontractors and any other
parties to the Contract of, and bind them to, its conditions
1.3 No contractual adjustments shall be due as a result of failure on the part of the Contractor,
Subcontractors or other parties to the Contract to fully acquaint themselves with the General
Conditions.
1.4 The General Conditions of the Contract may be amended by Supplementary Conditions.
1.5 The provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions when included and Division 01,
General Requirements, apply to the Work specified in each Section of the Specifications.
1.6 Where conflicts occur concerning the Architect's duties and responsibilities between the General
Conditions and the Agreement between the Owner and Architect, the Agreement shall take
precedence.
1.7 If not otherwise included in the Owner Contractor Agreement or specifically included in the
bidding documents, the Contractor shall obtain the Owner’s insurance requirements prior to
submitting a bid.
PART 1 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 2 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 007200
SUMMARY 011000 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to all Sections. The Contract
Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required
by all.
B. Conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents shall be resolved in the following
order of priority:
1. Amendments and revisions (such as Change Orders) of later date take precedence over
those of earlier date;
2. the Agreement;
3. the Supplementary Conditions;
4. The General Conditions;
5. Drawings and Specifications; Drawings govern Specifications for quantity and location.
Specifications govern Drawings for quality and performance. In the event of ambiguity
or conflicts, the greater quantity and the better quality shall govern.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Project consists of new Tenant Fit-Out Corporate office.
1. Project Location: PNC-PENNWOOD Office 11405 North Pennsylvania Street,
Carmel, Indiana 46032.
2. Owner: The PNC Financial Service Group Realty Services.
B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated June 18, 2019, were prepared for
Project by GPD Group; 520 S. Main St; Suite 2531; Akron, OH 44311
C. Construction Manager: The company chosen by Owner is Construction Manager for this Project
and is Project's Constructor. In Divisions 00 through 49 Specifications, the terms "Construction
Manager" and "Contractor" are synonymous.
1.3 CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract with Owner.
1.4 SPECIAL INSURANCE
A. Contractor’s Commercial General Liability insurance shall contain no exclusion that would deny
coverage for any claim arising out of or contributed to by any fungus, mildew, mold, or
resulting allergens. If such exclusion exists and cannot be removed by endorsement,
Contractor shall submit proof of coverage for fungus, mildew, mold, or resulting allergens under
a Pollution Legal Liability or Contractor’s Pollution Liability policy.
SUMMARY 011000 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.5 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE
A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to
be incorporated into the Work. Owner has assigned these Purchase Orders to Contractor.
Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are
included in the Contract Sum.
1. Contractor's responsibilities are the same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase
Orders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase-
Order agreements.
2. The Schedule of Products Ordered in Advance is included at the end of this Section.
1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish furniture and office equipment for office areas. The Work includes providing
support systems to receive Owner's equipment [and making plumbing, mechanical, and
electrical connections].
1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to
Contractor.
2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be
present for and assist in Owner's inspection.
4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for
replacement.
5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to Contractor.
6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished
products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall
designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to
Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.
8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at
Project site.
9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during
storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions using the 48-division
format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Words
implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be
interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular words applicable
as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
SUMMARY 011000 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE BY OWNER
A. The following products will be ordered in advance. Not limited to: (Refer to RFP and
Responsibility Matrix on Architectural Sheet TS-002.)
END OF SECTION 011000
WORK RESTRICTIONS 011400 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 011400 - WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: The contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including
use of Project site, during construction period. Subcontractor’s use of premises must be
coordinated with the Contractor and is limited only by Owner’s right to perform work or to
retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Access: At all times, provide the Architect and the Owner’s representatives, easy and safe
access to the Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. Provide such access so Architect
may perform its functions.
C. Use of Site: Confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, and
the Contract Documents and do not unreasonably encumber the Site with any materials or
equipment.
D. Environmental Requirements: The following requirements are in addition to all applicable laws
and regulations.
1. No burning will be permitted on the Site.
2. Control dust by water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, or other methods acceptable to
the Owner. Comply with governing regulations.
3. Limit site disturbances, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet
(12.2m) beyond building perimeter; 5 feet (1.5m) beyond primary roadway curbs,
walkways, and main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet (7.6m) beyond pervious paving
areas.
E. Owner’s Rules: Conform at all times to Owner’s requirements for protection of plant, materials,
equipment, and noise levels.
F. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site.
G. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available
to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for
parking or storage of materials.
1. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on-site.
1.2 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install
equipment in completed areas of the site, before Substantial Completion, provided such
occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and
partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of incomplete portions of the Work, nor shall
WORK RESTRICTIONS 011400 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
it relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for completion of the Work in accordance witht eh
Contract Documents.
1. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner’s items for damage during storage and
handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
2. If Owner’s items are damaged as a result of Contractor’s operations, Contractor shall
repair or replace them.
3. Owner will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the
Work to be occupied before Owner Occupancy.
4. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
Occupancy.
5. Before partial Owner Occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems
serving occupied portions of the site.
6. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of the site.
1.3 PERMITS
A. GC shall secure and pay for the building permit. Contractor shall secure and pay for all other
permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution
and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and
which are legally required at the time the Bids are received or negotiations concluded.
B. If required by governmental authority, Owner will make application for permits and licenses
using forms obtained and prepared by the Contractor and with all costs paid by the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. Any
provisions hereof to the contract notwithstanding, Contractor shall observe and abide by and
perform all of its obligations hereunder in accordance with all applicable laws, ruled, and
regulations of all governmental authorities having jurisdiction, including the Federal
Occupational, Safety and Health Act. Contractor shall comply with all laws regarding trench
excavations in excess of 5 feet depth, including employing engineers, in needed; such expenses
shall be included in the cost of the work.
1.4 Project Coordination
A. General: Refer to the General Conditions for requirements pertaining to coordination. The
Contractor shall be the sole coordinator of the work.
1. The Architect has exercised reasonable care in coordinating the Contract Documents
between disciplines. Carefully study and compare the Contract Documents, site, Owner
furnished data, and local conditions and report at once any discrepancies, errors, or
omissions in the Contract Documents prior to the award of the Contract. Failure to report
any discrepancies, errors or omissions in the Contract Documents shall be a waiver to
any claim by the successful bidder for expense made necessary by reason of later
interpretation of the Contract Documents by the Architect.
B. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure
efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations
WORK RESTRICTIONS 011400 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection
and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results
where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components,
before or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for
required maintenance, service and repair.
3. Make provisions to accommodate items schedules for later installation.
C. Existing Conditions:
1. Conduct a thorough examination of the site, the Contract Documents, and Owner
furnished data of existing conditions before proceeding with the Work. The Contractor
shall formulate from its examinations its own conclusion as to the extent of the existing
conditions and the complexities that may be encountered in the execution of the Work.
a. Owner furnished Data: Portions of the Contract Documents were prepared from data
received from the Owner by the Architect. Such data is available from the Owner and
represents all existing conditions known to the Owners. Such data will be furnished
only for the information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy of
completeness of this data is not guaranteed. Field verify all existing dimensions.
Other conditions, of which no record exists, may be encountered during construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011400
ALTERNATES 012300 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project. Amount of alternate prices shall include cost of coordination,
cost of overhead and profit, and cost of modifications or adjustments to adjacent work due to
integration of alternate.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or
deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to
alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.
ALTERNATES 012300 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. To be determined by GPD and PNC Project Manager.
END OF SECTION 012300
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract Modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue through Construction Manager supplemental instructions authorizing Minor
Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on
GPD Group’s “Bulletin”.
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 5 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the
change.
a. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
b. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals (Change Order Requests): If latent or unforeseen conditions
require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request
for a change.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use GPD Group “Bulletin,” selecting, Architect’s Request for
Contractor’s Proposal”.
1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a Change Order
for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.5 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the
difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of
work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances,
mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders
related to unit-cost allowances.
4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent
quantity survey, measure, or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance
described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractors’
handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 5 business days of
receipt of the Change Order authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted
later than 5 business days after such authorization.
1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from
what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-
priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
Change Order Number
Project Date
Project Location Project Number
Owner/Client File This is Page
1 of
Contractor Contractor’s Request/
Quotation Number / Date
Change to Contract Sum: Change to Contract Time:
$
Original Contract Amount: Revised Contract Amount:
$$
See Change Order summary for Revised Total Contract Amount and Time
Reason for Change Requested by
Recommended for Approval by GPD: by By Date Signed
Approved for Owner/Client By Date Signed
Approved for Contractor By Date Signed
Approved for Tennant By Date Signed
(if applicable)
The above Change Order to the contract shall be effective upon signature by all applicable parties, in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract. The Contract
Amount refers to the Contract Sum or guaranteed Maximum Cost in Contract.____________________________________________________________________
Distribution
Description / References / Costs / Dates
Begin text here . . .
REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI’S) 012613 - 1
PNC Bank – Prototype General Specifications 0000000.00 08-26-11
SECTION 012613 – REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI’S)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUEST(S) FOR INTERPRETATIONS (RFI’S)
A. General: A request for Interpretation (RFI) is a Contractor initiated, Architect formatted, written
instrument related to the execution of the Work that is addressed to the Architect. The RFI shall
be used by the Contractor as the means to ask questions related to the Work; subject to the
conditions contained within this article.
1. An RFI which fails to conform to the requirements stated herein, (for example, is
incomplete or contains numerous errors) shall be returned to the Contractor for its
completion/rectification without benefit of the Architect’s response, in addition, no
adjustments for Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be granted for an RFI failing to
conform to the requirements stated herein.
2. The Owner reserves the right to assess the Contractor for the cost (based on time and
materials) of an RFI response performed by the Architect, and any of its consultants,
which is deemed by the Owner and Architect as being frivolous or unnecessary (for
example, the subject of the RFI is addressed in the Contract Documents). Such RFI’s
shall be removed from the RFI log.
3. Each RFI shall be submitted with such promptness as to cause no delay in the
Contractor’s own work and in that of any subcontractor. No adjustments of Contract
Time of Contract Sum will be granted because of failure to have an RFI submitted with
sufficient time to allow for the orderly processing of a response by the Architect.
B. Authorship:
1. Prior to the commencement of the RFI process, the Contractor shall designate a full time
“RFI Manager” whose duties shall include the responsibility for enforcing the Request for
Interpretation provisions of this article, to maintain an up-to-date log of all RFI’s, advise
the Architect, in writing, of the status and disposition of all RFI’s at the progress
meetings, and be a member of the Contractor’s staff. The RFI Manager shall be
experienced in administration and supervision of building construction of the type
indicated on the contract documents including mechanical and electrical work.
2. Each RFI shall originate solely from the Contractor’s RFI Manager. An RFI submitted to
the Architect by and entity, or individual, other than the RFI Manager shall be returned to
the Contractor.
C. Prohibitions: RFI’s shall not be used for the following:
1. To solicit consideration by the Architect of a “substitution.”
2. To request an adjustment of the Contract time. If the contractor believes that the
response received from the Architect to any RFI warrants adjustment to the Contract
time it shall immediately advise the Architect, in writing, up on receipt of the Architect’s
response.
3. To request an adjustment of the Contract sum. If the Contractor believes that the
response received from the Architect to any RFI warrants adjustment of the Contract
sum it shall immediately advise the Architect, in writing, upon receipt of the Architect’s
response.
REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI’S) 012613 - 2
PNC Bank – Prototype General Specifications 0000000.00 08-26-11
4. To solicit comment clarification(s) of any required submittal or shop drawing review that
was transmitted by the Architect to the Contractor.
5. RFI’s shall not be used to transfer coordination responsibility from the Contractor to the
Owner or the Architect.
D. Procedure:
1. The Contractor shall submit all RFI’s on the form supplied by the Architect.
2. Each blank on the RFI form shall be filled in.
3. Each RFI shall be typewritten and shall be forwarded to the Architect in triplicate. Each
RFI shall address on subject.
4. Each RFI shall contain specific reference to the drawings number(s), detail number(s),
schedule type(s), bulletin number(s), specification sections(s) and paragraph number(s),
or other related documents(s) which is (are) pertinent to the Contractor’s question. The
date of each referenced drawings number, bulletin, specification section or other related
document shall be identified. In preparing each RFI verify the applicable dimension(s),
field conditions, drawings requirements (small through large scale details), and/or
specification section requirements pertaining thereto. Prior to submission of the RFI
coordinate the nature of the inquiry with the requirements of other sections or trades as
related thereto and responses to previous RFI’s. Where supplementary sketches are
required to clarify an inquiry the Contractor shall attach supplementary sketches, at large
scale, illustrative of the inquiry. Sketches shall include sufficient detail, materials,
dimensions, thicknesses, assembly, attachments, relation to adjoining work, structural
grid references, and all other pertinent data and information for the Architect to make an
informed response.
a. The Contractor is encouraged to suggest solution(s) to its inquiries, if applicable.
Should the Contractor’s solution(s) have an impact on Contract Sum or Contract
time it shall be so stated within the RFI.
5. Each RFI shall be dated and sequentially numbered.
6. Each RFI shall be reviewed, and signed, by the RFI manager prior to transmitting to the
Architect.
7. Duration of RFI Response Upon Receipt: 5 business day.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012613
Page 1 of 2
REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION NO. _ ______________ ______
Project:
From:
To:
Date:
Project Number:
Re:
Specification Section: Paragraph:
Drawing Reference: Detail:
Request:
Response:
Attachments
Response From: To: Date Rec’d: Date Ret’d:
Signed By: Date:
___________________________________________
Copies: PNC Bank Contractor GPD
Page 2 of 2
Additional Comments
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. (Field) Review: Architect’s visits to the site at intervals necessary in the judgment of Architect
to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the Work completed and to
determine in general if the Work completed is in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the Work.
B. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b. Submittals Schedule.
c. Contractor’s Construction Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values at earliest possible date but before the date scheduled for
submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased
payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line
items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
a. Break down principal subcontract amounts into separate labor and materials items.
Breakdown of subcontractor’s schedule of values must be true and accurate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include
evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and Construction Manager and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Review:
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Prior to the 25
th day of each month, furnish the Project Manager with a draft (pencil)
copy of the Application for Payment.
2. On the 25
th day of each month, the Owner, the Project Manager and the Contractor shall
meet to review the draft (pencil) copy of the application and Certificate for payment.
Questions resulting from this review shall be answered by the Contractor and clarified
prior to receipt of the final copy of the Application and Certificate for Payment which is to
be submitted to the Architect on the 1st day of the following month.
3. Upon receipt of the final Application and Certificate for Payment and other
documentation as required by the Project Manager including the updated Schedule of
Values and the updated Construction Schedule, the Architect shall review the documents
received to determine if they correspond to the agreements reached during the draft
(pencil) copy review. Upon completion of the Project Manager review, the Project
Manager shall revise and execute the Applications and Certificate for Payment to
correspond to the agreements reached and forward the executed copies to the Owner.
4. In taking action on the contractor’s Application and Certificate for Payment, the Project
Manager will rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by the
contractor and will not be deemed to represent that he has made audits of the
supporting data.
5. Payment will not be made for materials and equipment stored off the site, except at the
Owner’s discretion and prior approval. When the Application and Certificate for Payment
includes material or equipment stored off-site, the Application shall be accompanied by a
statement certifying:
a. Description of the item(s) being stored.
b. Location of the bonded warehouse(s) where materials or equipment is being
stored.
c. Affidavit of Storage.
d. Certificate of Insurance.
e. Bill of sale made to Owner stating there will be no additional cost for
transportation and delivery of the item(s) being stored.
f. Statement certifying that item or any part thereof will not be installed in any
construction other than work under this Contract.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 2 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Owner by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit notarized waivers of
mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic’s lien arising out of
the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for
retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of
mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application.
a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every
entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is
lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors, principal suppliers and fabricators.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Products list.
5. Schedule of unit prices.
6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits.
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
11. Initial progress report.
12. Report of preconstruction conference.
13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
14. Data needed to acquire Owner’s insurance coverage(s).
15. Performance and payment bonds.
16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
17. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.
18. Construction Waste Management Program.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements, including, but not limited to:.
a. Transmittal of required Project Record Documents to Owner.
b. Evidence of completion of demonstration and training.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" and
AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
6. Evidence that claims have been settled.
7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
8. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
9. Occupancy permits and similar approvals or certifications by governing authorities and
franchised services, assuring Owner’s full access and use of completed work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations to ensure efficient and orderly installation of
each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that
depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list
of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates
maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination
is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Refer to Divisions in the Facility Services Subgroup for specific Coordination Drawing
requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers,
including hone and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone.
1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of
the meeting.
4. Notification: Inform participants 3 days prior to meetings not regularly scheduled.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Construction Manager, if one is retained by
Owner, and Architect, but no later than 10 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the
conference at Project site. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel
assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, if one is
retained by Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent;
major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; testing laboratory representatives; and
other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Requirements in individual Specification Sections for preconference responsibilities.
b. Tentative construction schedule.
c. Project coordination
d. Critical work sequencing.
e. Designation of responsible personnel.
f. Procedures for processing Requests for Information (RFI’s.)
g. Procedures for processing Bulletins.
h. Procedures for processing Submittals.
i. Procedures for processing Substitutions.
j. Procedures for processing field decisions, proposal requests and Change Orders.
k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
l. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
m. Submittal procedures.
n. Preparation of Record Documents.
o. Use of the premises.
p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
q. Parking availability.
r. Office, work, and storage areas.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
s. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
t. First aid.
u. Security.
v. Progress cleaning.
w. Working hours.
C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
and Construction Manager, if one is retained by Owner, of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Submittals.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
l. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
m. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
p. Temporary facilities and controls.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
s. Testing and inspecting requirements.
t. Required performance results.
u. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of
meetings with preparation of payment requests. Schedule and administer special meetings as
required.
1. Attendees: Each Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and other entity concerned with
current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. Owner, Construction Manager, if one is retained
by Owner, and Architect, will attend at their discretion Provide teleconference option for
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Owner, Construction Manager, if one is retained by Owner, and Architect to call into
meeting as necessary. All participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Change Orders.
14) Documentation of information for payment requests.
15) Testing and inspection requirements.
16) Status of Request for Information.
17) Other business relating to the Work.
3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since
the previous meeting and report.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
E. Construction Waste Management Meetings
1. Contractor shall either conduct separate construction waste management meetings or
discuss waste management goals and issues as part of the following regular meetings.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Within 30 days after the execution of the Agreement between the Owner
and the Contractor submit to the Architect and Owner copies of the submittals schedule.
Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Immediately after award of Project, submit, for the
Owner’s and Architect’s information, copy of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule, large
enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period via email. Construction Schedule
shall be updated and distributed no less than weekly intervals.
C. Construction Photographs: Submit digital images of each photographic view within seven days
of taking photographs.
1. Submit complete set of digital image electronic files.
2. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken and provide written
description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
3. Submit images that have the same aspect ratio as the sensor un-cropped.
D. Field Condition Reports: Submit copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
E. Construction Waste Management Report: Submit electronically at weekly intervals.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
C. Coordinate Contractor’s Construction Schedule with Owner’s Construction Schedule for Owner‘s
own forces. Contractor shall make any revision to the Construction Schedule after a joint
review and mutual agreement. The Construction Schedule shall then constitute the Schedule to
be used by Contractor, separate contractors and Owner until subsequently revised.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit, for Architects approval, concurrently with the Contractor’s Construction
Schedule a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by
construction schedule. Include the following information:
1. Anticipated date of Architect’s receipt of submittal.
2. Number of business days allowed for Architect’s review of submittal.
3. Specification Section to which submittal relates.
4. Subcontractor, fabricator or supplier responsible for preparing the submittal.
5. Provide blank columns for actual date of submittal, re-submittal, and final-review status.
6. Systems Submittals: Identify submittals for systems such as fire alarms, exterior walls,
and curtain walls, on the transmittal and act upon the system singularly as a combined
submittal.
B. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final
Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and
major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,
purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Include selection process activities for
finishes and products specified by allowances or specified to be selected during the
sample review process. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction
Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than (5) days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for administrative procedures necessary for
certification of Substantial Completion.
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work Under more than one Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Use of premises restrictions.
b. Seasonal variations.
c. Environmental control.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Deliveries.
g. Installation.
h. Tests and inspections.
i. Adjusting.
j. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
F. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change
on the overall project schedule.
G. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within
seven days of date established for commencement of the Work.
H. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
2.3 REPORTS
A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for
changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
4. Give Owner and Architect a minimum of one week’s notice of all anticipated significant
revisions to the project schedule.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies via e-mail of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, and other
parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination
Drawings.
3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.
4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
Delegated-Design Submittals and for erecting mockups.
5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record
Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's and Construction
Manager's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
C. Summary of Required Submittals
1. Erosion control plan with the sediment and erosion control measures highlighted.
2. Cut sheets for roofing materials which meet Solar Reflective Index Requirements (SRI).
3. Cut sheets for high efficiency irrigation equipment.
4. Cut sheets for all plumbing fixtures, indicating the water consumption levels.
5. Product data for new HVAC equipment indicating the absence of CFC and HCFC
refrigerants.
6. Construction Waste Management Plan.
7. Construction Waste Management progress reports.
8. Final Construction Waste Management Report.
9. Calculations of end-of-project recycling rates salvage rates, and landfill rates per
Construction Waste Management plan.
10. Contract submittal and product data indicating percentage of post consumer and pre-
consumer (post-industrial) recycled content.
11. Contractor submittal and product data indicating location of manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
12. Contractor submittals highlighting certified wood-based materials installed, including
Wood Certification documentation form the manufacturer declaring conformance with
Forest Stewardship Council Guidelines for certified wood building components. Wood
based materials included but are not limited to the following materials when made form
wood, engineered, wood products, or wood based panel products: miscellaneous
carpentry, finish carpentry, architectural woodwork, wood paneling, wood cabinets, and
non-rented temporary constructions (including bracing, concrete, formwork, pedestrian
barriers and temporary protection).
13. Cut sheets of filtration media used during construction and installed immediately prior to
occupancy with MERV values highlighted.
14. (18+) Photographs of construction IAQ management measures such as protection of the
ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials.
15. A copy of the Construction IAQ Management Plan highlighting the six requirements of
SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3.
16. Cut sheet and Material Data Safety Sheet (MSDS) for each adhesive used in the building
interior highlighting VOC content.
17. Cut sheet and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each sealant used in the building
interior highlighting VOC content.
18. Cut sheet and a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each paint use in the building
interior highlighting VOC content.
19. Cut sheets for each carpet system providing the Carpet & Rug Institute (CRI) Green label
Indoor Air Quality Testing Program.
20. Cut sheet for each composite wood or agrifiber products used in the building interior
highlighting no added urea-formaldehyde resins. Typical composite wood containing
components include, but are not limited to, miscellaneous carpentry, finish carpentry,
architectural woodwork, wood paneling, wood cabinets, and wood doors.
21. Cut sheets for all walk off mats, grills, grates, or other entryway type systems.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings can be provided by
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Provide an executed Data Waiver form, at the end of this Section, from each
subcontractor and sub-subcontractor or supplier.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect and Construction Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a
submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are
received.
C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
D. Processing Time: Promptly submit Shop Drawings Product Data and Samples in accordance
with the accepted schedule, as to cause no delay in the Work. Allow enough time for submittal
review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on
Architect's receipt of submittal.
1. Initial Review: Duration of initial submittal review shall be as agreed upon in the final
submittal schedule. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit
coordination with subsequent submittals. Construction Manager will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Delaying submittals
to facilitate coordination between submittals shall not constitute a delay of the Work nor
shall it be the basis for an extension of time.
2. Concurrent Review: Concurrent review is a submittal that requires review by more than
one design discipline. Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required, submittal schedule shall reflect concurrent review.
Concurrent reviews are anticipated for, but not limited to, the following:
a. Lighting fixtures, mechanical plans and equipment, plumbing and electrical cuts.
3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of
transmittal to Architect and Construction Manager. Submittal will be returned to
Construction Manager, through Architect, before being returned to Contractor.
a. MEP, structural and lighting.
4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
5. Number of days for processing each resubmittal shall be as agreed upon in the final
submittal schedule.
6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 5 inches by 6 inches on label or beside title block to
record Architect's review markings.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Unique identifier, including revision number. Submittals shall be numbered
consecutively and the numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions.
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Other necessary identification.
F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents
on submittals.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
G. Resubmission: Unless corrected copies are required for final submittal due to Architect’s or
Construction Manager’s observance of noncompliance with provisions of the Contract
Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of
copies to Architect and Construction Manager.
2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action
taken and will be returned.
H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received
from sources other than Contractor.
1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect and
Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the
Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label
information as the related submittal.
2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a. Project name and Architect’s project number.
b. Contractor’s name and contractor’s job number.
c. Date.
d. Destination (To:).
e. Source (From:).
f. Name of Contractor’s personnel responsible for the review.
g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
h. Scheduled submittal date.
i. Scheduled submittal return date.
j. Category and type of submittal; Shop Drawing Product Data, Samples, Action
Submittal, Informational Submittal.
k. Submittal purpose and description.
l. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
m. Contractor’s remarks: explanation of exceptions and deviations from the Contract
Documents.
n. Signature of transmitter.
I. Retain paragraph and subparagraphs above or paragraph below.
J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance
of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect
and Construction Manager in connection with construction.
L. Substitution requests are not allowed in the form of submittals. Substitution requests must be
made in accordance with Division 1 Section, “Product Requirements.”
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect, through Construction Manager, will return three copies. Mark up and retain
one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where
selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required.
Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with options
selected.
b. Final Submittal: Submit three copies, unless copies are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation
and maintenance manuals. Architect and Construction Manager will retain two
copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a
Project Record Document.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Clearly mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts.
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g. Printed performance curves.
h. Operational range diagrams.
i. Mill reports.
j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
l. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
m. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n. Notation of coordination requirements.
o. LEED Information
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not
reproduce, digitally or otherwise, the Contract Documents and submit them as shop drawings.
Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers and all other entities shall not use, copy or reproduce title
blocks, dimensions, notes, keynotes, symbols schedules or details from Contract Drawings,
digital or otherwise. Use of the Contract Drawings shall be limited to reproduction, digitally or
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
otherwise, of the exterior wall layout, interior partition layout, grid lines, doors, and windows.
Do not base Shop Drawings on standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Design calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
m. LEED Information
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30
by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).
4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:
a. Final Submittal: Submit one blue- or black-line prints, unless prints are required
for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five prints where prints are
required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect and Construction
Manager will retain two prints; remainder will be returned.
D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified,
and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.
4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review
of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated.
Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name or name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
5. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of samples that show
the range of variations.
b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation, and similar construction characteristics.
6. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two full set of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return
submittal with options selected.
7. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect and
Construction Manager will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up
and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample.
a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
8. Systems Submittals: Identify submittals for systems such as fire alarms, exterior walls,
and curtain walls, on the transmittal and act upon the system singularly as a combined
submittal. If resubmission is required, resubmit entire system submittal.
9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation" for action required.
H. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation."
I. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
J. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
K. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
Submit informational submittals electronically.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect and Construction Manager will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
B. Delete first paragraph below for projects with a construction manager.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements.
F. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel
certified.
G. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
H. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
K. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements.
L. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
M. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
N. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
O. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
U. Material Safety Data Sheets: If requested by Owner, submit data sheets directly to Owner. Do
not submit data sheets to Architect.
1. Architect will not review data sheets and will not return them to Contractor.
V. Daily Construction Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Construction
Progress Documentation.”
W. Certified Surveys: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Execution Requirements.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and
Construction Manager.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed,
coordinated, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S [AND CONSTUCTION MANAGER’S} ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each properly executed submittal, make marks to
indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will reject and return
submittals not complying with requirements. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action
stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. No exception Taken. No further review of Submittal required.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 11
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2. Make Corrections as Noted. Incorporate corrections in Work; resubmittal is not required.
If Contractor cannot comply with corrections as noted, revise to respond to exceptions
and resubmit.
3. Revise as Noted and Resubmit. Revise as noted & resubmit for further review.
4. Resubmit Properly. Submittal not reviewed because it does not contain Contractor’s
signature indicating its review and approval, and/or is not in proper condition for review.
Resubmit.
5. Not Reviewed. Submittal is not required by Contract Documents.
6. Received for Client’s Record Only. Submittal not reviewed.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect may review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each
submittal to appropriate party.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded
or returned marked “Not Reviewed.”
END OF SECTION 013300
Data Waiver
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Entity Requesting Data (“Transferee”)Transferee Contact Name
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Project Project Number
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Client Date
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
File This is page
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________1 of 1__________________
Transferee has asked “GPD” to provide copies of certain Documents and/or CAD data files (“Data”) prepared by GPD for the Project. GPD agrees to provide
Transferee with the requested Data, under the terms of this CAD Agreement (“Agreement”).
1. The transfer of the Data is not and shall not be deemed a sale. The Data are instruments of service. GPD shall be deemed the Data’s author and shall retain all
proprietary rights, including any copyrights, embodied therein.
2. Transferee may transfer the Data to its Contractors, subcontractors, Suppliers, and Consultants (collectively “Others”), provided Transferee requires the Others
to be bound by this Agreement as if they were the Transferee in this Agreement. Transferee and Others may use the Data only for purposes related to the
Project.
3. The Data are furnished “as is”. GPD makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, of the Data’s merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose,
with respect to the Data’s quality, adequacy, completeness, or sufficiency, or as to any results to be achieved by the Data’s use or the Data’s conformance with
as-built conditions.
4. Transferee acknowledges that anomalies and errors may occur when the Data is transferred electronically or used in an incompatible computer environment.
Transferee solely accepts the risks associated with, and the responsibility for, any damages to hardware, software, computer systems, or networks related to the
Data’s transfer or use. GPD shall have no responsibility to provide software or training to allow Transferee to use the Data.
5. GPD shall have no duty to modify or update the Data. GPD may retain an archival copy of the Data, which shall be conclusive proof and govern in any dispute
over the Data’s form or content.
6. Transferee agrees to indemnify, defend and hold GPD, its officers, directors, shareholders, employees, agents, and consultants harmless from and against any
and all claims, liabilities, suits, demands, losses, damages, costs, and expense, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorneys’ fees and all legal expenses
and fees incurred through appeal, and all interest thereon, accruing to or resulting from any and all persons, firms or any other legal entities on account of any
damages or losses to property or persons, including, but not limited to, injuries, death or economic losses, arising out of Transferee’s or Others’ use, reuse,
transfer, or modification of the Data, except where a court or forum of competent jurisdiction determines that GPD is solely liable for such damages or losses.
7. If Transferee fails to perform or observe any of the terms of this Agreement, GPD may demand, and Transferee immediately shall return, the Data and any copies
thereof.
8. This Agreement shall be governed by Ohio law.
9. In any legal proceeding to enforce this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover its reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs of defense.
10.Unless otherwise explicitly agreed to in writing by the parties, this Agreement shall govern any and all future data transfers to Transferee by GPD.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
GPD Authorization by Date Signed
__________________________________________________________________
Input Principal or Managing Principal’s name here
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Transferee Authorization Date Signed
by
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SUBMITTAL
TRANSMITTAL
Project: ___________________________________________________ Date: _____________________________________________________
___________________________________________________ A/E Project Number: _________________________________________
TRANSMITTAL To (Contactor): _____________________________ Date: _________________ Submittal No. _______________________
A From (Subcontractor): _______________________ By: __________________ Resubmission
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Qty. Reference / Number Title / Description / Manufacturer Spec. Section Title and Paragraph /
_____________________________________________________________________________________Drawing Detail Reference___________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Submitted for review and approval Substitution involved – substitution request attached
Resubmitted for review and approval If substitution involved, submission includes point-by-point
Complies with contract requirements comparative data or preliminary details
Will be available to meet construction schedule Items included in submission will be ordered
A/E review time included in construction schedule immediately upon receipt of approval
Other remarks on above submission: One copy retained by sender
TRANSMITTAL To (A/E): ___________________________ Attn: ________________________ Date Rec’d by Contractor: ________________
B From (Contractor): ___________________ By: __________________________ Date Trnsmt’d by Contractor: _____________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Approved Revise / Resubmit
Approved as noted Rejected / Resubmit
Other remarks on above submission: One copy retained by sender
TRANSMITTAL To (contractor): _____________________ Attn: ________________________ Date Rec’d by A/E: ______________________
C From (A/E): _________________ Other By: ________________________ Date Trnsmt’d by A/E:
___________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Approved Provide file copy with corrections identified
Approved as noted Sepia copies on returned
Not subject to review
No action required Point-by-point comparative data required
Revise / Resubmit to complete approval process
Rejected / Resubmit
Approved as noted / Resubmit Submission Incomplete / Resubmit
Other remarks on above submission: One copy retained by sender
TRANSMITTAL To (Subcontractor): __________________ Attn: ________________________ Date Rec’d by Contractor: _________________
D From (Contractor): __________________ By: ________________________ Date Trnsmt’d by Contractor:
_____________
Copies: Owner Consultants _____________ _____________ _____________ One copy retained by
sender
SUBCONTRACTORS AND
MAJOR MATERIAL SUPPLIERS LIST
Project: ____________________________________________________________________ From (Contractor): ______________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________ Date: _________________________________________________________________________
To (A/E): ___________________________________________________________________ A/E Project Number: _____________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________ Contract For: ___________________________________________________________________
List subcontractors and Major Material suppliers proposed for use on this Project as required by the Construction Documents. Attach supplemental sheets if necessary.
Section Section Phone Number
Number Title Firm Address (Fax Number) Contact
Attachments
Signed by:Date:
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Copies: Owner Consultants _______________ __________________ _________________ _________________ _________________
File
SUBMITTAL REVIEW_____________________________________
A NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN. No further review of Submittal
required.
B MAKE CORRECTIONS AS NOTED. Incorporate corrections
in work: resubmittal is not required. If Contractor cannot
comply with corrections as noted, revise to respond to
exceptions and resubmit.
C REVISE & RESUBMIT. Revise as noted & resubmit for further
review.
D RESUBMIT PROPERLY. Submittal not reviewed because it
Does not contain Contractor’s signature indicating its review
and approval, and/or is not in proper condition for review.
Resubmit.
E NOT REVIEWED. Submittal is not required by Contract
Documents.
GPD (“Architect”) has reviewed this submittal, but only for the limited
purpose of checking for general conformance with the visual and
aesthetic design concept as expressed in the Contract Documents.
Architect’s action on a specific item shall not indicate approval of an
assembly of which the item is a component, not of an item as
delivered and installed if it does not conform to the Contract
Documents.
Contractor, not Architect, is responsible for: checking for any
deviations between this submittal and differing information or
conditions in the Contract Documents and field conditions: for
determining or substantiating the accuracy and completeness of
other details such as confirming dimensions and quantities: for
substantiating instruction for installation or performance of equipment
or systems designed by Contractor: for construction means,
methods, techniques, schedules, sequences procedures and
fabrication processes: for errors and omissions in Submittals: for
coordination of the Work of the trades and for safety precautions and
performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner and in
conformance with all requirements of the Contract Documents.
Notwithstanding any claim of authorship and/or ownership by
Contractor or others in this Submittal. Contracto5’s preparation of
this Submittal and/or Architect’s action on this submittal in no way
divests Architect or others of any rights, including but not limited to,
ownership and copyrights embodied in the Submittal.
No Submittal shall be used as a substitute for requests or approvals
of changes or substitutions, or of other procedures required by the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall notify architect immediately of
any intent to make any claim based on this submittal or notations
thereon.
If more than on submittal review stamp appears on the Submittal, the
most stringent action and notations thereon shall apply. Signature on
a submittal review stamp by the architect of a consultant does not
imply that it has reviewed work no within its professional discipline or
scope of services.
By__________________________Date_______________________
Project No. _________________ _Submittal No. ________________
SUBMITTAL REVIEW___________________________________
A NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN. No further review of submittal
Required.
B MAKE CORRECTIONS AS NOTED. Incorporate corrections
in work; resubmittal is not required. If Contractor cannot
comply with corrections as noted, revise to respond to
exceptions and resubmit.
C REVISE & RESUBMIT. Revise as noted & resubmit for further
review.
D SUBMIT PROPERLY. Submittal not reviewed because it
does not contain Contractor’s signature indicating its review
and approval , and/or is not in proper condition for review.
Resubmit.
E NOT REVIEWED. Submittal is not required by Contract
Documents.
GPD (“Architect”) has reviewed this Submittal, but only for the limited
purpose of checking for general conformance with the visual and
aesthetic design concept as expressed in the Contract Documents.
Architect’s action on a specific item shall not indicate approval of an
assembly of which the item is a component, nor of an item as
delivered and installed if it does not conform to the Contract
Documents.
Contractor, not Architect, is responsible for: checking for any
deviations between this Submittal and differing information or
conditions in the Contract Documents and field conditions; for
determining or substantiating the accuracy and completeness of
other details such as confirming dimensions and quantities; for
substantiating instruction for installation or performance of equipment
or systems designed by Contractor; for construction means,
methods, techniques, schedules, sequences procedures and
fabrication processes; for errors and omissions in Submittals; for
coordination of the Work of the trades and for safety precautions and
performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner and in
conformance with all requirements of the Contract Documents.
Notwithstanding nay claim of authorship and/or ownership by
Contractor or others in this Submittal, Contractor’s preparation of this
Submittal and/or Architect’s action on this Submittal in no way divests
Architect or others of any rights, including but not limited to,
ownership and copyrights embodied in the Submittal.
No submittal shall be used as a substitute for requests or approvals
of changes or substitutions, or of other procedures required by the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall notify Architect immediately of
any intent to make any claim based on this submittal or notations
thereon.
If more than one submittal review stamp appears on the Submittal,
the most stringent action and notations thereon shall apply.
Signature on a submittal review stamp by the Architect or a
consultant does not imply that it has reviewed work no within its
professional discipline or scope of services.
By__________________________Date_______________________
Project No. _________________ _Submittal No. ________________
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover
production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction
Manager.
C. Mockups: Full-size assemblies erected on-site and used to demonstrate qualities of materials
and execution; to review construction, coordination, testing or operation; to illustrate finishes
and materials; to verify selections make under Sample submittals; and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects. Mockups are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which Work will be
judged.
1. Benchmark Samples: A type of mockup used to illustrate the application and aesthetic
effect of finishes and coatings. Benchmark Samples establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report
on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Identification of applicable standards.
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.
5. Number of tests and inspections required.
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
C. Testing Agency and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that
include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced and expert in producing products similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations
governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and
similar conventions.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing
and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests
and inspections to be performed.
H. Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance
with specified requirements for performance and test methods.
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and
construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately
demonstrate capability of product to comply with performance requirements.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same
tasks for Project.
d. When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction
Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each
report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract
Documents.
I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect or Construction Manager.
2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and times
when mockups will be constructed.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work,
fabrication, or construction.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are
engaged to perform.
2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services
specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to
in writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
6. Provide quality assurance and control services required due to changes in the Work
proposed by or made by the Contractor.
7. Provide quality control services for Work done contrary to the Contract Documents,
without prior notice, when so specified, or without proper supervision.
8. Overtime expenses and schedule delays accruing as a result of executing quality control
services shall be the Contactor’s responsibility and shall not be charged to the Owner.
C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.
1. Testing agency will notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of
irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to
Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work.
D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing.
E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents. Architect retains the right to require the use of a different testing
agency for retesting ad reinspecting.
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and
Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.
1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
6. Attend Project progress meetings as requested by Architect.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies or arranging for pick-up of test samples after
normal business hours..
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and quality control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule with Contractor’s
Construction Schedule as specified in Division 1 Section “Construction Progress
Documentation.”
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, testing
agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests
and inspections are required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls.
1. Provide and maintain all temporary facilities and controls necessary for the performance
of the Work. Locate and install all temporary facilities and controls where acceptable to
the local authorities having jurisdiction and utility owner and remove same and
terminate, in a manner suitable to the local authorities having jurisdiction and utility
owner, at completion of Work or when otherwise directed. Unless otherwise specified,
pay all costs associated with the use, provision, and maintenance of, temporary facilities
and controls including power, water, and fuel (if any) consumed until Substantial
Completion.
1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Use of Permanent Utilities: When each permanent utility is operational, it may be used for
construction purposes, if acceptable, in writing, by the Owner. The written request for permission
for use of the system form the Owner shall include, as a minimum, the conditions and reasons
for use and provisions for and effect on equipment warranties. In the event that the Owner
accepts the Contractors use of the permanent utility for the balance of the Work, the Contractor
shall be fully responsible for it, and shall pay all costs for operation, power, restoration and
maintenance of same.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required.
Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of
completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder
with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company
recommendations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, in necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction.
B. Toilet, Water, and Drinking Water Facilities: The Contractor shall make arrangements with the
Landlord or Property Manager for use of the existing toilet, water, and drinking water facilities.
C. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed areas throughout
construction period required to: facilitate progress of Work; to protect Work and products
against dampness and heat; to prevent moisture condensation on surfaces; to provide suitable
ambient temperatures for installation and curing of finish materials; to provide adequate
ventilating; to meet health regulations for safe working environment; and, to prevent hazardous
accumulations of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or gases in areas occupied during construction.
Provide local exhaust ventilating to prevent harmful dispersal of hazardous substances into
atmosphere of occupied areas. Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in
harmful exposure to persons or property. Provide ventilating operations at all items personnel
occupy an area, when subject to hazardous accumulations of harmful elements. Continue
operation of ventilating system for as long as required after cessation of Work to assure
removal of harmful elements.
1. In the event that the Owner accepts the Contractor’s use of the permanent ventilation
and air conditioning systems for the balance of the Work, provide and maintain
temporary filters to adequately filter air being distributed through the ductwork and air
handling units to the supply outlets; disposable filter shall be placed in front of all
exhaust registers to keep construction dirt out of exhaust duct work.
D. Electric Power and Lighting Service:
1. Contractor shall reduce energy use as much as practicable during construction.
2. Arrange with local electric utility for temporary electric service to the site. Provide all
installation and equipment for temporary lighting and power. The electrical service shall
be of adequate capacity for all construction tools and equipment without overloading the
temporary facilities.
a. Provide power distribution throughout the site as required to facilitate construction
operations. Terminations shall be provided for each voltage supply complete with
circuit breakers, disconnect switches and other electrical devices as required to
protect the power supply system.
b. A temporary lighting system shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the
Contractor as required to satisfy the minimum requirements of security and safety.
Provide general illumination for the entire project. Provide increased levels of
illumination where the work is being installed.
3. All temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance with
the applicable provisions of the governing codes and regulations, the NEC, NEMA, and
OSHA standards. All temporary power and lighting shall be maintained to give safe
working conditions, continuous service, and so as not to pose a threat to the Owner’s
property. Modify and extend temporary power and lighting systems as the Work progress
requires.
E. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period. Long
distance calls shall be paid for by the party making the call. A pay phone is not acceptable.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.3 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES AND PROTECTION
A. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: No Project identification, signs or advertisements
will be permitted on the project site.
B. Construction Aids: Provide all items, such as lifting devices, all scaffolding, staging, platforms,
runways, ladders; and all temporary flooring, as required by the various trades for the proper
execution of the Work. Provide such construction aids with proper guys, bracing, guards,
railings and other safety devices as required by the governing authorities and OSHA.
C. Elevator and Loading Dock Usage: The Contractor shall make all arrangements with the
Landlord or Property Manager for the use of elevators as required for transporting material and
workmen to the work areas and for the disposal of rubbish and waste materials.
D. Security: Provide and maintain provisions for closing and locking the site to prevent
unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
E. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas form fumes and noise.
F. Temporary Fire Protection: Throughout the site, during construction, provide for fire protection
and fire prevention in accordance with all applicable Federal, state and local codes and
regulations.
3.4 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surface, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Remove and dispose of temporary filters an thoroughly clean the interior of the air
handling units and ductwork prior to acceptance of the Work. Provide all new filters in
heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems.
2. Replace all lamps of the permanent lighting system, to comply with the Contract
Documents, at no cost to the Owner.
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section
“Closeout Procedures.”
END OF SECTION 015000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of
products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents as proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for
a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer directly to Owner.
E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at end of Section.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting
test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
i. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
j. Time value to be added to, or subcontracted from, the Contract time of
Completion.
k. Benefit(s) to the Owner.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection
of proposed substitution. Substitution requests, if any, shall be submitted so as to allow a
reasonable time for their consideration and shall not be justification for delay of the
Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: All bids shall be based on the products required in the Contract Documents.
B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
7. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
8. Protect stored products from damage.
B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner’s construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document
using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 03 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: Unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide
products of both quality and type that have been used successfully in similar situations
on equal quality projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term “as selected,” Architect will make
selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term “match sample,” sample to be matched is
Architect’s.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish “salient characteristics” of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Product” name a single
manufacturer, provide the product named.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
“Manufacturer” or “Source” name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by
the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.
3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” introduce a
list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers”
introduce a list of manufacturers’ name, provide a product by one of the manufacturers
listed that complies with requirements.
5. Basis of Design Products: Where paragraphs or subparagraphs title “Basis of Design
Product(s)” are included. Provide either the specified product or a comparable product.
Drawings and specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named
6. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and
matches Architect’s sample. Architect’s decision will be final on whether a proposed
product matches satisfactorily.
a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and
complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract
Documents on “substitutions” for selection of a matching product.
7. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase “as selected from
manufacturer’s colors, patterns, textures” or a similar phrase, select a product (and
manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.
C. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under one of the following conditions:
1. That the specified product is not available due to lockout, strike, bankruptcy, product
discontinuance, Acts of God, and that the proposed product will match or exceed the
quality of the specified product while either providing the Owner with a cost savings or
expediting the Work.
2. When a warranty of performance is specified and, in the judgment of the Contractor, the
specified product will not provide the desired performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of utilities and other construction indicated as
existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and
location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit
to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. General: The work to be performed under the Contract Documents shall be laid out solely by
the Contractor. Provide and pay for all construction layout work required for eth Project. Under
no circumstances will the Architect assume any responsibilities for laying out the Work.
1. Verify all dimensions shown on the drawings. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions. Notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies found before proceeding
or continuing with the Work.
B. Construction Layout: During the progress of the Work establish additional bench marks,
reference lines and reference points and levels at each floor and as otherwise necessary for the
guidance and information of each trade and for the field verification of specified construction
tolerances. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized
tolerances.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from
damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start and test equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017300
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 017419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for waste reduction and for the recycling of non-
hazardous, recyclable, construction and demolition debris.
1. Reduce waste by minimizing factors that contribute to waste. The project shall salvage
and/ or recycle a minimum of 50% of construction, demolition and land clearing waste
generated by the project.
2. Use reasonable and legal means to divert construction and demolition debris from
landfills and incinerators by facilitating their recycling or reuse through a Contractor
developed, construction waste management program.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Waste Reduction: Construction practices that achieve the most efficient use of resources and
materials; uses water efficiently; avoids practices such as over-packaging, improper storage,
ordering errors, poor planning, breakage, mishandling and contamination.
B. Construction and Demolition Debris: Solid wastes arising from demolition or removal, excess
or unusable construction materials, packing materials for construction products, and other
materials generated on site during the construction process but not incorporated into the
Work.
C. Recyclable Materials: Construction and demolition debris that can be recovered and processed
into new products or materials. Recyclable materials include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Metals: Ferrous (iron, steel, stainless steel, galvanized steel) and non-ferrous (copper,
brass, bronze, aluminum) types and containers made from metals such as pails, buckets
and beverage cans.
2. Concrete.
3. Gypsum wallboard.
4. Paper products such as generated from field office activities and clean corrugated
packaging cardboard.
5. Wood products, including untreated dimensional lumber, plywood, oriented strand board,
hardboard, particleboard and crates and pallets made from wood products.
6. Carpet and padding.
7. Plastics and containers made from plastics such as pails, buckets, and beverage bottles.
8. Copper wiring.
9. Glass: Glass beverage containers, window and mirror glass.
D. Non-Recyclable Materials: Construction and demolition debris not capable of being reused or
reprocessed, exclusive of the recyclable materials listed above.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
E. Hazardous Materials: Construction and demolition debris that are regulated for disposal by
local, city, county, state, or Federal authorities
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimize the creation of construction and demolition waste on the job site. Minimize factors
that contribute to waste, such as over packaging, improper storage, ordering error, poor
planning, breakage, mishandling and contamination.
B. Reuse, salvage or recycle waste materials to greatest extent possible and per LEED
Certification Requirements. Divert construction, demolition and land clearing debris from
landfill disposal. Redirect recyclable material back to manufacturing process.
C. Landfill Diversion: Owner has set the following waste reduction goals for the project, within
the limits of the construction schedule, contract sum and available materials, equipment,
products and services.
1. A diversion rate of 50% of the total Project waste is required, with a diversion rate of
75% of the total Project waste desired. A diversion rate of 95% would earn the project
an Innovation Point. Use the LEED Calculation methodology as defined in the LEED
Reference Guide to determine the overall waste diversion rate for the Project.
2. Measurement of diversion rate is based upon weight of materials, dry.
3. If co-mingled recycling services are used, the recycling service must be required to
provide hauling receipts outlining what percentage of weight was diverted from landfill.
4. The following waste categories shall be diverted from landfill at minimum:
a. Land-clearing debris
b. Excavated soils
c. Clean dimensional wood, pallet wood
d. Plywood, OSB, and particleboard
e. Concrete
f. Asphalt
g. Cardboard, paper, paper-based packaging
h. Metals
i. Gypsum drywall (unpainted)
j. Paint
k. Glass
l. Plastics
m. Carpet and pad: 100% Reclamation
n. Paper: including blueprints
o. Acoustical ceiling tiles
p. Fiberglass (solid)
q. Film plastic (from shrink wrap and other packaging, and sheeting uses as
protection or erosion control)
r. Fluorescent tubes and ballasts (if not recycled, designate as hazardous waste)
s. Non-asbestos asphalt roofing
t. Plate glass.
u. Porcelain.
5. These goals are consistent with the 1997 “Statement on Voluntary Measures to Reduce,
Recover and Reuse Building Construction Site Waste” released by the American Institute
of Architects and the Associated General Contractors of America and Executive Order
13101.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Minimize the creation of construction and demolition waste on the job site. Minimize factors
that contribute to waste, such as over packaging, improper storage, ordering error, poor
planning, breakage, mishandling and contamination.
1. Identification of Contractor's staff responsible for enforcing construction waste
management.
2. Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation.
3. Description of the specific methods to be used in recycling/reuse of the various
construction and demolition debris generated, including the areas and equipment, to be
used for processing, sorting, and temporary storage of debris.
4. Characterization, including estimated types and quantities of the construction and
demolition debris to be generated. Include percentages of recyclable and non-recyclable
debris.
5. List of specific construction and demolition debris materials that will be salvaged for
resale, salvaged and reused, or recycled.
6. Name(s) of landfill and incinerator to be used and the estimated costs for use, for
construction and demolition debris that is unable to be recycled or reused.
7. Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including non-profit organizations
such as schools, local housing agencies, and organizations that accept used and excess
construction materials such as materials exchange networks and Habitat for Humanity.
8. Identification of local recycling facilities that will accept construction and demolition
debris.
9. Identification of construction and demolition debris that cannot be recycled/reused with
an explanation or justification.
10. Meetings: A description of the regular meetings held in which waste management will be
addressed.
B. Approval by the Architect and the Owner of the Contractors’ Construction Waste Management
Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for adequate and continuing control of
pollutants and other environmental protection measures specified.
C. Application for Progress Payments: The Contractor shall submit with each Application for
Progress Payment a Waste Management Report for the Project. Failure to submit this
information shall render the Application for Payment incomplete and shall delay Progress
Payment.
1. For each material recycled, reused, or salvaged from the Project, the amount (in tons),
the date removed from the jobsite, the receiving party, the transportation cost, the
amount of any money paid or received for the recycled or salvaged material, and the net
total cost or savings of salvage or recycling the material. Attached manifests, weight
tickets, receipts or invoices.
D. Worksheets: Use the Recycling Economics Worksheet provided by the LEED Consultant.
1. Recycling Worksheet
2. Salvage Worksheet
3. Land-clearing Worksheet
4. Demolition Worksheet.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
E. Final Report: Provide calculations on total construction waste recycling rates, salvage rates,
and landfill rates. Demonstrate compliance with performance requirement.
1. Submit with Final Application for Payment.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Waste Management Program: Prepare a program that minimizes waste and diverts
construction and demolition debris from landfills and incinerators by facilitating their reuse or
recycling. Name the waste material processors who will accept the construction and
demolition debris, the condition of the construction and demolition debris required by the
waste material processors, the method proposed to provide the construction and demolition
debris in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to the disposal sites and waste
material processors who will receive them, and the impact on the project schedule. The
Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of any special programs involving rebates
or similar incentives related to the recycling of waste. Revenues or other savings obtained
from sale, reuse, and recycling operations shall accrue to the Contractor.
B. Disposal Sites and Waste Material Processors: Use only facilities with valid legal permits for
disposal, recycling and waste processing issued by the jurisdictions in which they are located.
1.6 REVENUE
A. Revenues or other savings obtained from recycling, reused or salvaged materials shall accrue
to the Construction Manager.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM IMPLEMENTATION
A. Distribution: The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Waste Management Program to the
Job Site Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner and the Architect.
B. General: For the duration of the project implement and maintain waste management
program. During the prosecution of the Work encourage the practice of efficient waste
reduction when sizing, cutting, and installing products and materials.
C. Transportation: Arrange for the regular collection, transport from the site, and delivery of the
construction wastes and debris to the designated recyclers, and waste material processors
and disposal sites.
D. Separation Facilities: The Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate handling,
and recycling, salvage, reuse and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate
stages of the Project. Provide and designate an on-site area for the separation of construction
and demolition debris for reuse and recycling. Provide containers and bins in the designated
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
area to facilitate separation, storage and handling which are clearly and appropriately marked.
Cut all items to lengths and sizes to fit within the containers or bins provided. Where there is
sufficient quantity of a specific recyclable debris item (for example; salvaged metal doors and
frames or duct work), make arrangements for items to be bundled, banded or tied, and stack
in a designated location for a special pick-up. Maintain the separation facilities in an orderly
condition. Separate construction and demolition debris at the project site by the following
method:
1. Co-Mingled Method: All construction and demolition debris is placed into containers or
bins and then transported to a recycling facility where recyclable and salvageable
materials are removed, sorted, and processed and the remaining waste is transported to
a landfill or incinerator.
END OF SECTION 017419
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and
similar final record information.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
6. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
7. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or
additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment.
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified
copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of
construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work indentified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of
construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-
up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later, and those locations of those items that need
to be located for servicing.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
d. Mark Contract Drawings completely and accurately.
e. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or
omitted from original Drawings.
f. Note Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where
applicable.
2. Deliver one full set of reproducible drawing plots and the CAD compact disks to the
Architect.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Clearly mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable.
D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to
indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that
indicated in Product Data.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where
applicable.
E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections such as tests and inspections, surveys, mix records, Construction Waste
Management Records and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as
follows:
1. Operation Data:
a. Emergency instructions and procedures.
b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations.
d. Description of controls and sequence of operations.
e. Piping diagrams.
f. Noise and vibration adjustments.
g. Effective energy utilization.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2. Maintenance Data:
a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
c. Maintenance procedures.
d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
e. Maintenance record forms.
f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
g. Copies of maintenance service agreements.
h. Copies of warranties and bonds.
i. Cleaning.
j. Control sequence.
k. Fuels, lubricants, tool, and other related items.
l. Identification systems.
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
1.7 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
b. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films,
and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
c. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including, plenums,
shafts, and similar spaces.
d. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
e. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
f. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
g. Remove labels that are not permanent.
h. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
i. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
j. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
l. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grilles.
m. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 017700
INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT 018119 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 018119 - AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The project shall be constructed to maximize indoor air quality.
B. All products as described herein shall be tested and certified for acceptable Emission Rate
Standards.
C. Contractor shall designate a LEED advocate from a permanent member of the construction
team. LEED responsibilities shall include, but are not limited to calculations, collection and
collation of all materials to be turned over to Owner’s LEED consultant.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 018113 – Sustainable Design Requirements
B. Section 014000 – Quality Requirements
C. Section 015000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls
D. All specification sections that involve finish materials that will be in direct contact with the
indoor air; as well as all those sections whose work includes materials known to off-gas,
including, but not limited to, adhesives, mastics, caulking, sealants, and insulating materials.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guideline for
Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995.
B. EPA Protocol for Environmental Requirements, Baseline IAQ and Materials, for the Research
Triangle Park Campus, Section 01445.
1.4 REQUIREMENTS
A. Implement an Indoor Air Quality Management Plan to protect workers during construction and
to prevent residual problems with indoor air quality in the completed building.
B. During construction meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the SMACNA IAQ Guideline
for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3. These BMPs are summarized in
Part 3: Execution. Required best management practices are highlighted.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. IAQ Management Plan: Within 30 working days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, or prior to
HVAC work, whichever occurs sooner, the Contractor should submit 3 copies of the Draft IAQ
Management Plan to the Architect for approval including, but not limited to the following:
INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT 018119 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. The Draft Plan must meet or exceed the SMACNA Best Management Practices described
in 01353.1.3A.
2. In the Plan designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers and
overseeing and documenting results of the IAQ Management Plan for the Project.
3. Once the Owner has determined which of the BMPs contained in the above draft Plan are
acceptable, the Contractor shall submit, within 7 working days, a Final IAQ Management
Plan. The Contractor shall distribute copies of the IAQ Management Plan to the Job Site
Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner and the Architect.
B. IAQ Management Reports: The Contractor shall submit with each Progress Report a summary
of IAQ Management issues. The Summary shall be submitted on a form approved by the
Owner.
C. Provide photographs of construction IAQ management measures such as protection of ducts
and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials. Take a minimum of 6 photos during 3
different levels of completion for a minimum total of 18 pictures.
D. Provide cut sheets of filtration media used during construction and installed immediately prior
to occupancy with MERV values highlighted.
E. Product Test Data: Environmental Chamber Data of contaminant emissions of selected
products is required.
1. Required product submittals are identified in individual Sections throughout this
specification.
2. If product testing has been previously performed on the material, a summary copy of the
testing report should be submitted for review. Materials that are used in conjunction with
other building materials (adhesives or under coatings) should be tested as completed
assemblies. For example, carpets should be tested with adhesive and paint should be
tested as an undercoat and topcoat assembly. All testing protocols and a list of testing
facilities follows.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Low-emitting products have been specified in appropriate sections.
1. Adhesives shall meet or exceed VOC limits of South Coast Air Quality Management Rule
# 1168.
2. Sealants and filters shall meet or exceed VOC limits of Bay Area Resources Board
Regulation8, Rule 51. See Adhesives and Sealants Tables in this section.
3. Paints and coatings shall meet or exceed VOC and chemical limits of "Green Seal"
requirements as follows: Flat paint/primer: 50 g/L, Non-flat paint/primer: 150 g/L,
Corrosion resistant paint/primer: 250 g/L. (g/L = grams per liter.)
4. Carpet system shall meet or exceed Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus Indoor Air
Quality Test Program.
5. Composite wood and agrifiber products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
6. Filters used during construction must be MERV 8 minimum. Filters must be replaced prior
to building flush-out and must be MERV 13 minimum.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT 018119 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Many Best Management Practices are available to maintain IAQ during construction or
demolition. The pros, cons, and limitations of each available option should be considered to
identify the most effective and most efficient approaches for a particular job. When designing
the Plan, the Contractor may use more than one of these practices (simultaneously or phased
in) as work progresses. In general, the steps include:
1. Containing the work area
2. Modifying HVAC operation
3. Reducing emissions
4. Intensifying housekeeping and maintenance scheduling
3.2 REQUIRED IAQ MANAGEMENT BMPS
A. Mechanical Systems
1. Protection: All HVAC equipment must be protected from collecting dust and odors that
can be absorbed by porous materials in the system and later be released. The design of
each system must be evaluated in detail to determine how it may be affected by odor
and dust from the project (including site egress, staging areas, etc.). Specific HVAC
protection requirements generally apply to the return side, central filtration, or supply
side of the system.
2. Return Side: The return side of an HVAC system is, by definition, under negative
pressure and thus capable of drawing in nearby construction dust and odor. Special
attention must be paid to the location of any return vents, return ducts, ceiling plenums,
return shafts, VAV plenum intakes, window units, and transfer vents as well as that
portion of the air handler which is upstream of the central fan. When possible, the
entire system should be shut down during heavy construction or demolition that
generates dust and airborne particles.
a. All return system openings in, or immediately adjacent to, the construction area
should be sealed with plastic.
b. When the system must remain operational during construction, temporary filters
should be added where necessary (e.g., on grills to return air shaft). Filters used
during construction must have a minimum rating of MERV 8.
c. All filters must receive frequent periodic maintenance and be replaced at end of
project with MERV 13 filters.
d. When the general system must remain operational, the heaviest work areas should
be dampered off or otherwise blocked if temporary imbalance of the return air
system does not create a greater problem.
e. The mechanical room should not be used to store construction or waste materials.
f. Diffusers, VAV boxes, and ducts may be adequately protected in most cases where
the above measures are implemented. When the system is off for the duration of
construction, diffusers and window units should also be sealed in plastic for further
protection.
g. Ducts, diffusers, and window units should be inspected upon completion of the
work for the amount of deposited particulate present and cleaned where needed.
If significant dust deposits are observed in the system during construction, some
particulate discharge can be expected during start-up. When such a discharge is
only minor, delaying re-occupancy long enough to clean up the dust may be
sufficient. In more severe cases, installing temporary coarse filters on diffusers or
INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT 018119 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
cleaning the ducts may be necessary. The condition of the main duct should be
checked whenever visible particles are discharged from the system.
B. Protect construction materials from contamination and pollution from contact with construction
dust, debris, fumes, solvents, and other pollutants.
C. Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, and disposed of according to local regulations.
D. Storage and Protection: Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming material to be
delivered according to installation schedule and to be placed convenient to work area in order
to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. Protect stored on-
site or installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
E. Schedule delivery of materials to minimize the duration of on-site storage.
F. Schedule installation of materials to minimize contamination of absorptive materials with VOCs,
solvents, dust, etc. (For example, install carpet after painting has been completed, since carpet
can absorb VOCs released while the paint dries.)
G. Ductwork and appurtenances should be inspected upon completion of the work for the amount
of deposited particulate present and cleaned where needed. If significant dust deposits are
observed in the system during construction, some particulate discharge can be expected during
start-up. When such a discharge is only minor, delaying re-occupancy long enough to clean up
the dust may be sufficient. In more severe cases, installing temporary coarse filters on diffusers
or cleaning the ducts may be necessary. The condition of the main duct should be checked
whenever visible particles are discharged from the system. Both highly specialized equipment
and professional expertise may be required to ensure that dust is effectively removed and
contained. The sequence in which duct cleaning occurs in the overall construction process
needs to be carefully considered to avoid recontamination.
H. All dry furnishings and materials (such as carpet, floor tile, acoustical tile, textiles, office
furniture, wood shelving, etc.) shall be allowed to "air-out" or pre-condition prior to installation.
"Bake-outs" of furnishings and construction materials is not recommended due to questionable
effectiveness and potential for damage.
I. Conduct regular inspection and maintenance of indoor air quality measures including ventilation
system protection.
J. Modifying Equipment Operation: Use of equipment may need to be restricted in order to meet
IAQ objectives. This could involve substituting cleaner equipment or simply changing operating
Procedures. Examples of such controls include:
1. Restricting traffic volume or prohibiting idling of motor vehicles where emissions could be
drawn into occupied areas.
2. Switching from diesel to bottled gas for equipment such as generators or fork lifts
(emissions are cleaner but still potentially harmful under some circumstances). Use of
electric fork lifts and other equipment should be considered when feasible, since they do
not bum fossil fuels, thus eliminating exposure to combustion gas emissions.
K. Use low-toxic cleaning supplies for surfaces, equipment and worker’s personal use.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT 018119 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
L. Changing Work Practices: For some demolition tasks (e.g., paint stripping) there may be
techniques available that produce less airborne dust. Some painting techniques release fewer
odors. Some cleaning practices raise less dust.
M. Use wet sanding for gypsum assemblies. Exception: Dry sanding allowed subject to Owner
approval of the following measures.
1. Full isolation of space under finishing.
2. Plastic protection sheeting is installed to provide air sealing during the sanding.
3. Closure of all air system devices and ductwork.
4. Sequencing of construction precludes the possibility of contamination of other spaces
with gypsum dust.
5. Worker protection provided
N. Local Exhaust: Pollution sources can be directly exhausted to the outside. This may be done
through an exhaust system already available in the building or more often by a portable fan
vented to the outside and attached to the work site by flex duct. Depending on the nature of
the material and the location of the exhaust, special filtration of the exhaust may or may not be
necessary. Any emissions to the outside must be in compliance with applicable regulations and
should be directed well away from intakes.
O. Air Cleaning: Where exhaust is not feasible, local re-circulation of air through a portable air
cleaner may be effective. The type of filter should be suitable for the material being controlled
(e.g., charcoal or potassium permanganate for many odors, a moderate to high efficiency filter
for dust).
P. Cover or Seal: VOC emissions are a result of evaporation from an exposed surface.
Reducing the exposed surface reduces emissions. For example:
1. An enclosed tanker is preferable to an open kettle for roofing.
2. Containers of wet products should be kept closed as much as possible.
3. Waste materials that can release odor or dust should be covered or sealed.
4. Applying a sealer may control a surface that is a persistent odor source.
END OF SECTION 018119
Page 2 of 2
VOC Submittal Form Copyright Paladino and Company, Inc. 2008
VOC Requirements: LEED-CI v2.0
For any products that applied within the interior vapor barrier of the building, the VOC content (measured in grams/liter)
must be less than the established limits stated below. All VOC limits are in g/L less water unless noted otherwise.
SCAQMD Rule 1168, Adhesive and Sealant Application
Architectural Applications VOC Limit
[g/L less water]
Indoor Carpet Adhesives 50
Carpet Pad Adhesives 50
Wood Flooring Adhesives 100
Rubber Floor Adhesives 60
Subfloor Adhesives 50
Ceramic Tile Adhesives 65
VCT & Asphalt Adhesives 50
Drywall & Panel Adhesives 50
Cove Base Adhesives 50
Multipurpose Construction
Adhesives
70
Structural Glazing Adhesives 100
Substrate Specific Applications VOC Limit
[g/L less water]
Metal to Metal 30
Plastic Foams 50
Porous Material (except wood) 50
Wood 30
Fiberglass 80
Sealant Primers VOC Limit
[g/L less water]
Architectural Non Porous 250
Architectural Porous 775
Other 750
Specialty Applications VOC Limit
[g/L less water]
PVC Welding 510
CPVC Welding 490
ABS Welding 400
Plastic Cement Welding 350
Adhesive Primer for Plastic 650
Contact Adhesive 80
Special Purpose Contact Adhesive 250
Structural Wood Member
Adhesive
140
Top & Trim Adhesive 250
Sheet Applied Rubber Lining
Operations
850
Green Seal GS-36, Commercial Adhesives
VOC Limit
Aerosol Adhesives Weight
[g/L minus water]
General Purpose Mist Spray 65%
General Purpose Web Spray 55%
Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive 70%
Sealants VOC Limit
[g/L less water]
Architectural 250
Green Seal GS-11, Paints
VOC Limit
Architectural Paints & Primers [g/L less water]
Flats 50
Non-Flats 150
Green Seal GC-03, Anti-Corrosive Paints VOC Limit
Anti-Corrosive Paints [g/L less water]
Anti-Corrosive/ Anti-Rust 250
for Ferrous Metal Substrates
SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings VOC Limit
Architectural Finishes & Coatings [g/L less water]
Bond Breakers 350
Clear Wood Varnish & Sand Sealers 350
Clear Wood & Pigmented Lacquer 550
Clear Brushing Lacquer 680
Concrete Curing Compounds 350
Dry Fog Coatings 400
Fire Retardant Coatings - Clear 650
Fire Retardant Coatings – Pigmented 350
Floor coatings 100
Graphic Arts (sign) coatings 500
Industrial Maintenance (IM) –high
temp
420
Zinc rich IM primers 420/ 340/ 100
Japans /faux finish coatings 350
Magnesite cement coatings 450
Mastic coatings 300
Metallic pigmented coatings 500
Multicolor coatings 250
Pretreatment wash primers
Primers, sealers, & undercoaters 200
Quick dry enamels 250
Quick dry primers, sealers &
undercoaters
200
Recycled coatings 250
Rust preventive coatings 400
Shellacs, Clear 730
Shellacs, Pigmented 550
Stains 250
Waterproofing Sealers 250
Waterproofing concrete/masonry
sealers
400
Wood preservatives 350
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal fabrications.
B. Metal ladders, with floor mounting brackets.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance:
1. Counter Tops and Vanity Framing: Provide countertop and vanity framing capable of
withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design
working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections, or of
exhibiting excessive deflections in any of the components making up the countertops and
vanities:
a. All deadloads.
b. 500 pound live load placed on the countertop and vanity.
c. Deflection at Midspan: L/1000 times span or 1/8-inch- (3-mm) whichever is less.
B. Exterior Metal Fabrications: All exterior metal fabrications shall be fabricated and installed to
prevent buckling, opening up of joints and overstressing of welds and fasteners under the
following temperature conditions:
1. Base fabrication on a temperature of +70 degrees F. at time of installation with
allowance made for an exposed metal surface temperature range of -5 degrees F. to
+180 degrees F. Make all necessary adjustments and provisions for concealed expansion.
C. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittals: Provide submittals directly to LEED consultant for initial review. Submit copy
of reviewed and auctioned submittal to GPD Group for record.
1. Completed “LEED Criteria Worksheet,” for each component material of the product or
assembly used in the installation of Work of this Section. Refer to Division 01,
“Sustainable Design Requirements.”
2. Credit MR 4.xx and Credit ID for Recycled Content:
a. Weight Component Documentation: For material assemblies or products having
recycled content submit documentation indicating the weight of the material
assembly or product and the percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-
consumer recycled content of the material assembly or product. The recycled
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Product Data: Submit product data for the following:
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
2. Cast nosings and treads.
3. Extruded nosings and treads.
4. Paint products.
5. Grout.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including plans, elevations, sections, and details of
installation, and attachments to other Work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data, for information only, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to
those indicated for this Project for a minimum of 5 years, with a record of successful in-service
performance, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing
delay in the work.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
metal fabrications that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
D. Certify each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.5 STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Store metal fabrications in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place. Deliver and handle so as
to prevent any type of damage to the fabricated work.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,
verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
1. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of
steel products so post-consumer recycled content pus one-half of pre-consumer recycled
content is not less than 25 percent.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
D. Cold Finished Steel Bars: ASTM A108, grade as selected by fabricator.
E. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500, or hot formed steel tubing
complying with ASTM A 501.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S – Seamless, Grade A suitable for close coiling or cold bending,
standard weight (Schedule 40) minimum, unless otherwise indicated or required to satisfy the
performance requirements, black finish, galvanized for exterior installations and where
indicated.
G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor
of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M)
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
H. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
2.3 ALUMINUM
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, alloy 6061-T6.
2.4 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664 and compatible with finish
paint systems indicated.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, of
type, grade, and class required by application incidicated.
B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
1. Welded connections may be used where bolted connections are shown.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously along entire line of contact. Use materials and methods
that minimize distortion and develop strength of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or
overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Make up threaded
connections tight so that threads are entirely concealed.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices and fasteners to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to
support indicated loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
G. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as
necessary to complete the Work and which are not a part of the structural framework, including
but not limited to framing and supports for overhead lobby door frames, overhead rolling doors
and grilles, countertop and vanities, ceiling hung televisions and cameras, tube framing for
partial height walls, mechanical and electrical equipment.
1. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction,
unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill,
and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2. Countertop and Vanity Framing: Custom fabricate countertop and vanity framing, using
steel shapes and plates, and cold finished mild steel bars at exposed conditions, for
support framing and plywood, to the thicknesses, sizes and shapes shown, and as
required to produce work of adequate strength and durability, without objectionable
deflections Use proven details of fabrication, as required, to achieve proper assembly and
alignment of the various components of the work.
H. Metal (Steel) Ladders
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart.
3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.
with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
4. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased
edges.
5. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars.
6. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
7. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide
granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with
aluminum-oxide grout.
8. Prime interior ladders, where indicated including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich
primer.
I. Shelf Angels
1. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide machined horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts,
spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Provide joint gaps in angles where control and expansion joints in exterior cladding skin
are shown or required. Size joint gaps to match width of the masonry joints in the
location of use. Provide joints in other locations, as required for fabrication only, with
tight joints.
a. Provide units at corners and other transitions fabricated into one piece.
3. Galvanize shelf angles to be installed in exterior walls; prime paint shelf angles to be
installed in interior walls.
J. Pipe Bollards
1. Fabricate pipe bollards from minimum 4” O.D. Schedule 80 steel pipe to the sizes, shapes
and profiles shown on the drawings.
2. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch (6-mm) thick steel
plate welded to bottom of sleeve.
3. Galvanize bollards after fabrication.
4. Bollard Cover: Ideal Shield, color to be selected by architect from manufacturer standard
range.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.7 FINISHES
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Shop prime ferrous-metal items.
1. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces by removing oil,
grease, and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC -SP 1 “Solvent Cleaning,”
followed with the SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”
2. Apply a minimum of one coat of shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications,
except those to be field welded, and those to be embedded in, sprayed-on fireproofing,
or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
B. Galvanizing: Hot-Dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTMA A 153? 153 M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
C. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by
the Aluminum Association for designation aluminum finishes.
1. As-fabricated Finish: AA-M0 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in-place
construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set
metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces
level, plumb, true. Drill holes for bolts to the exact diameter of the bolt. Provide screws
threaded full length to the screw head.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
D. CMU Partition Head Supports: Unless otherwise indicated place partition head supports on
alternate faces of CMU partitions every 72 inch- (1829 mm) o.c. and expansion bolt to
underside of structure. Do not bolt to CU partitions.
E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
F. Touch up surfaces and fishes after erection. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION 055000
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 061053 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 061053 – MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood framing.
2. Miscellaneous lumber.
3. Panel products for equipment backing panels.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. LEED credit achievement goals as summarized by the LEED Scorecard attached to
Division 01 Section “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. Requirements for documentation of LEED credits.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire retardant treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
"Principles and Criteria":
1. Dimension lumber.
2. Miscellaneous lumber.
3. Shelving and clothes rods.
4. Plywood.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 061053 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies certified by the American Lumber
Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-
inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber), except that lumber that is not
in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AQPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber.
C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by
the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood chants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking , stripping, and similar
members in connection with vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 19 inches (460 mm) above grade.
4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Provide chemical fire retardant process tested and labeled by UL with flame spread
and smoke developed rating of 25 of less. Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20
(lumber) and AWCA C27 (plywood) for Interior Use Type A High Temperature (HT) as a
minimum for pressure treatment. Size wood before treatment so that minimum cutting will be
required after treatment. Kiln dry lumber to a maximum 19% moisture content. Kiln dry
plywood to a maximum 15% moisture content, after treatment. Treat indicated items and the
following:
1. Wood members required to be treated by Building Code having jurisdiction at the site
and wood members specified as fire retardant treated.
B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National
Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 061053 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Non-Load Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following
species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
C. Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
2. Spruce-pine-fir (South) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1. Blocking.
2. Cants.
3. Nailers.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
6. Shims.
E. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 10 percent
maximum moisture content of any species.
F. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2.5 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-
retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (12.7 MM)
nominal thickness.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contactor, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A
153M.
B. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
C. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers,
blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 061053 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized
standards.
END OF SECTION 061053
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior woodwork.
B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips,
unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
A. "Exposed Surfaces", "Semi-Exposed Surfaces", "Concealed Surfaces", "Types of Cabinet
Construction", and other terms are defined in referenced quality standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each material and product specified and incorporated
into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing and installation.
B. Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components. Elevations shall be drawings at a scale of not less
than ½” = 1’-0”. Details shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 3”=1’-0”.
1. Show locations of sizes of furring, blocking, and handing strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Section.
2. Show location and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing, electrical, computer and
telephone equipment and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
3. Show attachment details to coordinate with existing conditions where applicable.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility: Engage a qualified Manufacturer
acceptable to the Architect and Owner to assume undivided responsibility for wood work
including fabrication, finishing and installation. The manufacturer shall have had a minimum of
15 years successful experience in the custom fabrication and installation of architectural
woodwork comparable to that shown and specified, be a member of the AWS, maintain an
organized quality control program, perform its own in-house veneer lay-up work, and who
retains facilities with sufficient capacity and quality to produce the required architectural
woodwork without causing delay to the Project.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Quality Standard: Fabricate and install all architectural woodwork in accordance with the
applicable requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st edition, published
jointly by AWI, AWMAC, and WI, unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown.
C. Forest Certification: Provide interior architectural woodwork produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001,
"FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage,
and deterioration. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar
operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in
installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions"
Article.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction
period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication of
woodwork; and indicate measurements on final Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION COORDINATION MEETING
A. Meet at the project site, prior to installation of architectural woodwork, to review the substrate
preparation, installation and coordination with other trades, special details and conditions, and
other topics related to the architectural woodwork. The pre-installation meeting shall include
the Architect, the Contractor, architectural woodworker, and any subcontractors affected by the
architectural woodwork installation.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
B. Coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems
specified to establish a standard of quality. Other available manufacturers/fabricators offering
products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor
and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWS quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified.
1. The same materials (dye-lot or run) for plastic laminate and solid surfacing materials
shall be used within each individual room to ensure consistency of exposed finishes,
patterns, and colors.
B. Lumber Standards: Comply with applicable provisions for grading and workmanship of AWS
Section 3 and the requirements shown and specified, where standards conflict the more
stringent shall apply. Provide lumber surfaced 4 sides (S4S) and fabricated to profiles shown. All
lumber shall be kiln dried to the moisture content indicated in AWS Section 2.
1. Wood for Opaque Finish: Plain sawn Yellow Poplar, free from checks, splites, sound
knots.
2. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: No. 1 Common; Southern Pine; kiln-dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
C. Wood Panel Products: Comply with the following:
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (non-moisture resistant): A sustainable, medium density
fiberboard (MDF) panel manufactured from 100 percent post-industrial recycled wood
fiber complying with ANSI A208.2, having a minimum 48 pcf (769 kg/m3) density except
that minimum for screw holding capacity on face shall be 300 pounds (1333 N); an ASTM
E84 minimum Class C flame spread rating, minimum 3/4 inches (19 mm) thick, edged
and faced as specified, fabricated with binder containing no added urea formaldehyde.
a. SierraPine Composite Solutions; FSC Certified Medite II as manufactured in the
Medford, OR plant.
b. Panel Source International; Purekor Platinum MDF, as manufactured in the
Edmonton, AB, Canada plant.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard (moisture-resistant): A sustainable, moisture-resistant,
medium density fiberboard (MDF) panel manufactured from 100 percent post-industrial
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
recycled wood fiber complying with ANSI A208.2, having a minimum 48 pcf (769 kg/m3)
density except that minimum for screw holding capacity on face shall be 300 pounds
(1333 N) respectively; an ASTM E84 Class C flame spread rating, minimum ¾ inches (19
mm) thick, edged and faced as specified, fabricated with binder containing no added
urea formaldehyde.
a. SierraPine Composite Solutions; FSC Certified Medex as manufactured in the
Medford, OR plant.
b. Panel Source International; Purekor Platinum MDF, as manufactured in the
Edmonton, AB, Canada plant.
3. Medium Density Particleboard: A medium density particleboard (MDP) panel
manufactured from 100 percent post-industrial recycled wood residuals complying with
ANSI A208.1, Grade M-3-with a minimum 45 pcf (721 kg/m3) density except that
minimum for screw holding capacity on face shall be 247 pounds (1098 N), an ASTM E84
minimum Class C flame spread rating; minimum 3/4 inches (19 mm) thick, edged and
faced as specified and manufactured with binder containing no added urea-
formaldehyde.
a. SierraPine Composite Solutions; FSC Certified Encore as manufactured in the Adel,
GA plant.
b. Panel Source International; Purekor Platinum Particleboard, as manufactured in
the Edmonton, AB, Canada plant.
c. Potlatch Forest Products Corporation, Forest Products Div., Terramica as
manufactured in the Post Falls, ID plant.
4. Plywood: DOC PS 1, Exterior, Grade A-C APA-rated, minimum 3/4 inches (19 mm) thick;
do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
5. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4.
D. Thermoset Decorative Overlay (Melamine): Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard with
surface of thermally fused, White melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with the
recommendations of the Composite Panel Association’s Technical Bulletin “Laminating
Composite Panels.”
E. High-Pressure Decorative Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3 for Horizontal General Purpose Grade
(HGS) typically and Vertical General Purpose Grade (VGS) where specified. Nominal thickness
for HGS and VGS laminates to be 0.048 inch (1.2 mm) +/- 0.005 inch (0.12 mm) and 0.028
inch (0.71 mm) +/- 0.004 inch (0.10 mm) respectively.
1. Types: As specified in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.
2. Backing sheets: Non-decorative, high pressure laminate, NEMA LD3, Grade, types and
thickness to match face sheets and equalize pull.
3. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA as recommended by woodwork fabricator to
suit application; do not use laminating adhesives that contain added urea formaldehyde.
a. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Adhesive specified above for faces.
F. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm
thick at doors and drawer fronts, 1 mm thick elsewhere.
G. Solid Surfacing (Paper Composite Panel) Countertop Material (SS1): Cellulose or hemp-fiber
paper heat cured and pressed with phenolic resin binder with consistent color throughout. Color
and pattern as specified in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.
1. Product Standard: Richlite Company, Tacoma, WA.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2. Provide manufacturer’s recommended chemical resistant 2-part epoxy waterproof
adhesive to adhere to substrate and bond seams.
3. Provide manufacturer’s recommended clear “no-build” urethane sealer for shop finishing
after fabrication of countertops.
H. Adhesives and Sealers, General: Use only low emitting VOC adhesives and sealers that leave no
lines on finished surfaces of architectural woodwork as recommended by woodwork fabricator
and / or product manufacturer to suit application. Do not use products that contain urea
formaldehyde.
1. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives, Glues, and Finishing Sealers: Use installation and
finishing products that comply with the VOC limits in Section 018113 for products in this
Section installed within the vapor barrier.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials for a complete installation of
architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges for Cabinet Doors (European Type): Concealed all-metal furniture
hinges shall be Blum CLIP Top 120 Series or equivalent with free swing only at cabinet doors
that are provided with magnetic latches, adaptable or engineered for 35 mm hinge cup boring
pattern, with minimum 120 degree opening angle, 3 dimensional hinge having adjustments
located in the steel hinge arm, steel or die-cast zinc hinge cups, and plastic insertion dowels to
receive hinge screws. Automatic closing shall engage only in the last 10 degrees of swing. All
hinge pins and linkages shall be hardened. Complying with BHMA A156.9, B01602.
1. For end doors perpendicular to walls, provide 90 degree opening angle.
2. Hinge Quantity: Provide hinge quantity as recommended by hinge manufacturer based
on cabinet door width, weight, thickness, door material, and hinge cup selection.
C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inches (8 mm) in diameter, fabricated
from satin finished aluminum, complying with ANSI B02011, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Product Standard: Stanley 4484, 1-5/16 inch (33 mm) projection.
D. Edge Pulls at Sliding Doors: Product Standard: Tydix Products, Inc. SF Style Edge Pull. Full
mortised, solid, bronze or brass door edge pull, with 1/2 inch (13-mm) finger clearance, 1/4
inch (6.4 mm) diameter roll diameter, having nominal overall roll length dimension of 1-1/4
inches long, drilled and countersunk to receive 2 screw fasteners; form for full mortise
application; satin finished chrome (US26D).
E. Catches: Magnetic, complying with BHMA A156.9, B03141 for single doors and B03161 for
double doors.
1. Product Standard for Single Doors: CD41 Single Magnetic Cabinet Catch; Stanley
Commercial Hardware.
2. Product Standards For Double Doors:
a. 901; Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
b. CD45 Double Magnetic Cabinet Catch; Stanley Commercial Hardware.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
F. Cabinet Shelf Rests: Nickel plated brass or steel, or stainless steel, minimum 6 mm diameter
shelf support pegs in sockets, complying with BHMA A156.9, B04013. Provide one of the
following:
1. 282.01.701 x 282.50.704; Hafele America, Co.
2. 331 Series Flat Top Shelf Support Pin with 325 Series Insert Grommet; Knape and Vogt.
G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Brackets for Wall-Hung Open-Shelving: Refer to Drawings.
H. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for computer keyboard shelves.
1. Product Standard for Slides and Tray: Fixed tilt, adjustable height; Accuride “Cbergo-Tray
200”.
2. Equivalent products manufactured by Nova or Humanscale may be provided as approved
by Architect.
I. Drawer Slides for Custom Grade Cabinetry: Unless noted otherwise, provide positive stop, side-
mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings.
1. Pencil Drawers: Haworth Model Number SCD-19 (19-1/8 inches wide by 17-1/2 inches
deep by 2 inches high) with lock. Product furnished by Haworth, Inc., to be installed in
woodwork by Contractor.
2. Box Drawers up to 6-1/4 inches (150 mm) deep: Grade 1HD-100; similar to Accuride
3832SC having full extension carburized steel ball bearing, side mounting, 100 lb.
capacity medium duty load rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers,
cushioned in and outstops, detent-in, progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc
plate finish.
3. Printer Drawers: Grade 1HD-100; similar to Accuride 2632 having full extension
carburized steel ball bearing, side mounting, 100 lb. capacity medium duty load rating,
cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers, cushioned in and outstops, detent-in,
progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc plate finish.
4. File Drawers greater than 6-1/4 inches (150 mm) deep: Grade 1HD-200; similar to
Accuride 4034 having full extension carburized steel ball bearing, rail mounting, 150 lb.
capacity heavy duty load rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers,
cushioned in and outstops, detent-in, progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc
plate finish.
5. Refuse Cabinets and Recycling Bin: Grade 1HD-200; similar to Accuride 3600-201 having
full extension carburized steel ball bearing, bottom mounting, 175 lb. capacity heavy duty
load rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers, cushioned in and outstops,
progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc plate finish.
J. Silencers: Provide rubber silencers on jamb and/or head and sill strike areas of all cabinet doors
and drawers, 2 for paired doors, and 3 for single doors. Silencers shall be approximately 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter, color compatible with adjacent finish.
K. Door and Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121 for door locks; E07041 for drawer locks.
1. Pin and tumbler slide bolt lock, two keys each.
2. Key all locks inside one room alike and provide masterkey for all locks in project.
3. Finish to match adjacent pull.
4. Basis of Design Manufacturers and Products: Provide the following:
a. CompX Timberline Model C-290CB at single doors.
b. CompX Timberline Model C-255CB at double doors.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
c. CompX Timberline Model C-280CB at drawers.
d. Kenstan Model DL-PN-M-32V-SC-N-N-N-N - at top drawer of CSD only.
e. Key Code for CompX Timberline locks shall be 101T.
f. Key Code for Kenstan Lock shall be National Coded 915.
L. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 3 inch OD grommets and matching caps
with slot for wire passage; finishes as specified below and where indicated on Drawings.
1. Product Standard (Plastic): Doug Mockett and Co., Inc., Model XG3 (90), matte black.
2. Product Standard (Steel): Doug Mockett and Co., Inc., Model XG5 (26D), satin chrome.
M. Trash Bin Opening: 6 inch diameter hole, 2 inches deep, satin stainless steel.
1. Product Standard: Doug Mockett and Co., Inc., Model TM1-B.
N. Flipper Door Slides: Product Standard: Accuride 117-20 concealed hinge flipper door slide.
O. CPU Bracket: Product Standard: Doug Mockett and Co., Inc., Model CPU1A universal CPU
holder; Greige color.
P. Downview Flat Panel Display: Product Standard: Nova Retrofit Kits, Model FPA-0-1818-NK-25
7/8. Kit shall include tempered glass viewport, visor, trim ring, adjustable arm, and 25-7/8 inch
wide keyboard drawer.
Q. Cabinet Fan: Product Standard: McMaster-Carr Catalog No. 9191K2, 4.69 inch square
equipment cooling fan kit with steel fan guide, 75 cfm, 115 V.
R. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Complying with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
S. Cabinet Levelers: Leveling glides with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter threaded steel rod in steel
corner brackets, minimum two each per cabinet side, accessible from within unit, and concealed
in completed installation.
T. Hanging File Brackets: Product Standard: Hafele Hanging File Bracket System. System shall
include 16 gauge steel flush mounted black oxide finished brackets with matching 1/8 inch (3
mm) crossrail to span file drawer.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, matte finish, stretcher-leveled standard of
flatness. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 591, Class C coating,
commercial quality, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness, may be substituted at fabricator's
option. Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or
other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. Form metal to profiles and
thicknesses indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces
without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet
metal to form a 1/2 inch wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch and support with concealed stiffeners.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to
remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 8
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1,
"White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Pretreatment: Immediately after cleaning, apply a conversion coating of type suited to
organic coating applied over it.
3. Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply thermosetting
polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5
mils. Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written
instructions. Color and gloss as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Steel Reinforcing: Carbon steel shapes, tubes and plates complying with ASTM A 36 (shapes
and plates), and ASTM A 500 or A 501 (for tubes).
1. Shop Primer for Concealed Steel Reinforcing: Provide fast curing, lead and chromate
free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-
P-664.
2. Electrodes for Concealed Steel Reinforcing: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and
electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded.
C. Brushed Aluminum Trim Shapes: Custom fabricate aluminum trim shapes to the sizes, shapes
and profiles shown on the Drawings from the following materials. Provide in standard
commercial tempers and hardness, as required for fabrication, strength, and durability. Form
exposed work true to line and level, with flush surfaces and accurate angles. Miter exposed
corner joints and machine fit to a hairline joint. Finish designations are NAAMM nomenclature.
1. Plate: Alloy 5005 and ASTM B 209 / B 209M.
2. Bar Stock: ASTM B 211 / B 211M.
3. Extrusions: Alloy 6063 and ASTM B 221 / B 221M).
4. Aluminum Trim Finish: Provide the following finish to the exposed surfaces of the
fabricated work to the extent indicated (NAAMM nomenclature), with texture and
reflectivity as required to match the Architect's sample.
a. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: Complying with AA-M10M32A31 for an Architectural
Class II, medium satin, clear natural anodized finish.
D. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME
B18.6.1. Use screws fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting formed-metal fabrications and for
attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable.
2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise
indicated, and locate in inconspicuous locations.
E. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use.
1. ASTM F 1667 for driven fasteners such as nails, spikes and staples.
2. ASTM F 547 for nails used with wood and wood based products.
F. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
G. Blind Splines: Specialty devices, as required for concealed tight butt jointing, types and size as
recommended by woodwork fabricator.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 9
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
H. Covercaps: Where mortises of fastener heads, or draw-downs are exposed (blind holes) in
finished work, provide black plastic covercaps.
I. Counter Support Bracket: Rangine Corp. “Rakks” EH 1818 or EH 1824.
J. Acrylic Glazing Panels for Web/ Coffee Station and Teller Counter: Rigid, flat clear acrylic sheet
meeting ASTM D 4802; nominal 1/2 inch thick (12 mm) and 1/4 inch thick (6 mm) as indicated
on the Drawings, with abrasion-resistant coating on both sides.
1. Relative Burning Characteristics: Average extent of burning less than 1 inch, when tested
per ASTM D 635, using thickness of material indicated for Project.
2. Edge Treatment: Grind exposed edges smooth, using methods recommended by
manufacturer.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before
shipment to Project site to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as
necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance
for scribing, trimming, and fitting. The width of scribes shall not exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm), or
1/2 inch (13 mm) clear dimension from adjacent wall to outside face of cabinet door in a 90
degree position, whichever is greater.
1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom complying with the referenced quality standard.
2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Locate openings accurately and use
templates or roughing in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings.
Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
3. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
4. Install acrylic glazing to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section
"Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual."
5. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
6. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
1. Reinforcing shown is minimum. Provide additional steel and lumber reinforcing as
required to sustain imposed loads and to ensure a rigid assembly.
2. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents, tool marks, warpage, buckle, glue and open
joints, or other defects affecting serviceability or appearance. Accurately fit all joints,
corners and miters. Conceal all fasteners. Make threaded connections up tight so that
threads are entirely concealed.
2.6 PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINETS
A. Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay in accordance with AWS Section 10.
B. Plastic Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative of grade indicated
below:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 10
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: VGS.
4. Edges: HGS unless otherwise indicated.
5. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As specified in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.
C. Materials for Semi-Exposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade VGS.
1. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
2. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
D. PVC Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate Door, Drawer Fronts, and Adjustable Shelves: To match
plastic laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
E. Drawer Box Construction: One of the following:
1. Glued multiple dovetail.
2. Glued French dovetail.
3. Glued and doweled.
F. Provide dust panels of 1/4 inch (6 mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
G. Provide door and drawer locks.
H. Body Members (Ends, Divisions, Bottoms and Sub-Tops): Particleboard or medium-density
fiberboard, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum thickness.
I. Face Frames, Rails, Kicks and Bases: Solid-hardwood lumber or hardwood plywood, 3/4 inch
(19 mm) thick minimum thickness.
J. Shelves: Hardwood plywood with veneer core or particleboard with the following thickness:
1. For Spans Up To 32 inches (800 mm): 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. For Spans Up To 42 inches (1050 mm): 1 inch (25 mm).
K. Drawer Fronts: Particleboard or medium density fiberboard, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick minimum
thickness.
L. Hinged Flush Type Doors: Particleboard or medium density fiberboard with the following
thickness:
1. For Width up to 30 inches (750 mm) and Height Up To 60 inches (1500 mm): 3/4 inch
(19 mm) doors.
2. For Width up to 36 inches (900 mm) and Height Up To 72 inches (1800 mm): 1 inch (25
mm) to 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) doors.
3. If hinge screws enter only edge of door, provide 3/4 inch (19 mm) lumber edges glued to
core prior to laminating.
2.7 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Overall Thickness- Including Substrate: 1-1/2 inch (36 mm).
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 11
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As specified in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.
2. Factory fabricate components to achieve required shapes, sizes, and profiles shown,
without cracks, spalling, pits, surface porosity, chipped areas, or blisters.
3. Form all tops in continuous one piece lengths. Form edges to profiles shown. Laminated
sections shall be in close contact throughout. Adhesive stains will not be permitted.
4. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, .020 in (0.5 mm) thick,
on underside of countertop substrate.
5. Concealed Backs and Edges at End Splashes: Plastic laminate, Grade BKL, .020 in (0.5
mm) thick.
6. Substrate Material: Medium density particleboard made with exterior glue or moisture-
resistant medium-density fiberboard.
7. Substrate Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood.
8. Provide separate 4 inch (100 mm) high and 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick end and back
splashes where indicated on Drawings.
9. Provide full height back splash where indicated on Drawings.
10. Countertops shall be factory cored for plumbing fittings provided under Division 22
Plumbing or as indicated on the Drawings.
11. Radius corners and edges.
12. Finish exposed surfaces by trimming and grinding smooth.
2.8 SOLID SURFACING (PAPER COMPOSITE) COUNTERTOPS
A. Material Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm). Overall countertop thickness (including substrate) shall
be 1-1/2 inches (36 mm).
1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As specified in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.
2. Factory fabricate components to achieve required shapes, sizes, and profiles shown,
without cracks, spalling, pits, surface porosity, chipped areas, or blisters.
3. Form all tops in continuous one piece lengths, if possible. If not possible due to
limitations of material, provide butt seams between countertop sheet material securely
laminated or fastened together using manufacturer's recommended adhesives or
fasteners at locations indicated on Drawings. Form edges to profiles shown. Laminated
sections shall be in close contact throughout. Adhesive stains will not be permitted.
4. Radius corners and edges.
5. Finish exposed surfaces by trimming and grinding smooth.
6. Substrate Material: Medium density fiberboard or particleboard.
7. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, .020 in (0.5 mm) thick,
on underside of countertop substrate.
2.9 WINDOW SILLS-OPAQUE FINISH
A. General Complying with AWS Sections 3 and 6, fabricated from solid hardwood with scarfed
joints, profiles as indicated, finishes as indicated.
B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
C. Wood Species: Plain sawn Yellow Poplar, free from checks, splits, sound knots.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 12
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.10 SHOP FINISHING
A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop.
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
overlay.
C. Plastic Laminate Finish: Gluing of plastic laminate surfacing materials shall be by the hot plate
method, glued surfaces shall be in close contact throughout. Glue stains shall not be permitted.
D. Solid Surfacing (Paper Composite) Countertops: Adhere solid surfacing to substrates as
recommended by manufacturer. Tightly and securely butt seams in countertops using
concealed mechanical fasteners (blind splines) or adhesives as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Sealing and Finishing: Apply three coats of manufacturer’s recommended clear “no-build”
urethane sealer to exposed surfaces following fabrication of countertops and before
shipment to project site. Prepare base surfaces to receive sealer and sand between coats
as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Window Sills - Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. AWS Section 5 Finish System 7: Catalyzed Vinyl for closed grain woods.
3.Color and Sheen: Match Architect’s paint samples.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive interior architectural
woodwork and associated work to which interior architectural woodwork will be applied for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents.
Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine
and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before
installation.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 13
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with requirements of the AWS for the same
grade specified in this Section for type of woodwork involved. Perform work according to
respective manufacturer/fabricator’s written installation instructions.
B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm
in 2400 mm). Level as required with concealed cabinet levelers.
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets without sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
2. Where base cabinets are not installed adjacent to walls, fasten to floor at toe space with
fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) on center. Secure sides of cabinets to floor, where
they do not adjoin other cabinets, with not less than two fasteners.’
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) on center with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm)
penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or with No. 10 wafer-head
sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
F. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat. Adjust and align hardware
so moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment
after installation.
G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between splash and wall with sealant
specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean
entire surface.
2. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more
fasteners at each front, end, and back.
3. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent
deflection.
4. Secure backsplashes and end splashes to countertops with concealed metal brackets at
16 inches (400 mm) on center and to walls with adhesive.
H. Acrylic Glazing: Comply with recommendations for installation contained in the FGMA "Glazing
Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except when specifically not recommended or prohibited by the
glazing or glazing accessory manufacturer; comply with manufacturers' recommendations.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 14
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Do not install glazing that has edge or surface damage or defects that reduce glazing
strength or diminish appearance.
I. Window Sills: Install using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to
greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches (2400 mm) long, except where
shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and
related members.
J. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork.
3.4 ADJUSTING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not
possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
1. Anodized aluminum surfaces shall be cleaned with warm water and mild soaps such as
those used for hands or dishes. Do NOT use cleaners that contain abrasives, acids or
alkalis, as they will mar the surface. Do NOT clean metal face with solvents, paint thinner
or adhesive remover. After washing, always wipe the surface completely dry with a soft,
clean cloth. Stubborn stains may be removed with a thin, clean oil and dry cloth.
C. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Acrylic Glazing Panels: Apply warning tape or bands across opening without touching glazing,
immediately after installing glazing in frames.
1. Cover exposed glazing surfaces with heavy paper secured with tape, without touching
glazing.
2. Do not apply tape or labels to glazing; remove temporary labels.
3. Protect glazing during subsequent construction operations; remove dirt, contaminants,
staining agents and other deposits promptly using manufacturer's recommended
procedures.
4. Clean glazing surfaces using only methods recommended by manufacturer.
5. Replace glazing that is damaged.
6. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and installer that ensure that glazing is without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
7. Wash both sides of glazing not more than 10 days before inspections for Substantial
Completion.
E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer that
ensures that woodwork will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 064023
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 081113 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel doors and frames.
1. The integration of a security system into the steel door and frame work is required. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the total and complete coordination of the security
system components into the Work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated. Include material descriptions,
core descriptions, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes for each
time of door and frame specified.
B. LEED Submittals: Provide submittals directly to LEED consultant for initial review. Submit copy
of reviewed and auctioned submittal to GPD Group for record.
1. Completed “LEED Criteria Worksheet,” for each component material of the product or
assembly used in the installation of work of this Section. Refer to Division 01,
“Sustainable Design Requirements.”
2. Credit MR4 and Credit ID for Recycled Content:
a. Weight Component Documentation: For material assemblies or products having
recycled content submit documentation indicating the weight of the material
assembly or product and the percentages by weight of pos-consumer and
pre=consumer recycled content of the material assembly or product. The recycled
fraction of the material assembly o product will be multiplied by the total cost of
the material assembly or product to determine the recycled content value as
prescribed by LEED protocol. Document the weight of the material assembly or
product and the post-consumer recycled contents on the letterhead of the supplier
of the material assembly or product.
b. Cost Component Documentation: Provide the material cost for every component
that comprises a material assembly or product that is composed of recycled
content provided under this section. Document the material cost on the letterhead
of the supplier for each material assembly or product.
3. Credit MR 5 and Credit ID for Local/Regional Materials: Provide the location of
manufacturer and/or final assembly for each locally/regionally extracted, processed, and
manufactured material incorporated into the Work. Locally/regionally extracted or
processed is defined as materials having their source as a raw material from within a 500
mile radius of the site. Locally/regionally manufactured is defined as materials having
been assembled as a finished product within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
Assembly does not include on-site assembly, erection or installation of finished
components, as in structural steel, miscellaneous iron or system furniture.
a. Location Documentation: Include distance from the location of manufacturer
and/or final assembly to the project site for each locally/regionally extracted
processed, and manufactured material incorporated into the Work. If only a
fraction of the material is extracted and manufactured locally, indicate te
percentage by weight. Submit this documentation on the letterhead of the supplier
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
for each locally/regionally extracted, processed, and manufactured material
incorporated into the Work.
b. Cost Documentation: Include a printed statement of cost for each reconally
extracted, processed, and manufacture red material. Submit this documentation
on the letterhead of the supplier for each locally/regionally extracted, processed,
and manufactured material incorporated into the Work.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit door and frame schedule using same reference designations indication
the Drawings. Include opening size(s), handling of doors, frame throat dimensions, details of
each frame type, elevations of door design types, details of construction, location and
installation requirements of door hardware and reinforcements, hardware group members,
details of joints and connections, fire label requirements including fire rating time direction,
maximum temperature rise requirements, and smoke label requirements.
1. Indicated routing of electrical conduit and dimensions and locations of cutouts in door
and frames to accept electric hardware devices.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certificate of Compliance for Fire Rated Doors: Provide copies of Certificate of Compliance for
all fire rated door assemblies, all smoke and draft control door assemblies, and all temperature
rise rated door assemblies.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hollow Metal Door and Frame Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following publications by Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(HMMA) Div. of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), unless
more stringent requirements are indicated in the Contract Documents:
1. HMMA “Hollow Metal Manual”.
2. HMMA 861 “Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing steel doors and frames
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies comply with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 242.
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorites having jurisdiction, for fire-protection
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252, 1997 UBC Standards 7-2 “Fire Test
of Door Assemblies,” and 1997 UBC Standard 7-4 “Fire Test of Window Assemblies,” and UL
10C “Standards for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.” Fire classification labels at
all doors with fire ratings greater than 20 minutes shall indicate temperature rise developed on
the unexposed surface of the door after the first 30 minutes of fire exposure.
1. Provide metal labels permanently fastened on each door which is within the size
laminations established by the labeling authority having jurisdiction.
2. Temperature-Rise Rating Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise
rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3. Provide fire rated door assemblies in compliance with 1997 UBC Standard 7-2, Part 1 for
positive pressure. Sizes and configurations as shown on the drawings. Installed door
assemblies shall be in accordance with door manufacturer’s certified assemblies.
4. Provide fire rated door assemblies with smoke and draft control rating in compliance with
1997 UBC Standards 7-2, Part 2 at corridors, stairwells, and where required by applicable
codes. Sizes and configurations as shown on the drawings. Installed door assemblies
shall be accordance with door manufacturer’s certified assemblies.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project site storage.
B. Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Tool marks, rust, blemishes, and any other
damage on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Remove and replace damaged items as
directed by Architect. Store doors and frames at building site in a dry location, off the ground,
and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide doors and frames by one of
the following:
1. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
a. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group Company.
b. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group Company.
c. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel
products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of per-consumer recycled content is
not less than 20 percent.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS (commercial steel), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. Not less than 16 gage, (0.053 inch) (1.3 mm)
thick where frames are indicated to be built into exterior walls, hot dip galvanize after
fabrication in compliance with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.
C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS (commercial steel), Type B, and free from
scale, pitting, coil breaks, surface blemishes, buckles, waves, or other defects, exposed (matte)
dull finish, suitable for exposed applicatons.
D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A653/A 653M CS (commercial steel), Type B; awith G60
(Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating, mill
phosphatized.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Expansion Bolts and Shields: FS FF-S-325, Group III, Type 1 or 2.
2. Machine Screws: FS FF-S-92, carbon steel, Type III cross recessed, design I or II recess,
style 2C flat head.
F. Filler: Sound deadening and heat retarding mineral fiber insulating material.
G. Glass and Glazing: Refer to Division 8 Section ‘Glazing’.
2.3 DOORS
A. General: Provide flush-design doors, 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick, of seamless hollow
construction, unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with sheets joined at their vertical
edges by continuous welding the full height of the door, with no visible seams on their faces or
vertical edges, and all welds ground and finished flush.
1. Visible joints or seams around glazing or louvered panel inserts are permitted.
2. For single-acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50
mm).
B. Core Construction: Doors shall be stiffened by continuous vertically formed steel sections which,
upon assembly, shall span the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These
stiffeners shall be 0.026-inch minimum thickness, spaced so that the vertical interior webs shall
be not more than 6 inches apart and spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5 inches o.c.
Place filler between stiffeners for full height of doors.
C. Fire Doors Corse: A continuous mineral fiberboard core permanently bonded to the inside face
of the outer face sheet unless otherwise required to provide fire-protection and temperature-
rise ratings indicated.
D. Exterior Door Core Construction: Polystyrene core adhered to face sheets with waterproof
adhesive. R factor min. of 11 and U factor max. of 0.09 in compliance with to ASTM C518.
E. Top and Bottom Channels: Spot weld metal channel not less than thickness of face sheet to
face sheets not more than 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
1. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with inverted horizontal channels of same material
as face sheet so flanges of channels are even with bottom and top edges of face sheets.
2. For exterior doors, close bottom edge with metallic-coated steel closing channel and top
edge with filler channel of same material, so webs of channels are flush with bottom and
top door edges. Weld inverted steel channels to both face sheets or form integrally with
edge construction of door.
F. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcing from the same material as door to comply with
the following. Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with
door surfaces.
1. Hinges and Pivots: 7 gage (0.167 inch) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 9 inches
(229 mm).
2. Lock Front, Strike, and Flushbolt Reinforcements: 12 gage (0.093 inch) (2.3 mm) thick
by size as required by hardware manufacturer.
3. Lock Reinforcement Units: 14 gage (0.067 inch) (1.7 mm) thick by size as required by
hardware manufacturer.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
4. Closer Reinforcements: 12 gage (0.093 inch) (2.3 mm) thick one piece channel by size as
required by hardware manufacturer.
5. Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage.
6. In lieu of reinforcement specified, hardware manufacturers recommended reinforcing
units may be used.
7. Exit Device Reinforcements: 0.250 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 10 inches (245 mm) high by
4 inches (101 mm) wide centered on exit device case body, unless otherwise
recommended by exit device manufacturer.
G. Electrical Requirements: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified elsewhere;
arrange so wiring can be readily removed and replaced.
1. Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required for steel doors to accept security system
components.
2. Doors with Electric Hinges and Pivots: Provide with metal conduit or raceway to permit
wiring from electric hinge or pivot to other electric door hardware.
a. Hinge Location: Center for doors less than 90 inches (2286 mm) tall or second
hinge from door bottom for doors greater than 90 inches (2286 mm); top or
bottom electric hinge locations shall not be permitted.
H. Interior Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Typical Interior Doors: Flush design with 18 gage (0.042-inch) thick cold-rolled stretcher-
leveled steel face sheets and other metal components from hot- or cold- rolled steel
sheets.
2. Extra Heavy Use Doors: Flush design with 14 gage (0.064-inch) thick cold-roled,
stretcher-leveled steel face sheets and other metal components from hot- or cold- rolled
steel sheets. Provide only where indicated.
I. Exterior Hollow Metal Doors:: Flush design with 16 gage (0.053-inch) (1.3-mm-) thick metallic-
coated stretcher leveled steel face sheets and other metal components from metallic coated
steel sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of doors to permit entrapped moisture to
escape.
2.4 FRAMES
A. Fabricate steel door frames, formed to profiles indicated, with full 5/8 inch (16 mm) stops, and
of the following minimum thicknesses.
1. For exterior use, form frames from 14 gage (0.067-inch) (1.7-mm-) thick, metallic-coated
steel sheets.
2. For interior use, form frames from cold- rolled steel sheet of the following thicknesses:
a. Openings up to and including 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 16 gage (0.053 inch)
(1.3 mm).
b. Openings More Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 0.067 inch (1.7 mm).
B. Provide frames either saw mitered and full (continuously) welded, or machine mitered and full
welded, on back side at frame corners and stops with edges straight and true. Grind welds
smooth and flush on exposed surfaces.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcements from same material as frame to comply
with the following. Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with
surface of the frame.
1. Hinges and Pivots: 7 gage (0.167 inch) (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by
10 inches (254 mm).
2. Strike, Surface Mounted Hold Open Arms, and Flushbolt Reinforcements: 12 gage (0.093
inch) (2.3 mm) thick by size as required by hardware manufacturer.
3. Closer Reinforcements: 12 gage (0.093 inch) (2.3 mm) thick one piece channel by size as
required by hardware manufacturer.
4. Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage.
D. Electrical Requirements: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified elsewhere;
arrange so wiring can be readily removed and replaced.
1. Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required for steel frames to accept security
system components.
2. Frames with Electric Hinges and Pivots: Provide welded on UL listed back boxes with
metal conduit or raceway to permit wiring from electric hinge or pivot to other electric
door hardware.
a. Hinge Location: Center for doors less than 90 inches (2286 mm) tall or second
hinge from door bottom for doors greater than 90 inches (2286 mm); top or
bottom electric hinge locations shall not be permitted.
E. Jamb Anchors: Locate jamb anchors above hinges and directly opposite on strike jamb as
required to secure frames to adjacent construction. At metal stud partitions locate the
additional jamb anchor below the top hinge.
1. Masonry Construction: Adjustable, corrugated or perforated, anchors to suite frame size;
formed of same material and gage thickness as frame; at non-rated frames use friction
fit T-shaped anchors, at rated frames use anchors consisting of spot welded strap and
adjustable anchor; with legs not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long. Furnish at
least the number of anchors per jamb according to the following frame heights:
a. Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1500 mm) in height.
b. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1500 to 2250 mm) in height.
c. Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2250 to 2400 mm) in height.
d. One additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (600 mm) or fraction thereof
more than 96 inches (2400 mm) in height.
2. Metal-Stud Partitions: Metal channel stud zee anchor sized to match stud width, welded
to back of frames, formed of same material and gauge thickness as frame. Provide at
least the number of anchors for each jamb according to the following heights:
a. Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1500 mm) in height.
b. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1500 to 2250 mm) in height.
c. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2250 to 2400 mm) in height.
d. One additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (600 mm) or fraction thereof
more than 96 inches (2400 mm) in height.
3. In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Anchor frame jambs with minimum 3/8 inch diameter
countersunk flat head bolts into expansion shields or inserts 6 inches from top and
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
bottom of each jamb with intermediate anchors spaced a maximum of 26 inches o.c.
Soffit face of frame shall be punched and dimpled to accept countersunk bold head.
Reinforce frame with spacer to prevent bowing. Bolt head shall be set slightly below
soffit face, filled and ground smooth at time of installation.
F. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, formed of
same material as frame, 12 gage (0.093 inch) (2.3 mm) thick, and punched with two holes to
receive two (2) 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) fasteners. Where floor fill or setting beds occur support
frame by adjustable floor anchors bolted to the structural substrate. Terminate bottom of
frames at finish floor surface. Weld floor anchors to frames with at least 4 spot welds per
anchor.
G. Heat Strut Supports: Provide 3/8 by 2 inch vertical steel struts extending from top of frame at
each jamb to supporting construction above. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction above by bolding, welding, or other suitable anchorage.
Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members to permit height
adjustment during installation. Adapt jamb anchors at struts to permit adjustment.
H. Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches wide in masonry wall openings, provide
continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, 12 gage thick for full width of opening, welded to
back of frame at head. Head reinforcements shall be used as a lintel or load-bearing member
for masonry.
I. Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs
and mullions to serve as bracing during shipment and handling and to hold frames in proper
position until anchorage and adjacent construction have been completed.
J. Door Silencer Holes: Drill strike jamb stop to receive three silencers on single door frames and
for two silencers on double door frames. Insert plastic plugs in holes to keep holes clear during
installation.
K. Plaster Guards and Removable Access Plates: Provide 26 gage (0.016-inch-) (0.4-mm-) thick
plaster guards or dust-cover boxes of same material as frame, welded to frame at back of
hardware cutouts to close off interior of openings and prevent mortar or other materials from
obstructing hardware operation. Provide removable access plates in the heads of frames to
receive overhead concealed door closers.
2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Provide continuous stops and moldings around solid, glazed, and louvered panels where
indicated.
B. Form fixed stops and moldings integral with frame, on exterior (non-secured) side of the frame.
C. Provide removable stops and moldings formed of 20 gage thick steel sheets matching hollow
metal frames. Secure with countersunk oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not more
than 12 inches o.c. Form corners with butted or mitered hairline joints.
D. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and
type of installation indicated.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors and frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free of defects, warp, wave, and
buckle. Accurately form metal to sizes and profiles indicated. Accurately machine, file, and fit
exposed connections with hairline joints. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, fill, dress,
and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
B. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat heads for exposed screws and bolts, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware, including cutouts,
reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to final hardware schedule and
templates provided by hardware supplier. Secure reinforcement by spot welding. Comply with
applicable requirements of ANSI/BJMA A156.115 and A156.115 W specifications for door and
frame preparation for hardware. Factory reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied
hardware. Factory drill and tap for surface-applied hardware, except at pushplates and
kickplates provide reinforcing only.
1. Locate hardware as indicated on the drawings or in Division 8 Section ‘Door Hardware’
or, if not indicated, according to HMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for
Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
2.7 METALLIC-COATED STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated steel door and frame work, inside and
out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and
other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to
be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply
galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Apply a sufficient number of coats, baked on, to obtain
uniformly smooth exposed surfaces. Touch up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-
free, primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for zinc-coated steel; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish
paint system indicated.
2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated steel door and frame work, inside and
out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 “Solvent Cleaning”; remove dirt,
oil, grease, or other contaminates that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale, shavings,
fillings, and rust, if present, complying with SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Apply sufficient number of coats, baked on, to obtain uniformly
smooth exposed surfaces. Touch up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, corrosion-inhabiting,
lead- and chromate-free, universal primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance
criteria; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors and frames according to DHI A115.IG, the Architect reviewed shop
drawings, and manufacturer's written recommendations and installation instructions.
B. Frames: Install frames where indicated. Extend frame anchorages below fills and finishes.
Coordinate the installation of built-in anchors for wall and partition construction as required
with other work.
1. Welded Frames:
a. Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position; plumb; align, and brace
securely until permanent anchors are set.
1) At concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with
machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. Countersink anchors, and
fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
2) Anchor bottom of frames to floors through floor anchors with threaded
fasteners.
3) Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings.
Weld, grind, and finish as required to conceal evidence of splicing on
exposed faces.
4) Remove spreader bars only after frames are properly set and secured.
Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to
make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
2. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Doors:
1. Non-Fire Rated Doors: Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective frames, with
the following clearances:
a. Jambs and Head: 3/32 inch (2 mm).
b. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
c. Bottom: 3/8 inch (9 mm), if no threshold or carpet.
d. Bottom: 1/8 inch (3 mm), at threshold or carpet.
D. Wood Door Installation: Refer to Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
E. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer’s instructions and Division 08
Section ‘Door Hardware’. Drill and tap for machine screws as required. Do not use self tapping
sheet metal screws. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs,
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 10
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
and to contact stops uniformly. Adjust hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work
in complete and proper operating condition.
1. Field cut existing hollow metal doors and frames indicated to receive new hardware. Field
cutting shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall not void the existing door
and frame labeling.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items just before final inspection.
Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work,
including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
1. Finish Painting: Refer to Division 09 Section “Interior Painting”.
C. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or
otherwise defective.
D. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to
ensure that steel doors and frames will be without any damage or deterioration, at time of
substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 081113
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes door hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data including installation details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit door hardware schedule prepared by or under the
supervision of door hardware supplier. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with
doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of
door hardware. The Architect’s review of schedule shall neither be construed as a complete
check nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, deviations, or omissions
from the specified requirements to provide complete door hardware for the project.
1. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule in
the drawings.
2. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware. Supply templates to door and frame
manufacturer(s) to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts for
hardware. Detail any conditions requiring custom extended lip strikes, or any
other special or custom conditions.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
C. Keying Schedule: Submit keying schedule prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and
index each key set to unique door designations.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier, who has completed a minimum of three (3)
projects over the last 5 years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicated
for the project and which have resulted in construction with a record of successful in service
performance, and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door
hardware and keying.
1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:
1. Provide hardware items complying with the applicable provisions for accessibility and
usability by the disabled and handicapped in compliance with Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
2. NFPA 101: Comply with applicable provisions for means of egress doors.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door
Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction.
B. Templates: Furnish templates and door hardware schedules, coordinated for the application of
door hardware items with door and frame details, to door opening fabricators and trades
performing door opening work to permit the preparation of doors and frames to receive the
specified door hardware. Where the door hardware item scheduled is not adaptable to the
finished size of door opening members requiring door hardware, submit an item having a
similar operation and quality to the Architect for review. Each door hardware item shall be
fabricated to templates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Faulty operation of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HINGES AND PIVOTS
A. Butt Hinge Products and Manufacturers:
1. Medium Weight, 3 Knuckle, Steel: Complying with BHMA A156.1 A8112:
a. CB1900; Stanley Commercial Hardware (STH).
B. Pivot and Pivot Hinge Products and Manufacturers:
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Offset Pivots:
a. Offset Pivot with Jamb Mounted Bottom Pivot: Mortised mounted, handed, 3/4
inch (19 mm) offset pivot set and composed of a head mounted top pivot and
jamb mounted bottom pivot. Furnish with extended spindles. Complying with
BHMA A156.4 C07131.
1) Model 195 Offset Hung Pivot Set; Rixson-Firemark, Inc. (RIX).
2. Center Pivots: Mortised mounted, non-handed, center pivot set and composed of a head
mounted top pivot and floor mounted bottom pivot. Furnish with extended spindles.
Complying with BHMA A156.4 C07032.
a. Model 370 Center Hung Pivot Set; Rixson-Firemark, Inc. (RIX).
3. Intermediate Pivots (Non-electric): Mortised jamb mounted, non-load bearing, handed,
3/4 inch (19 mm) offset intermediate pivots. Complying with BHMA A156.4 C07321.
a. Model M19 x ¾ Intermediate Offset Pivots; Rixson-Firemark, Inc. (RIX).
4. Intermediate Pivots (Electric): Mortised jamb mounted, non-load bearing, handed, 3/4
inch (19 mm) offset intermediate pivots. Complying with BHMA A156.4 C07321.
a. Model M19 x ¾ Intermediate Offset Pivots; Rixson-Firemark, Inc. (RIX).
C. General Hinge and Pivot Characteristics: Where door jamb or trim projects to such an extent
that the width of leaf specified will not allow the door to clear such frame or trim, furnish
hinges and pivots with leaves of sufficient width to clear. Hinges and pivots shall be template
hinges conforming to BHMA A156.1 and in accordance with door and frame material
requirements.
1. Pivot Hinge Special Layouts: At deep reveals where door frame profiles will not permit
the use of a standard top pivot (e.g. deep reveals, narrow frames, full height doors)
furnish top pivots less top leaf with specially designed and fabricated pivot block.
D. Butt Hinge and Offset Pivot Hinge Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to and including 60 inches (1524 mm).
2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights of greater than 60 inches (1524 mm) to and
including 90 inches (2286 mm).
3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights greater than 90 inches (2286 mm) to and including
120 inches (3048 mm).
4. Provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than
120 inches (3048 mm).
E. Butt Hinge Sizes: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) h. x 4 inches (102 mm) or 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) w.
for doors up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) in width; 5 inches (127 mm) h. x 4 inches
(102 mm) or 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) w. for doors greater than 36 inches (914 mm) in width.
F. Hinge Characteristics: Full mortise type with square corners. All butt hinges are to have non-
rising pins. All butt hinges shall be furnished with button tips.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
G. Fasteners: Package all hinges and pivots with machine and wood screws as required by door
and frame construction.
2.2 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Mortise Lock and Latch Sets: Heavy duty, commercial, mortise bodies complying with BHMA
A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, with throughbolted lever trim. All lock and latch sets, to be
furnished complete with heavy gage wrought steel zinc dichromate or chrome plated case, trim,
adjustable beveled square cornered armored fronts, steel or stainless steel hubs, and 6 pin
cylinders. Provide wrought, or black plastic, box strikes for each lock and latch set with curved
lips of sufficient length to protect frames. Provide solid forged or cast levers with wrought
roses.
1. Schlage L9000 Series, 02 Design, A-Wrought Rose 2 1/8” dia, Exclude Escutcheon;
Schlage Lock Company (SCH). Provide handed ANSI 4-7/8 inches curved lip strikes die
punched to match bolts provided with latchset functions only (Part No. XL11-820/XL11-
821), provide non-handed standard curve lip strikes for all other functions 10-072.
a. Type 1: L9010 Passage Latch Function, Type 02 Lever Handle, Exclude
Escutcheon.
b. Type 2: L9496 Privacy w/"OCCUPIED" Indicator Function, Type 02 Lever Handle,
Exclude Escutcheon.
c. Type 3: L9470 Classroom Function, Type 02 Lever Handle and Cylinder to Match
Banks Standard, Exclude Escutcheon.
d. Type 4: L9480 Storeroom Function, Type 02 Lever Handle and Cylinder to Match
Banks Standard, Exclude Escutcheon.
B. Access Control Locksets:
1. Type 1:
a. Simplex Unical L1000 Series Lockset. L1000-2 Entry by combination or key bypass.
(For Best key ways, refer to Lockset key way by Region).
b. Alarm Lock Systems, Inc. – Trilogy DL2700/26D (For Schlage key ways, refer to
Lockset key ways by Region)
c. Trilogy DL2700IC/26D (For Medeco IC key ways, refer to Lockset key ways by
Region)
d.[Southern Branches Only] Ilco/ Kaba Simplex LL1021B or LB1021B. L1000-2
Entry by combination or key bypass.
2.3 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Cylinders: Full faced cylinders with square shouldered (not tapered) compression rings, 6 pin
cylinders, standard threaded, keyed into building system, with cams to suit lock functions.
Provide cylinders for installation into all locks.
B. Keying System: Final keying to determine lock cylinders, keyed alike sets, level of keying,
master key groups, grandmaster keying system shall be as directed by the Owner. Supplier
and Contractor shall meet with the Owner and obtain final instructions in writing. Provide 2
nickel silver keys for each lock, and 6 keys for each grandmaster and masterkey system.
Provide 2 blank keys for each lock for the Owner’s convenience in making additional keys.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Temporary Cylinders: Provide temporary cylinders in locks during construction and as
may be necessary for security or as may be requested by the Owner. All temporary
cylinders shall be individually keyed as required and subject to a single master key.
C. Key Control System: Furnish a key control system with complete accessories including key
gathering envelopes, labels, reserve pattern key tags with self-locking key clips, key receipt
forms, key receipt holders, 3 way visible card index, temporary key markers and permanent key
markers.
D. All locksets are required to have a small format IC cores during construction. Final cores to be
provided by owner. Coordinate with PNC prior to ordering hardware.
E. Key Ways (By Region): G.C. to verify with PNC prior to ordering.
1. Cincinnati, OH – Medeco Biaxial
2. North and Central New Jersey – The Schlage C System
3. Southern New Jersey – Schlage E (Sicklerville)
4. Eastern Pennsylvania - Schlage Primus
5. Philadelphia, PA – Schlage C (Lower Macungie – Best)
6. Western Pennsylvania – Best
7. Washington D.C. - Medeco Small Format IC
8. Kentucky – Medeco IC.
9. Central Ohio – Medeco Small Format Interchangeable Core (7-pin)
10. Northeast Ohio – Corbin Russwin
11.Northwest Ohio – Varies by Site – Verify with PNC
12.Erie – Youngstown OH – Schlage (E keyway)
13.Georgia – Medeco (7-pin SFIC)
14.Alabama - Medeco (7-pin SFIC)
15.Illinois – Best
16.Chicago - Schlage Large Format IC (6-pin)
17.Dallas,Texas – Schlage (7-pin SFIC)
18.Houston,Texas – Schlage (7-pin SFIC)
2.4 STRIKES
A. Strikes for Locks and Latches: All strikes for locks and latches shall be provided by the lock and
latch manufacturer unless otherwise specified or scheduled, refer to Article ‘Locks and Latches’.
2.5 OPERATING TRIM (PUSHES AND PULLS)
A. Type 1: Fabricate push pulls for offset mounting from 1-1/4 inch diameter stainless steel bar
stock in finish as scheduled. Custom fabricate push pulls to 48 inches.
1. GSH 164/165; Gallery Specialty Hardware (GSH).
2.6 CLOSERS
A. Surface-Mounted Closers: Closers shall meet BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Properly detail closers to
meet application requirements by providing drop plates, brackets, etc. to meet application and
installation requirements as indicated. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for size of
door closer depending on size of door, stack pressure conditions, and anticipated frequency of
use. Arm finish to match closer cover finish scheduled. Provide metal covers of clean line
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
design with plated or primed for paint finish as scheduled and that require removal in order to
make adjustments to closer.
1. 4010/4040/4115-MC-3077 CNS; LCN Closers (LCN).
B. Overhead Concealed Closers, Butt and Offset Hung: Closers shall meet BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
Properly detail closers to meet application and installation requirements as indicated. Comply
with manufacturers recommendations for size of door closer depending on size of door, stack
pressure conditions, and anticipated frequency of use. 108 Degree opening with proper
package as per manufacturer's specifications. Provide manufacturers standard cover plate
finished to match exposed portions of butts or pivots provided.
1. Kawneer Sam-II; Kawneer (KWN).
2.7 EXIT DEVICES
A. Type 1: Concealed Vertical Rod Exit Device
1. HDEL3547A-388NL-OP-US26D; Von Duprin (VD).
B. Type 2: Concealed Vertical Rod Exit Device
1. 3547A-EO-US26D; Von Duprin (VD).
C. Power Supply with built-in transformer:
1. PS873-2; Von Duprin (VD).
D. Rim Cylinder at active leaf and inactive leaf:
1. 3216; Von Duprin (VD).
2.8 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Kick Plates: Fabricate protection plates from minimum 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick stainless
steel, beveled top and 2 sides (B3E), square corners, complying with BHMA A156.6, and
fastened with oval head Phillips fasteners countersunk into plate surface.
B. Size: Furnish kick plates sized 2 inches (51 mm) less than door width. Furnish kickplates in 12
inches (305 mm) heights, unless otherwise indicated. Mount protective plates flush with
bottom of door.
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Overhead Stop:
1. 410 Series; Glynn-Johnson (GJ)
B. Floor Stops: Provide manufacturer's standard riser heights as required for carpeted areas in
conjunction with the floor bumpers scheduled.
1. Type 1: For Thresholds, Carpet and/or Undercut Doors: Comply with BHMA 156.16 Type
L12161, L02161 or L12141.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
a. 442; Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
C. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Type L03021; grey rubber. Provide 3
silencers for each single door.
D. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Type L03011; grey rubber. Provide 3
silencers for each single door.
2.10 THRESHOLDS
A. Type 1 (Metal): Zero International, Inc. (ZI); No.3676A Traction Tread Saddle (Size 6”); (1)
Zero International, Inc. (ZI); No. 268A Nosing (at Exterior Side); (1) Zero International, Inc.
(ZI); No.469A Bracket (at Interior Side).
B. Type 2 (Metal): Zero International, Inc. (ZI); No.3675A Traction Tread Saddle (Size 5”); (2)
Zero International, Inc. (ZI); No. 268A Nosing; (1) Zero International, Inc. (ZI); No.469A
Bracket.
2.11 WEATHER STRIPPING
A. 475 Door Frame (all sides); Zero International, Inc. (ZI).
2.12 RAIN DRIP
A. 346C; 40" Aluminum - Pemko (PM).
2.13 DOOR SWEEP
A. 3452AV; 36" Aluminum (at door sill) - Pemko (PM).
2.14 DOOR VIEWER
A. DS238; silver anodized
2.15 COAT HOOKS
A. Model #CH700-SA, www.bellmanscarts.com. Heavy-duty Chrome plated Steel rack, (12) twelve
hooks per rack. 36.5"W x 3 3/4"H x 4"D.
B. Model #2085AL, www.peterpepper.com. Coat rack with four (4) hooks on bar. Bar Material:
Extruded Aluminum, Natural Anodized Finish. Coat Hook Material: Die-cast Aluminum. 22
"W x 5"H x 3 3/4"D.
2.16 LOCK GUARD
A. Model #LG1 – Ives, Finish 630
2.17 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Provide each door hardware item without exposed manufacturers
labels, names, or designs.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips oval-head
screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware item being attached. Machine
screws and expansion shields shall be used for attaching hardware to concrete and masonry.
Use throughbolts for renovation work only where existing door blocking and reinforcements are
unknown.
1. Concealed Fasteners: All new doors and door frames have been specified with adequate
blocking and reinforcement provisions to eliminate exposed throughbolting of hardware
items. Doors installed with exposed throughbolts will be rejected and replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner. Where through bolts are used on existing doors
provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2.18 FINISHES
A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Finishes of the same designation, that come from 2 or more
sources, shall match when the items are viewed at arms length and approximately 2' apart.
Unless otherwise scheduled, match each hardware item in a single hardware set with the
scheduled latch or lock set finish. Painting of BHMA 600 (USP) surfaces is required and is
specified under Division 9 Section ‘Painting’:
C. Designations: The abbreviations used to schedule hardware finishes are generally BHMA
(Federal Standards where indicated in parenthesis) designations. Comply with base material
and finish requirements indicated by the following:
D. The base finish for all hardware is to be:
1. BHMA 626 (US26D): Satin chromium plated.
E. Only when component is not manufactured in the specified base finish, substitute with:
1. BHMA 628 (US28): Satin aluminum, clear anodized.
2. BHMA 630 (US32D): Satin stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install hardware in accordance DHI A115 (for steel doors and frames, DHI A115-W series for
wood doors, and hardware manufacturers installation instructions for doors and frames
fabricated from other than steel or wood.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at the following heights, unless specifically
indicated on the drawings or required to comply with governing regulations:
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Locks and Latches: 38 inches (956 mm) to center of lever from finish floor.
2. Door Pulls: 44 inches (1118 mm) from finish floor to center of grip. Pull bases centered
on door stiles, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Door Pulls: Pull bases centered on top and bottom door rails, and spaced from lock edge
of door stile as indicated, or recommended, by the pull manufacturer.
4. Push Plates: 44 inches (1118 mm) from finish floor to center of plate. Coordinate with
pull location.
5. Horizontal Push/Pull Bar: 42 inches (1067 mm) from finish floor to center of pull/pull.
Push/Pull bases centered on door stiles, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Butt Hinges: 10 inches (254 mm) to bottom of lowest hinge from finish floor; 5 inches
(127 mm) to top of upper hinge from top of door; space intermediate hinges equally
between lower and upper hinges.
7. Deadbolts: Not more than 44 inches (1118 mm) from finish floor to operating trim.
8. Flush Bolt Operating Mechanisms: Top bolt 66 to 72 inches (1676 to 1829 mm) from
finish floor, bottom bolt 12 inches (305 mm) from finish floor.
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install
overhead surface closers for maximum degree of opening obtainable. Place on room side of
corridor doors, stair side of stair doors, secondary corridor side of doors between corridors.
Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are
later to be finished, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim
units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items
until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
C. Do not install permanent key cylinders in locks until the time of preliminary acceptance by the
Owner. At the time of preliminary acceptance, and in the presence of the Owner's
representative, permanent key all lock cylinders. Record and file all keys in the key control
system, and turn system over to Owner for sole possession and control.
D. Key control storage system shall be installed where directed by the Owner.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every hardware component. Replace hardware components that
cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for
building stack pressures and final operation of forced air mechanical equipment and to comply
with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean hardware components as
necessary to restore proper finish. Provide protection during the progress of the work and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is in perfect working order and without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 087100
GLAZING 088000 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
.
1. Doors.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide and install watertight and airtight glazing systems capable of withstanding
thermal movement and wind and impact loads without failure of any kind, including loss or
breakage of glass, failure of seal or gaskets, exudation of glazing sealants, and excessive
deterioration of glazing materials.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses and heat treatments indicated are minimum requirements.
Glazing details shown are for convenience of detailing only and are to be confirmed by the
Contractor relative to cited standards and final framing details. Confirm glass thicknesses and
heat treatments, verified by analysis, as required to meet the performance and testing
requirements specified in Division 8 Section “Glazed Curtain Walls,” “Aluminum-Framed
Entrances,” “Aluminum Windows,” and “All Glass Storefronts.”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Manufacturers Letter: The glass manufacturer shall submit a letter certifying that he has
reviewed the glazing details proposed for the project, including the use of gaskets and sealants,
and that each product to be furnished is recommended for the application shown.
C. Thermal Stress and Wind Load Analyses: Submit the following from the glass manufacturer:
1. Thermal stress analysis for each exterior glass unit type, each building elevation. The
analysis shall clearly indicate all the expected service temperature ranges and the effects
of partial and full shading on the glass. Append to the thermal stress analysis a
statement from the glass manufacturer that based upon this analysis that the resulting
thermal stresses will not reduce the specified "statistical probability of breakage".
2. Wind load analysis for each glass unit type, each building elevation. The analysis shall
clearly indicate that the statistical probability of breakage at the design wind pressure will
not exceed the specified statistical probability of breakage.
D. Samples: Label samples to indicate product, characteristics, and locations in the work. Furnish
samples of the following:
1. Except for clear glass, submit samples of each glass type specified, in the form of 12-
inch- (300-mm-) square Samples.
GLAZING 088000 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2. Submit samples of each glass type specified where production run variations, and defects
are expected.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
F. Glass Treatment Certificates: Submit glass treatment certificates signed by manufacturer of the
heat soaked glass products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
H. Product Test Reports: Submit product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket
indicated.
I. Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Glass and Glass Accessories: Obtain glass and glass accessories from
one source for each product indicated below:
1. Primary glass.
2. Coated glass.
3. Heat treated glass.
4. Insulating glass.
5. Glazing gaskets.
C. VOC Limitations: LEED Credit EQ 4.1: Refer to VOC limit tables in Division 1 Section “Air
Quality Management” for VOC requirements of products of this Section.
D. Safety Glass: Comply with the applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and
regulations of Federal and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction, wherever requirements
conflict the more stringent shall be required. Obtain approvals from all such authorities. As a
minimum provide Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
(Consumer Product Safety Commission “Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials”, as
published in the Code of Federal Regulations) and ANSI Z97.1.
E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual."
F. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass
Certification Council (IGCC).
GLAZING 088000 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and
when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to
Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those
coated-glass units whose coatings flake, peel, or crack within the specified warranty period
indicated below. Upon notification of such deterioration within the warranty period furnish
replacement glass units for those glass units whose coatings have flaked, peeled or cracked at
the convenience of the Owner.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner
and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-
glass units whose hermetic seal has failed within specified warranty period indicated below.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass. Upon notification of such deterioration within the warranty period furnish replacement
glass units for failed glass units at the convenience of the Owner.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to the drawings for the extent of glass types and locations. Glass types indicated on the
drawings are keyed to the Part 3 Glass Schedule Articles at the end of this section. The
Contractor shall confirm the levels of heat treatment required for each glass type scheduled as
contained in Articles Performance Requirements, Submittals and Quality Assurance.
2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as
indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
GLAZING 088000 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
A. General: Heat treat glass where required to meet safety glazing requirements.
B. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to
bottom edge of installed glass unit.
C. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave
distortion parallel to bottom edge of installed glass unit if roller hearth process selected, except
provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks.
D. Sizes and Cutting: Prior to heat treatment, cut glass to required sizes as determined by
accurate measurement of openings to be glazed, making allowance for required edge
clearances. Cut and process edges in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations.
Do not cut or treat edges in the field.
E. Heat-Strengthened Glass: Provide glass complying with ASTM C1048 Kind HS. Surface
compression range shall be between 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) and 7,000 psi (48 MPa).
F. Fully Tempered Glass: Provide glass complying with ASTM C1048 Kind FT and meeting the
requirements of ANSI Z97.1. Surface compression shall be equal to or greater than 10,000 psi
(69 MPa). After tempering, heat soak 100% of all fabricated glass units to European Union
Standard ENI14179 to eliminate inclusion related glass breakage. Statistical heat soaking shall
not be permitted.
G. Flatness Tolerances: All heat treated glass shall be fabricated to the following flatness
tolerances:
1. Overall Bow and Warp: Not greater than the maximum bow and warp tolerances in any
direction as listed in ASTM C1048 Table 2. Localized warp limited to 1/32 inch in 12
inches (0.79 mm in 304.8 mm).
2. Roll Ripple: The deviation from flatness at any peak (peak to valley deviation) shall not
exceed 0.003 inches for 6 mm (0.0762 mm for 6 mm) thick glass.
2.4 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units, with dehydrated entrapped air, consisting of sheets
of glass hermetically sealed at all edges with a polyisobutylene primary and a silicone secondary
elastomeric sealant. The lites of glass shall be separated by dessicant containing aluminum
spacers. All insulating glass units shall be IGCC certified to comply with ASTM E 774 for
Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Division 8 Section
“Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.”
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass
is indicated.
B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Division 8
Section “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls” are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are
measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
GLAZING 088000 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than
250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Gasket, Blocking, and Spacer Wet Glazing Materials: Silicone, compatible with and adherent to
each material it will be in contact with, as recommended by the manufacturer to fulfill
performance requirements.
C. Butt Glazing Sealants: Refer to Division 7 Section Joint Sealants, Article ‘Elastomeric Joint
Sealants’, subparagraph ‘Structural Glazing’.
2.6 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets:
1. Neoprene: Continuous extruded neoprene with, cross sectional profile, physical
properties, and tolerances as recommended by the window and curtain wall
manufacturer, and as required, to comply with the performance requirements specified
and shown all in compliance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C864, Option II.
2. EPDM: Continuous extruded EPDM with cross sectional profile, physical properties, and
tolerances as recommended by the window and curtain wall manufacturer, and as
required, to comply with the performance requirements specified and shown all in
compliance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C864, Option II.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber: Continuous extruded thermoplastic polyolefin rubber
with cross sectional profile, physical properties, and tolerances as recommended by the
window and curtain wall manufacturer, and as required, to comply with the performance
requirements specified and shown all in compliance with the applicable provisions of
ASTM C1115.
4. Any material indicated above.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Continuous extruded expanded foam with, cross sectional profile,
physical properties, and tolerances as recommended by the window and curtain wall
manufacturer, and as required, to comply with the performance requirements specified and
shown all in compliance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C509, Option II, Type II;
provide the following:
1. Neoprene.
2. EPDM.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
4. Any material indicated above.
C. Continuous Structural Gaskets/Spacers: Continuous extruded silicone or silicone compatible
rubber, with cross sectional profile, physical properties, and tolerances as recommended by the
window and curtain wall manufacturer, and as required, to comply with the performance
requirements specified and shown. Gaskets/Spacers shall be tested for compatibility with
silicone sealants and shall be subject to the acceptance of the sealant manufacturer.
GLAZING 088000 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces, and wet glazing materials,
contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: EPDM complying with ASTM C864 (Option II), blocks, 85 +/- 5 Shore A
durometer hardness, 1/16 inch (1.5-mm) less than the channel width, and length based on the
square footage of the glass unit to be supported in accordance with GANA standards and glass
manufacturer recommendations but not less than 4 inches (101.6 mm).
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness of 40
to 60.
E. Edge Blocks: EPDM complying with ASTM C864 (Option II), blocks, 65 +/- 5 Shore A durometer
hardness, minimum 4 inches (101.6 mm) long and sized to allow 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) clearance
between edge of glass and block.
2.8 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for
Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with
written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with
system performance requirements.
1. Edge and Surface Conditions: Comply with the recommendations of AAMA "Structural
Properties of Glass" for "clean-cut" edges, except comply with manufacturer's
recommendations when they are at variance therewith.
B. Cutting: Do not nip glass edges. Edges may be wheel cut or sawed and seamed at
manufacturer's option. For glass to be cut at site, provide glass 2 inches (50.8 mm) larger than
required in both dimensions, so as to facilitate cutting of clean cut edges without the necessity
of seaming or nipping. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade heat-treated glass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine glass framing, with glazier and glass framing erector present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Compliance with the specified manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those
for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
GLAZING 088000 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Clean glazing stops, glazing channels, and rabbets which will be in contact with the
glazing materials immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which might fail in
adhesion or interfere with bond of sealants. Comply with manufacturers instructions for
final wiping of surfaces immediately before application of primers. Wipe metal surfaces
with IPA (isopropyl alcohal) unless otherwise required by compatibility and adhesion
testing results.
2. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds. When priming, comply with wet glazing
manufacturers recommendations.
B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install any pieces which are
improperly sized or have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage.
Remove labels from glass immediately after installation.
C. Seal vent (breather or capillary) tubes in insulating glass units in accordance with the insulating
glass manufacturers written recommendations.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
1. All glass units shall be installed in accordance with the glass manufacturer's
recommendations.
a. Structurally Glazed Insulating Glass Units: Set full height continuous structural
gaskets/spacers to vertical mullions. Set glass units with void between edge of
units and head/sill channel, but with units fully within head/sill rebate so as to
provide a proper bite. Align glass unit edges over vertical mullion continuous
structural gasket/spacers and secure with manufacturer's recommended
temporary cleats. Structurally seal glass unit to vertical mullions with specified
one-part structural silicone sealant. Tool structural silicone flush in alignment to
mullion face and perpendicular to face of interior glass light; remove excess
structural silicone from glass and metal substrates. After full cure of structural
silicone sealant remove temporary cleats. Any holes left in the vertical mullions
which were caused by the temporary cleats shall be sealed immediately. Insert
and shape weatherseal joint backer rods, or gaskets, into vertical void between
glass units and at a proper depth to receive silicone weatherseal sealant. Place
silicone weatherseal sealant into void and tool flush with adjacent exterior glass
light faces; remove excess sealant from glass and metal substrates.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project
conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
GLAZING 088000 - 8
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
D. Apply primers to surfaces indicated to receive glazing materials. Use primers as determined by
preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless more stringent requirements are recommended by glass manufacturer.
Place blocks to allow water passage to weep holes.
1. For Glass Units Less Than 72 inches (1830 mm): Locate setting blocks at sill one-quarter
of the width in from each end of the glass unless otherwise recommended by the glass
manufacturer.
2. For Glass Units 72 inches (1830 mm) or Greater: Locate setting blocks at sill one-eighth
of the width in from each end of the glass, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm), unless
otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm)
as follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, sized and
located to comply with the glass manufacturers recommendations and the requirements in
referenced glazing publications.
1. Edge blocking will not be required at structural glazed window walls unless specifically
required by the glass manufacturer for the conditions shown.
I. Set glass lites with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics, producing the
greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance on the entire exterior wall elevation.
1. Set glass units with void between edge of units and glazing channel.
2. Orient and install insulating glass units made up with one light of low emissivity coated
glass with the uncoated glass light on the inboard (building) side.
3. Orient and install insulating glass units made up with one light of tinted glass with the
untinted glass light on the inboard (building) side.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize gasket on
opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
K. Miter cut gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket
manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away.
GLAZING 088000 - 9
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent
labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way
and from any source, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.5 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: GL3 & GL4 Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide
Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) glass lites complying with the following:
1. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT (tempered), Condition A (uncoated
surfaces) where heat treatment is required to comply with performance requirements.
END SECTION 088000
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled
content is not less than 25 percent.
B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm)
diameter.
C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25.4 by 4.76 mm) by length indicated.
D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-
inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
E. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main
beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System.
c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into
top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of
studs to provide lateral bracing.
2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm)
deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and
outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.
2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-
inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-
mm-) thick, galvanized steel.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to
reduce sound transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-
inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum baresteel
thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-
mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or non-slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall
attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45
mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel
stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
C. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
(3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and
transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
4. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches (150 mm) o.c.
D. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
E. Z-Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold
in place with Z-furring members spaced [24 inches (610 mm)] [600 mm] o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.
F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
GYPSUM BOARD 092600 - 1
PNC Bank - Prototype 0000000.00 08-26-11
SECTION 092600 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
GYPSUM BOARD 092600 - 2
PNC Bank - Prototype 0000000.00 08-26-11
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers and plants known to comply with the proceeding requirements include thE
following:
1. National Gypsum Company. Shippingport, PA Plant
2. USG Corporation. Aliquippa, PA Plant
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Regular Type ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be
more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Location: apply in double layer at curved assemblies
E. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have more sag resistance than
regular type gyp bd.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Location: Ceiling surfaces
2.4 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers and plants known to comply with the proceeding requirements include the
following:
1. National Gypsum Company. Shippingport, PA Plant
GYPSUM BOARD 092600 - 3
PNC Bank - Prototype 0000000.00 08-26-11
2. USG Corporation. Aliquippa, PA Plant,
C. Cellulose Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, gypsum
sheathing, with manufacturer's standard edges.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. USG Corporation; Fiberock Aqua-Tough.
2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.
2. Core: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.
B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard
edges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following: Manufacturers and plants known to comply with the proceeding
requirements include the following
a. National Gypsum Company. Shippingport, PA Plant
b. USG Corporation. Aliquippa, PA Plant
2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
b. LC-Bead: J shaped; exposed lon flange receives joint compound.
c. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
d. Expansion (control) joint.
e. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
GYPSUM BOARD 092600 - 4
PNC Bank - Prototype 0000000.00 08-26-11
2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M..
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Brown Board
3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim
accessories, and fasteners, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type,
sandable topping compounds.
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
GYPSUM BOARD 092600 - 5
PNC Bank - Prototype 0000000.00 08-26-11
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced
by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or
rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. OSI Sealants, Inc; Pro-Series, SC 175 Acoustical Sound Sealant Non-Flammable-
Latex
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+Silacone
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
GYPSUM BOARD 092600 - 6
PNC Bank - Prototype 0000000.00 08-26-11
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc., except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m)
in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these
locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Flexible Type: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
GYPSUM BOARD 092600 - 7
PNC Bank - Prototype 0000000.00 08-26-11
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm)
minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fireresistance-rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with
vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over
furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with
gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten
gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
E. Curved Surfaces:
1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,
across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves
and tangent to them.
2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm)
o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with
screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or
structural penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap
where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
GYPSUM BOARD 092600 - 8
PNC Bank - Prototype 0000000.00 08-26-11
B. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install where indicated with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where
panels abut other construction or penetrations.
C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved
by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
E. ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
GYPSUM BOARD 092600 - 9
PNC Bank - Prototype 0000000.00 08-26-11
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted
items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
C. Samples: For each acoustical panel, for each exposed suspension system member, for each
exposed molding and trim, and for each color and texture required.
D. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer, with not less than 5 years experience in the
installation of materials specified, and who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Performance Requirements: In areas where gypsum wallboard partitions are dependent on the
ceiling suspension system for lateral support, design and install suspension system components
to sustain the imposed load from the completed partition system including a minimum inward
and outward pressure of 5 psf normal to the plane of the wall.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until wet work (painting,
drywall, interior tilework, and concrete leveling) in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the
levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed, but not
fewer than.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed, but not fewer than.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion
resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type
indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted
by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, Clips and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M,
Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
E. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel.
1. Diameter: 1/4-inch (6.34-mm).
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized.
F. Seismic struts and seismic clips when required by Building Code and local jurisdiction.
G. Standard Hold down Clips for Exterior Acoustical Panel System.
H. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538
I. inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, and in depth indicated.
J. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and
suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS – Interior
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for acoustical panel ceilings is based on Ultima
Item # 1912 by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Symphony m; Capaul Div. Of BPB America, Inc.
2. Mars Climaplus; USG Corporation.
B. Color: White.
C. LR: Not less than 0.90.
D. NRC: Not less than 0.70,Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.
E. Edge Detail: Beveled tegular.
F. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
G. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
H. Metal Suspension System:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Supraframe
2. Chicago Metallic; Tempra 4000
3. USG Corporation; Donn Centricitee DXT.
2.4 LAY-IN CEILING – Exterior
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for acoustical panel ceilings is based on Sheetrock Brand
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Lay-in Ceiling Tile Climaplus, Vinyl Item # 3260 by USG Industries. Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product.
C. Color: White.
D. Edge Detail: Square.
E. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7-mm).
F. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
G. Metal Suspension System:
1. USG Corporation; ZXLA26
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636, per manufacturer's written
instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with
insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss
obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with
concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3
inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in
12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another.
F. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
G. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
H. Provide manufacturer’s standard hold-down clips, two per panel, centered on the grid, between
the panels for Exterior Acoustical Panel System.
END OF SECTION 095113
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall base and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not
less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern
required.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m)
or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Colors and Patterns: As indicated in finish schedule.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861, subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; 1/8" Rubbermyte® Wall Base Rubber Base.
2. Flexco; 1/8” Wallflowers Premium Wall Base.
3. Roppe Corporation; Type TS – Pinnacle Plus, Rubber Base.Type (Material Requirement):
TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
B. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid).
D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe) at resilient and hard floor surfaces; Straight (toeless) at carpet.
E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
F. Height: 6 inches (152 mm).
G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
H. Outside Corners: Job formed.
I. Inside Corners: Job formed.
J. Surface: Smooth.
2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering.
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products.
2. Flexco.
3. Roppe Corporation.
B. Material: Rubber.
C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturers for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without
producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends
occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to
produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an
inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave
back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096513
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 096813– TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes carpet tile and installation.
B. Refer to responsibility matrix for provision/ installation requirements for projects where owner
provides carpet tile and GC installs it, the GC is to coordinate with the owner to provide
necessary area take offs and layout drawings prior to owner’s placing order.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
Cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2. Carpet tile type, color and dye lot.
3. Pattern of installation, carpet locations, direction and starting points per floor.
4. Pattern type, location, and direction.
5. Pile direction.
6. Insets and borders.
7. Transition and other accessory strips.
8. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C. Samples: For each for each carpet tile and exposed accessory and for each color and pattern
labeled required.
1. Carpet tile: Full size samples
2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch (300-m) long samples.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
F. Maintenance data.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation
Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated
for Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tile,
install carpet tile before installing these items.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile from unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more
than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
B. Special Carpet Tile Installer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile installer
agreeing to fix, repair or replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that
fails within 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. Interface Flooring
a. Color and Pattern: See Finish Schedule.
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Carpet Tile Types: Provide manufactures commercial grade carpet tile for 100% glue down
installation as scheduled on the drawings and in the finish schedule.
C. Environmental Requirements: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product
requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program.
D. Performance Characteristics: As follows:
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 w/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.
2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf per ASTM D 2646.
3. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Per ASTM C 423.
4. Colorfast to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC-165.
5. Colorfast to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 ADU (ATTCC fading units) per AATCC-16
6. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria;
not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per
AATCC-174.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Carpet Adhesives: Water-resistant and nonstaining, high solids, low VOC emitting formulations
that are specifically recommended by the carpet manufacturer, as verified through
compatibility and adhesion testing for the intended substrate and application, and that comply
with flammability requirements for installed carpet:
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and
that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate the installation of carpet so as not to delay the occupancy of the site or interfere
with the completion of construction.
B. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to
be installed. Verify recommended limits for moisture content and alkalinity of concrete
substrates with carpet manufacturer.
1. Moisture Content: Verify moisture content using a standard calcium chloride crystal test
or a 1 yd. x 1 yd. clear plastic test. Perform testing at a frequency as recommended by
the carpet manufacturer. Perform testing at a frequency of not less than once every
1,000 square feet.
2. Alkalinity Test: Verify alkalinity of concrete substrates by drilling a 3/8" diameter hole
approximately 1/4" deep, remove all residue; fill with distilled water, allow water to stand
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3 minutes and test with a calibrated electronic meter or Ph paper. Perform testing at a
frequency of not less than once every 1,000 square feet.
3. Alternative test procedures for moisture content and alkalinity may be acceptable subject
to the carpet manufacturer’s review and written acceptance.
C. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with the following:
1. Provide one of the following:
a. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, existing floor covering adhesive
residues, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods
recommended in writing by the carpet manufacturer.
b. In lieu of mechanical substrate preparation methods the Contractor may utilize
floor sealer materials and methods of the types and methods as recommended, in
writing, by the carpet tile manufacturer. Apply sealer in number of coats, and at
the spread rate, as required by the carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the carpet
manufacturer.
3. Use leveling and patching compounds recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling
cracks, holes and depressions in the substrate. Surface shall be smooth, level and at
proper elevation. Remove ridges, roughness and protrusions from concrete surfaces by
grinding.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
E. Carpet installation shall not commence until painting and finishing work are complete and
ceiling and overhead work is tested, approved, and completed.
F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions, specified industry standards and
recommendations, and as required to match the accepted sample installations. Apply adhesive
in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's directions.
B. Adhere all full size, perimeter tiles, and cut tiles, with a full spread of adhesive. Dry fit cut tiles
and apply adhesive to tile back after tile has been cut. Use full uncut tiles down the center of
corridors and, where necessary, cut perimeter tiles to butt walls.
1. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal
cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Cut openings in carpet for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations. Maintain close
tolerances so that edges of carpet will be covered by plates and escutcheons.
3. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
C. Butt carpet tile tightly together to form seams without gaps or entrapped pile yarns and
aligned with adjoining tiles.
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
D. Edge Strip Installation: Install edge strip at every location where edge of carpet is exposed to
traffic, unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise directed by Architect install in single
lengths and secure in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
E. Traffic over adhesive installations shall be restricted until adhesive has properly cured in
accordance with the adhesive manufacturers recommendations.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: As the carpeting is installed, remove and dispose of all trimmings, excess pieces of
carpeting and laying materials from each area as it is completed. Vacuum carpeting with a
commercial vacuum, having a cylindrical brush or beater bar and high suction. Remove
adhesives, stains, and soil spots in accordance with the carpet manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Protection: Protect carpeting against damage of every kind as damaged carpeting shall be
rejected. Use non-staining cover material for protection. Tape joints of protective covering.
1. Plastic and polyethylene sheet protective coverings shall not be permitted.
2. Remove and replace rejected carpeting with new carpeting. At the completion of the
work and when directed by the Architect, remove covering, vacuum clean carpeting and
remove soiling and stains (if any) to the satisfaction of the Architect.
END OF SECTION 096813
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 099123 – INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and
surfaces.
B. Paint exposed surfaces. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or
surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. Painting includes field painting of
exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and
iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory
applied final finish.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at
an 85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semi-gloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
C. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Quantity: 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each
material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).
3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).
4. M. A. Bruder & Sons, Inc. (M. A. B. Paint).
5. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
6. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
7. Duron Paints (Duron).
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
C. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with
the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not
apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC content not more
than 250 g/L.
D. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and
anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied
in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
E. Colors: As indicated in the Finish Schedule and plans.
2.3 INTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody No. 216: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm).
3. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Prime Fast 037-138: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-4900XI SpeedHide Zero, Interior Zero-VOC Latex Sealer: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).
5. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B11W900
6. Duron: Terminator 2 Water Based Primer/Sealer, DU0071218
B. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal
primer.
1. Benjamin Moore; IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Medal and Wood Enamel No. 163: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm).
3. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer 073-132: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-208, 6-212 SpeedHide, interior/exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
5. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
2.4 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior
application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Regal Wall Satin No. 215 Premium Interior Finishes Flat Finish: Applied
at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
2. Coronado; 26 Line Gold Acrylic Latex Flat Wall Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm).
3. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Wal-Shield Latex Flat 041 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-4110XI SpeedHide Zero, Interior Zero – VOC Latex Flat : Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm).
5. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint, A86 Series: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
6. Duron: Duron Genesis Interior Flat DU0060-Series
B. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Regal AquaVelvet No. 319: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
2. Coronado; 34 Line Tough Walls Acrylic Eggshell Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm).
3. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Low Lustre Latex Enamel 028 Line: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-4310XI SpeedHide Zero, Interior Zero – VOC Latex Eggshell: Applied
at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
5. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Eggshell, B9 Series : Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
6. Duron: Genesis Interior Eggshell Enamel DU0079-Series.
C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for
interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Regal AquaGlo No. 333 Premium Interior Finishes Latex Semi-Gloss:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
2. Coronado; 22 Line Tough Walls Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm).
3. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel 023 Line: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-4510 SpeedHide Zero, Interior Zero – VOC Latex Semi-Gloss: Applied
at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm).
5. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B10 Series: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
6. Duron: Genesis Interior Semi-Gloss DU0083-Series
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. Notify Architect about anticipated
problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.
C. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area,
reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
D. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Provide barrier
coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
1. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
F. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
G. General Application: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended
by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special
attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a
dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
L. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Uninsulated metal piping.
2. Uninsulated plastic piping.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket
material.
7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
M. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Switchgear.
2. Panelboards.
3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
N. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been
prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
O. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
P. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
Q. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished
surfaces.
R. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect
S. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.2 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.
2. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
3. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
END OF SECTION 099123
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 122413 – ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes manual roller shades and motorized shade operators.
B. See Division 6 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller
shades and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, details of installation, operational
clearances, and relationship to adjoining Work.
1. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted
items.
D. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required.
E. Window Treatment Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products passing flame-resistance testing according
to NFPA 701 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Corded Window Covering Product Standard: Provide roller shades comply with WCMA A 100.1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test
response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on
Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROLLER SHADES
A. Products: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide on the following:
1. Draper Inc.; Pfifer Sheerwave SW2510 Greengaurd 1% opacity- Oyster White.
B. Shade Band Material: PVC- Coated Fiberglass
1. Material Width: varies.
2. Color: Oyster White
3. Bottom Hem: Straight.
4. Material Openness Factor: 1 percent.
C. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and
wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the
weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable
from support brackets; with manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade material.
Provide capacity for one roller shade band per roller, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
D. Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller, and reverse, from front of roller, as indicated on
Drawings for double-roller shades.
E. Mounting Brackets: Galvanized or zinc-plated steel or routered aluminum block.
F. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum, with plastic or metal capped ends. Provide concealed,
by pocket of shade material, internal-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as required
for smooth, properly balanced shade operation.
G. Audiovisual Light-Blocking Shades: Designed for eliminating all visible light gaps when shades
are fully closed; fabricated from blackout shade band material with pocket and bottom bar
extended and formed for light-tight joints among shade components and between shade
components and adjacent construction.
H. Shade Operation:
1. Manual Operation: Where indicated on the drawings provide manual shade operation
with continuous loop bead chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and bracket lift operator.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
a. Position of Clutch Operator: Right side of roller, as determined by hand of user
facing shade from inside, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
b. Clutch: Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide
adaptor.
c. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
d. Bead Chain: Stainless steel.
e. Cord Tensioner Mounting: Wall.
f. Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at any position in ascending or
g. descending travel.
I. Mounting: Mounting should allow for easy removal and replacement without damaging roller
shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes.
2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a
flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the
roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.
B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F :
1. Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations
between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined
vertical separations between openings.
D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting
roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method
indicated.
E. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
F. Anodized Aluminum Finish: Class 1, clear anodized.
G. Colors of Plastic Components Exposed to View: Matching or coordinating with shade band
color, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior
face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Maximum variation of gap at window opening perimeter: 1/4 inch, per 8 feet (+/- 1/8
inch) of shade height.
2. Maximum offset from level: 1/8 inch per 5 feet of shade width.
B. Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.
C. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
D. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 01 Section “Closeout
Procedures.".
END OF SECTION 122413
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 220500 – GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 PLUMBING WORK
A. These Specifications are issued to cover all work in connection with the complete installation of
the plumbing work. Plumbing work is hereby defined to include work as herein specified and as
shown on the Drawings issued in connection with this project. Any reference in these
Specifications to the Contractor shall hereby be considered a reference to the Plumbing
Contractor. Any reference or letting of work to subcontractors or manufacturers in these
Specifications does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the work, materials, and
equipment under this Contract. The Plumbing Contractor is responsible for the work and
performance of his subcontractors.
B. The word "building" used throughout these Specifications shall be interpreted to mean the
entire Building Complex.
C. The actual runs and locations of all piping, equipment, and materials shall be determined at the
site and shall be installed to meet the various conditions at the building. It is, however, the
Contractor's responsibility to predetermine the exact locations of piping and equipment, and to
notify the other contractors accordingly and prior to any installation to avoid confliction with
other lines and equipment. Any changes necessary to conceal pipes or clear pipes and
equipment of other trades shall be made without additional expense to the Owner.
D. All work shall be executed and all equipment constructed and installed in accordance with the
requirements of the State labor and industry and environmental protection codes, rules, and
regulations, ASME, the Department of Labor, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction,
OSHA, the National Fire Protection Association, the National Electrical Code as amended to date
of bidding, and all applicable federal, state, county and local ordinances and regulations.
Nothing contained in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be construed to
conflict with the aforesaid codes, ordinances, or regulations. Certificates of approval shall be
obtained from any department issuing same, and shall be turned over to the Owner at the
completion of the work. All fees and permits required shall be satisfied and obtained by the
Contractor and the cost shall be included in the Contract price.
E. The Contractor shall carefully examine the general building drawings, all mechanical and
electrical drawings, and carry on his work so as not to delay or interfere with the work of other
trades. He shall obtain in writing from the other contractors such data as is necessary to
coordinate his work with other branches. This coordination must take place prior to any piping
or equipment installation. As the work in the building nears completion, all threading, cutting,
and similar work shall be done where directed by the Architect. Upon completion of the work,
all remaining waste materials and rubbish resulting from the Contract work shall be removed
from the building and premises.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
F. Where the phrase "or approved equivalent," "or equivalent," or "approved" appears in these
Specifications, it shall refer to the approval of the Architect on the material or equipment
involved.
G. The term "Provide" means to furnish and install. The term "Furnish", used separately, means to
obtain and deliver on the job for installation by other trades.
H. The General Contractor will provide chases and openings in walls, floors, ceilings, and partitions
of construction to receive pipe lines, risers, and other equipment insofar as it is possible to
predetermine the exact location, but the Contractor shall install his work sufficiently in advance
of the building construction to permit his work to be built into place. The Contractor shall advise
the General Contractor of the exact size and location of all chases and openings required for the
installation of his work, and shall check size and location of all such chases and openings
provided by the General Contractor.
I. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sleeves required for pipes passing through new floors,
walls and ceilings before such general construction work is built into place. The Contractor shall
place all inserts required for hangers and supports, as the construction work progresses, so that
unnecessary cutting of construction work will be eliminated.
J. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary structural steel members for the proper
support of all piping and equipment furnished and installed under this Contract. All openings
required through concrete or other construction for supports, piping, and equipment installed
under this Contract shall be provided by the Contractor. No openings shall be made in the
concrete or other construction without first securing the consent and approval of the Architect.
All openings must be neatly drilled, bored or cut in a workmanlike manner, with materials and
equipment suitable for the purpose. Punching or chipping of concrete or other construction will
not be permitted. All openings shall be drilled, bored or cut in a manner satisfactory to and at
locations approved by the Architect. Materials damaged shall be patched or replaced as directed
by the Architect.
K. Advance work as rapidly as possible to permit the plumbing system to be used when it is
required for all areas of the building. Instruct the Operating Personnel as to the proper care and
maintenance of all systems.
L. Equipment and materials of similar types shall be of the same manufacturer unless specifically
indicated otherwise on the Drawings or herein specified. The Contractor shall make final
connections between all equipment furnished under this Contract and equipment furnished
under other contracts except as otherwise specified herein.
M. The materials used throughout shall be those of reputable manufacturers and shall be the best
of their respective kinds. All equipment, components and materials shall be installed in a neat
and workmanlike manner in accordance with best trade practices, manufacturer's
recommendations, and applicable codes and standards and by persons skilled in each particular
branch of the work assigned to them. All work shall be installed subject to the approval of the
Architect.
N. A complete list of materials proposed for each installation shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval before delivery to the site. The Contractor shall submit samples of materials for
approval at the site as requested by the Architect. Such materials may be incorporated into the
structures after serving their purpose as samples.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
O. Where the Contractor elects to substitute approved materials or equipment for materials or
equipment specified, he will be held responsible for all architectural, structural, mechanical, and
electrical changes required for their installation at no additional cost to the Owner.
P. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all apparatus, equipment and appurtenances
furnished by him or his Subcontractors in connection with the work, and special care shall be
taken to protect all parts thereof in such manner as may be necessary or as may be directed.
Protection shall include covers, crating, sheds, or other means to prevent dirt, grit, plaster, or
other foreign substances from entering the working parts of machinery or equipment. Special
care shall be taken to keep all open ends of pipes, etc., closed while in storage and during
installation. Where equipment must be stored outside the building, it shall be totally covered
and secured with heavy waterproof tarps and kept dry at all times. Where equipment has been
subjected to moisture, it shall be suitably dried out before placed in service. Materials and
equipment shall be stored in areas designated by the Architect.
Q. Grades, elevations and locations shown on the Drawings are approximately correct; however,
the Contractor shall field check and otherwise verify all such data at the site before proceeding
with the work. The Contractor shall make necessary survey equipment available at all times and
shall make use of such equipment wherever necessary to properly install his equipment.
R. The Contractor shall visit the site and thoroughly acquaint himself with conditions existing at
the site before submitting his proposal as he will be held responsible for the installation of the
work complete in every detail. The Contractor shall especially review the Architect’s phasing
schedule and ensure compliance with this schedule.
S. All work shown on the Drawings and not specifically included in the Specifications shall be
considered a part of the Contract work. All work included in the Specifications and not
specifically included on the Drawings shall also be considered a part of the Contract work.
T. Carefully examine all Drawings and Specifications included under this Contract and Drawings
and Specifications included under other contracts and report any discrepancies noticed to the
Architect.
U. Due to the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, valves,
access panels, adapters, and similar parts which may be required. The Drawings are
diagrammatic generally indicative of the work to be installed. The Contractor shall carefully
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and arrange all work
accordingly, furnishing necessary parts and equipment as may be required to meet the various
conditions.
V. The Contractor shall layout his work from dimensions of Architectural and Structural Drawings
and actual dimensions of equipment being installed. Layouts in congested areas should not be
scaled from Plumbing, HVAC and Electrical Drawings. Clearances shall be provided on all sides
of equipment as required for proper maintenance purposes and as required by State labor and
industry rules and regulations.
W. The Contractor shall furnish the services of manufacturers' representatives for all equipment
furnished under these Contract Documents. The amount of factory service provided by the
Contractor shall be as normally recommended and furnished by the various equipment
manufacturers unless specified otherwise. Testing of such systems and equipment shall be
made under the direct supervision of competent authorized service representatives. Any and all
expenses incurred by the equipment manufacturers' representatives shall be borne by the
Contractor.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
X. All equipment and materials shall be manufactured in accordance with national standards
established by manufacturer's associations, engineering and testing societies, such as NBMA,
NEMA, ASTM, AMCA, ASME, ANSI, ACI, FM, U.L., where such standards have been established.
The standards shall be construed to mean their correct specifications and designations as
amended, as of the date of bid opening.
Y. When the installation is reported in writing by the Contractor to be complete and ready for
acceptance, tests and inspection shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the
Architect to ascertain whether it complies with the Specifications and Contract, and upon its
failure to do so, the Contractor shall at once remedy all defects and shortcomings and any
additional tests that may be required shall be entirely at the Contractor's expense. All of the
testing work shall be done when and as directed by the Architect before the system is
accepted.
Z. Include any excavation and backfill as required for work included under this Contract, as herein
specified. Work shall conform to all applicable federal, state, county, and local regulations
governing safety provisions at excavation sites.
AA. The General Contractor will install insulation with vapor barrier in certain areas of the building.
Where the building insulation or vapor barrier is broken due to the installation of piping and
equipment, the Contractor shall properly repair all insulation and seal all openings with vapor
barrier covering and vapor barrier adhesive, of types installed with the insulation.
BB. The Architect reserves the right to revise locations of piping and equipment within the building,
as long as sizes remain the same. The Contractor should include suitable allowance in his bid
price for the above.
CC. In all cases where equipment and materials are specified in the singular or plural number, it is
intended that such reference shall apply to as many such items as are required to complete the
installation.
DD. Where piping or other equipment passes through fire or smoke barrier stops, walls, floors, or
ceilings, this Contractor shall furnish and install sleeves and shall thoroughly seal openings
around sleeves, pipes, and equipment with fire and smoke resistant materials. Materials shall be
furnished by the Contractor as required to maintain the fire rating of the walls, partitions,
ceilings and floors in accordance with the requirements of NFPA, State labor and industry rules
and regulations, and other applicable codes.
EE. All moving parts of equipment and appurtenances installed shall be properly lubricated by the
Contractor.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES OF BIDDERS
A. This Contractor is assumed to be skilled in the trade and is solely responsible for compliance
with health and safety regulations, performing the work in a safe and competent manner, and
installation procedures required for the work as outlined in these documents.
B. This Contract is all-inclusive of the work indicated on the Drawings and herein specified, and no
separate Contract work, supplementary labor or service will be provided by the Owner, except
as otherwise noted on the Drawings or herein specified.
C. If any part of the installation specified or shown on the Drawings to be executed under this
Contract requires a trade or classification of mechanics other than is normally directly employed
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
by this Contractor, it shall be expressly understood that this Contractor shall sublet or engage
mechanics experienced in each explicit trade involved to execute the work for the Contractor.
1.4 SCAFFOLDING AND RIGGING
A. This Contractor shall provide all the scaffolding required to do the work included in this
Contract. All necessary precautions must be taken in high risk areas. Provide temporary rigging,
as required, to install new work.
1.5 DRAWINGS
A. The drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and are based on one (1) manufacturer's
equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact location, the exact
dimensions or all the details of the equipment. The Contractor shall verify the actual dimensions
of any substituted materials and equipment to ensure that they will fit in the available space. All
apparatus shall be located and all pipes run in the manner and locations shown thereon as
closely as conditions will permit, and deviations therefrom shall be made only with the consent
of the Architect and without additional charge.
1.6 TEN-DAY PRIOR APPROVAL
A. Any equipment or components proposed for this project, other than model numbers named in
the bid documents, shall have pertinent submittal data and descriptive cover sheet submitted to
the Architect ten (10) days prior to the bid date for inclusion in an addendum, if and when,
reviewed and accepted for bidding.
B. This is for prebid review and is not to be regarded as submittals required for construction.
C. Bidder shall base the bid on items of equipment actually named in bid documents or
addendums issued prior to bidding. Verbal acceptance will not be recognized unless verified in
writing. It is the Bidders' responsibility to ascertain that all equipment has been accepted by
requiring copies of the Architect’s written acceptance from the Equipment Suppliers.
1.7 STANDARD OF QUALITY
A. All material shall be strictly in accordance with the quality, style and size as specified herein.
Manufacturers’ names and model numbers are given in the Specifications for the purpose of
establishing a standard of quality, style, size and type, and shall not be construed to exclude
equipment or material of other manufacturers.
B. When the Contractor elects to substitute materials or equipment other than that specified, the
Contractor will be held responsible for all architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical
changes required for the installation of substituted materials or equipment at no additional cost
to the Owner. All changes shall be subject to architectural, mechanical, electrical and structural
Architect’s' complete approvals.
C. When the Contractor desires to furnish equipment of another manufacturer, he shall include a
complete Specification of the substituted item with each submission copy of shop drawings
indicating the necessary modifications to his standard product to satisfy the requirements of the
Contract Specifications.
D. Final approval of competitive equipment is reserved by the Architect, when in their opinion, the
equipment does not correspond to that specified.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.8 WARRANTEES
A. The Contractor shall warrant that the materials and workmanship used in the erection of this
installation are as herein specified, and he shall provide all labor and materials required to make
good any defects in same which become apparent within one year from date of acceptance of
beneficial, permanent use of completed work in writing, providing such defects are due to faulty
materials or workmanship and not to misuse of apparatus by the Owner, its employees, or
tenants. Certain equipment shall be warranted or guaranteed for longer than one year from
date of final acceptance where specifically mentioned in these specifications. This warranty shall
be in writing and shall include written copies of factory warranties and expiration dates on
items of equipment where the warranty date might differ from the acceptance date. No
warranty shall start before the acceptance date. The acceptance will be for complete sections.
No partial acceptance will be approved.
B. The equipment and materials manufacturers are expected to recognize that they are
responsible for the failure of their products to perform in accordance with data furnished by
them or their authorized representatives as well as misrepresentations of such data. When the
products have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published or written
instructions and recommendations and such products fail, then the Contractor and the
manufacturers are responsible for replacement of the products and all associated work and
materials without additional cost to the Owner. This warranty applies to all items supplied on
the equipment and not just those that are the product of the manufacturer.
C. The Contractors' warranty shall include at least two (2) inspections of the system to repair and
replace any items found to be defective during this period. The first shall be approximately six
(6) months after the acceptance of the system and the second at the end of the first year.
1.9 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawing submittals shall be clearly marked to show the intended item with identification
as to unit number or other marking to show location, service, and function. Submittals not
marked to identify the equipment and application will be rejected.
B. Prior acceptance of equipment, per the shop drawing procedure as specified in these
documents, is required before installing equipment. Any equipment installed without prior
acceptance shall be subject to rejection, whether specified or not. All costs for the removal of
rejected equipment and materials, and all costs for the replacement of such equipment and
materials with approved equipment and materials shall be incurred by the Contractor without
additional expense to the Owner.
C. The Equipment Supplier, by submitting, certifies that the materials or equipment proposed is
satisfactory for the application intended, including adverse conditions that may prevail at the
job site, and that the materials and equipment are in current production with no known plans to
cease production.
D. The Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Architect are not change orders; that
the purpose of submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Architect that the
Contractor understands the design concept; and that this understanding is demonstrated by
indicating which equipment and materials the Contractor intends to furnish and install and the
fabrication and installation method that the Contractor intends to use.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
E. The Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between submittals,
and Contract documents are discovered either prior to or after submittals are processed by the
Architect; the Contract documents shall control and shall be followed.
F. At the close of the job, prior to final review, five (5) bound indexed copies with hard back
binders of the following for each system and associated equipment shall be submitted by
transmittal to the Architect for review and acceptance. All brochures and formats must be
approved by the Architect.
1. Equipment warranties.
2. Contractors' warranties.
3. Parts list and manuals for all equipment.
4. Operating instructions (in writing).
5. Written instructions on preventative, routine, and breakdown maintenance, and care of
the systems.
6. Lubrication and recommended spare parts.
G. The Contractor shall obtain two copies of a signed receipt from the Owner for the written
instructions and equipment brochures. One copy of the receipt shall be delivered to the
Architect, one copy to the Owner, and one copy shall be retained by the Contractor.
1.10 UTILITIES
A. Do not interrupt any utility or service without adequate previous notice and schedule.
B. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, repair, replace and maintain in service any utilities,
facilities or services (underground, overground, interior or exterior) damaged, broken or
otherwise rendered inoperative during the course of construction. The material used by the
Contractor shall be approved by the Architect.
C. Provide a 6” wide detectable metallic caution type foil marking strip for each exterior
underground utility line installed under this Contract, continuously, all locations. Marking strip
shall be a minimum of 12” below grade, color coded, with appropriate applicable wording.
Marking strip shall be as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Company, Brady Co., MSI
Services, or approved equivalent. Marking strip shall be placed before finished grading
procedures and shall be directly coordinated with site utility marking strips provided by others.
1.11 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of this project, the Contractor shall furnish one (1) set of as-built drawings of
the complete installation of this project on mylar tracing paper. As-built drawings, all of which
shall be dimensioned, shall be to the scale of one-eighth (1/8") inch or one-fourth (1/4") inch
being equivalent to one (1') foot to zero (0") inches. This Project shall not be considered
complete until as-built Drawings have been submitted and approved by the Architect.
1.12 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNERS PERSONNEL
A. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall satisfactorily complete the systems so that they are
functional and operating to the satisfaction of the Architect. All systems, their controls and their
sequencing must be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Architect.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of qualified personnel, approved by the Architect and
thoroughly familiar with the completed installation to instruct the Owner’s permanent operating
personnel in the proper operation of all systems included under this Contract and the proper
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 8
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
care of all equipment and apparatus. These services shall be furnished for a period of two 8-
hour days after the operation of the building has been taken over by the Owner.
C. When instructions are provided under this Contract, the Contractor shall have in his possession
three copies of an identifying letter which shall list the names of the Contractor’s qualified
instruction personnel including manufacturer’s representatives and subcontractors that will be
giving instructions. Likewise on the same letter, spaces shall be provided for the Owner’s
personnel who will receive the instructions. After instructions have been given and received for
each system, the Contractor’s representatives and subcontractors shall sign and date the letter,
and the Owner’s personnel shall sign and date the letter acknowledging that they have received
adequate instructions for operating and maintaining the systems and equipment. One signed
copy shall be delivered Architect, and one copy shall be retained by the Contractor.
D. It is the intent that the entire systems with their complement of equipment and auxiliary
equipment operate properly in accordance with the design concept and functional intent. It is
also the intent that the Owner be given complete instructions for the proper operation and
maintenance of all systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All products shall be first-line quality, of grade and type shown on the Drawings, and specified
or equivalents accepted by the Architect in writing.
B. All products shall be in current production with no notice having been given that this product is
to be drastically changed, modified or discontinued from production.
C. The Supplier, by submitting, certifies that the equipment being proposed is proper for the
application intended and that it has the capacity called for on the Drawings or in the
Specifications.
2.2 COMPLETE SYSTEM
A. All products, materials, and accessories shall be furnished, and installed as required, for a
complete system ready for the Owner’s beneficial use.
2.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DEVIATIONS
A. When any material or equipment is identified on the plans or in the Specifications by reference
to a manufacturer's name or model number; it is intended to establish a required standard of
design and quality; and it is not intended to limit competition. It is understood that the phrase
"Or Equivalent" is hereby inserted following a manufacturers' name, whether such a phrase
occurs or not.
B. When the Drawings and/or Specifications indicate one or more manufacturers' names for
materials or equipment, the Bidder may submit a bid based on materials or equipment of
manufacturers not named but considered by the Bidder to be equivalent to the standard of
design and quality specified; however, such substitutions must be accepted by the Architect as
equivalent. If the Bidder elects to bid on a substitution without securing written consent of the
Architect prior to receipt of the bids, then it will be understood that proof of compliance with
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 9
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
the specified requirements is the direct responsibility of the Bidder, and no such materials or
equipment may be purchased or installed without written acceptance.
C. Bidders are advised to ascertain such acceptance from their Suppliers by requesting copies of
acceptance in writing signed by the Architect from their Suppliers.
2.4 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
A. Electric Motors
All electrical motors furnished and installed under this Contract shall be manufactured by
Reliance, General Electric, U.S. Motors, or approved equivalent and shall be of the proper type
and frame of the services involved in accordance with the NEMA and Equipment Manufacturer's
recommendations. Motors shall be "energy efficiency" type with 1.15 service factor. Motor
windings shall be all copper. Where possible, motors shall be permanently lubricated. Where
motors must be lubricated, the manufacturer shall furnish the services of a representative to
review the lubrication procedure with the Contractor and the Owner and turn over to both of
them all of the necessary maintenance literature. Motors and installation shall conform with all
applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. Motors shall be suitable for across-
theline or reduced voltage starting as applicable in each instance. Furnish the Electrical
Contractor with all motor data to properly size overcurrent protection devices for all
combination starters and disconnect switches. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for
any additional costs to the Electrical Contractor resulting from any changes in motor sizes
initiated by the Contractor, from sizes scheduled on the Drawings. Motors located in
conditioned space shall be selected for quiet operation and shall not produce an objectionable
“Motor Noise” in the space.
B. Manual Motor Starters
1. Manual motor starters (disconnect switches/thermal overload switches) shall be furnished
by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by the Electrical Contractor, as indicated on the
electrical drawings. Furnish all motor electrical characteristics to the Electrical Contractor
so the Electrical Contractor may size the manual starter (disconnect switches/thermal
overload switches) overload devices.
C. Magnetic Motor Starters - Full Voltage
1. Furnish and deliver to the Electrical Contractor for installation, combination full voltage
magnetic starters and fused disconnect switches for all 3 phase motors with service
factors of 1.15. Starters shall have three (3) current overload relays and low-voltage
release. Starters shall be furnished with hand-off-automatic switch, red run light,
overload reset, a set of extra auxiliary contacts consisting of one (1) normally open
contact and one (1) normally closed contact and a control transformer with 120 volt
fused secondary control circuit and fused primary circuit. Starter enclosure shall be NEMA
1 enclosures. Furnish Allen-Bradley Bulletin 512 starters, or equivalent as manufactured
by Square D, General Electric, or Siemens. Disconnect switches shall be horsepower
rated to match the horsepower of the motors plus 1.15 service factors connected thereto
as required. Fuses will be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. See "Work
Not Included", this section.
2. Where starters are separately mounted, they shall be of the magnetic type as herein
specified.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 10
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3. All magnetic motor starters for motors connected to the normal/emergency electrical
distribution system shall be furnished with an adjustable time delay unit. Time delay unit
shall be capable of delaying motor starting from 0 to 180 seconds.
D. Hand-Off Automatic (H.O.A.) Selector Switches
Furnish and deliver to the Electrical Contractor for installation, hand-off-automatic selector
switches where shown or required and shall be the type that can be changed in the field from
two positions and vice versa. Switches shall have padlocking attachment that will permit locking
in either the manual or automatic positions. Switches shall be furnished with NEMA Type 1
enclosures where installed remote from starter. Furnish Allen-Bradley three (3) position
switches, Bulletin 800S-R35X with 800S-N1 padlocking attachment, or equivalent as
manufactured by Square D, General Electric, or Siemens.
E. Electrical characteristics shall be determined from the Drawings and verified on the job.
F. General
1. All power wiring by Electrical Contractor; all control wiring by Plumbing Contractor; refer
to “Control Wiring”, this section.
2. In general, rigid conduit or tubing for control wiring shall be used, but equipment that
requires movement or that would transmit vibration to conduit shall be wired with flexible
(liquid tight) steel conduit, not over eighteen (18") inches long.
3. All equipment with control wiring shall be grounded with a green-covered ground wire
run inside the conduit and connected to the equipment frame on one (1) end and to
grounding system on the other end.
4. All electrical work required in the Contract shall conform to all applicable requirements of
Division 26 of these Specifications.
5. The Contractor shall employ an approved licensed subcontractor, fully qualified in the
trade, to perform all electrical work required under the Contract.
6. This Contractor shall not run piping above motors, switchboards, or panelboards in
accordance with the National Electrical Code. Before piping is installed, coordinate exact
locations with the Electrical Contractor. Failure to comply with this requirement shall be
cause for the piping to be removed and relocated at no additional cost to the Owner.
2.5 LABELING
A. All electrical equipment and items consisting primarily of electrical components shall bear a
label of an independent testing laboratory, such as Underwriters' Laboratory (UL).
2.6 CONTROL WIRING
A. Furnish and install control wiring as indicated on the drawings or as specified in various portions
of the specifications.
B. All control wiring shall be extended in conduit. Use "plenum wire" without conduit where runs
are in conditioned spaces such as relief and return plenums.
C. Control wiring shall be run in conduit, and shall be copper conductors provided with Type THHN
or dual rated THHN-THWN insulation and protective covering, not less than No. 14 AWG, run in
accordance with the National Electrical Code; and in general, conforming to Division 26
specifications for this project.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 11
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
D. Conduit above ground for control wiring shall be rigid steel conduit or electrical metallic tubing,
run in accordance with the National Electrical Code; and in general, conforming to Division 26
specifications for this project.
E.Conduit below ground or below slab for control wiring shall be Schedule 40 PVC, UL rated for
90 degrees C., run in accordance with the National Electrical Code; and, in general, conforming
to Division 26 specifications for this project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. All work shall be performed by competent mechanics using proper tools and equipment to
produce first-quality work. All work shall be neatly installed, accessible for maintenance, and
complete with all accessories required.
3.2 ACCESSIBILITY
A. All equipment shall be installed in such away that all components requiring access (control
operators, motors, drives, belts, etc.) are so located and installed that they may be serviced,
reset, replaced or recalibrated, etc. by service people with normal service tools and equipment.
If any equipment or components are shown in such a position that this Contractor cannot
comply with the above, the Contractor shall notify the Architect.
3.3 WORK BY OTHER TRADES
A. Cutting, patching, painting, electrical, plumbing, etc., shall be done by the affected trade at this
Contractor’s expense for changes required in work already installed or work required by other
trades for changes made by this Contractor in type or size of equipment purchased.
3.4 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Openings in floors and walls will be furnished by the General Contractor. Openings in roof will
be furnished under the General Contract - Roofing Contractor. This Contractor shall inform the
General Contractor and Roofing Contractor of the location and size required. This Contractor
shall furnish all sleeves, frames, including framing between joists unless shown on the
Architectural or Structural Drawings, access doors, and other accessories necessary for a
complete installation. Only those items specifically shown and/or specified in other sections are
excluded.
B. Flashing of vent pipes and roof drains in roof construction will be furnished under the General
Contract - Roofing Contractor.
C. Power and fuel for testing. See GENERAL and SPECIAL CONDITIONS.
D. Openings in exterior walls. (General Contractor)
E. Furring around piping. (General Contractor)
F. Final painting of interior surfaces. (General Contractor)
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 12
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
G. Recesses and openings in construction for plumbing piping and equipment. (General
Contractor)
H. Electric power wiring to electrically operated plumbing equipment. (Electrical Contractor) All
control and interlock wiring shall be by the Plumbing Contractor.
I. Magnetic motor starters and selector switches shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor to
the Electrical Contractor for installation. Manual motor starters (disconnect switches/thermal
overload switches) will be furnished and installed under the Electrical Contract, except where
such items are factory installed as an integral part of the equipment. Coordinate all
requirements with the Electrical Contractor.
J. Fuses for the starter/disconnect switches shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and
installed by the Electrical Contractor. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish the Electrical
Contractor with all required motor data to properly size and select overloads and disconnect
switch fuses in accordance with the National Electrical Code requirements. The Plumbing
Contractor shall furnish to the Electrical Contractor the equipment manufacturer’s circuit
protection data to properly size overloads and fuses.
K. Chases for piping where specifically shown on the Drawings. (General Contractor)
L. Extension of site water service, sanitary drainage, storm drainage, and gas service from
Plumbing Contractor’s terminal line locations. (Site Contractor) Final connections by Site
Contractor.
M. Gutters and downspouts. (General Contractor)
N. Humidifiers and air handling equipment. (HVAC Contractor) Final plumbing connections by
Plumbing Contractor.
O. Water meter will be furnished by the Water Authority for installation by the Plumbing
Contractor, with all necessary costs included in the Plumbing Contract.
3.5 FOUNDATIONS AND SPECIAL SUPPORTS
A.Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or in the Specifications, concrete bases for equipment
shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. The Contractor shall establish sizes and
locations of the various bolts, together with the templates for holding these bolts in position.
Anchor bolts shall be placed in steel pipe sleeves to allow for adjustment, with suitable plate at
bottom end of sleeve to hold the bolt. Each piece of equipment designated to have a base shall
have a concrete base of not less than four (4") inches high, which shall project four (4") inches
on all sides beyond the equipment. Bases shall have greater depths of height where so noted
on the drawings.
3.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Furnish and install vibration isolators, flexible connectors, and other safety measures to prevent
noise and vibration from being transmitted to occupied areas.
B. Following installation, make proper adjustments to eliminate excessive noise and vibration.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 13
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.7 CODES AND STANDARDS
C. All material and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, federal and state laws,
Specifications, local and county codes and ordinances, industry standards, utility company
regulations, and NFPA. In case of a difference between codes, Specifications, federal and state
laws, local and county codes and ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations,
NFPA, and the Contract documents, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall
promptly notify the Architect in writing of any such difference.
D. Reference to the following codes shall mean:
E. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply within the requirements of the
applicable building codes, state laws and federal laws, local and county codes and ordinances,
industry standards, utility company regulations, and NFPA, the Contractor shall bear all costs
arising in correcting the deficiencies.
F. This Contractor is assumed to be skilled in the trade and is solely responsible for compliance
with OSHA regulations, performing the work in a safe and competent manner, and in
installation procedures required for this work. All supervision assigned to this project shall be
experienced in this type of work. This Contractor’s superintendent shall be designated as Safety
Inspector, unless the Contractor designates another person and notifies the Architect of this
change.
3.8 PERMITS, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall give all requisite notices, obtain and pay all deposits and fees, including
connection fees, necessary for the installation, tests, and inspections of all work provided under
this Specification. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect.
3.9 REVIEW BY ARCHITECT
A. This Contractor shall notify the Architect at the following stages of construction so that the
Architect may visit the site for review and consultation:
1. When equipment installation starts.
2. When ceiling installation will cover any work not reviewed.
3. When any lines are to be permanently concealed by construction.
4. When any lines are to be permanently concealed by backfilling of trenches.
5. When testing is started.
REFERENCE DEFINITION
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
BOCA Building Officials & Code Administrators
NEC National Electrical Code
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 14
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Should the Contractor fail to notify the Architect at the times prescribed above, it shall then be
the Contractor’s responsibility and cost to expose any concealed lines or demonstrate the
acceptability of any part of the system. Any extra cost, caused by the removal of work by other
grades, shall be borne by this Contractor, at no cost to the Owner.
3.10 EARLY START-UP
A. This Contractor shall do all possible to see that the mechanical equipment is connected with
electrical power as early as possible, so that final testing can be started. Should this Contractor
be ready for operation and power is not available, the General Contractor and the Architect
shall be notified.
3.11 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Refer to Section 018119, “Indoor Air Quality Management” for allowable VOC content and
submittal requirements for all paints, adhesives and sealants used.
B. Periodically remove from the building site all rubbish and accumulated materials.
C. At the completion of the project, thoroughly clean all new equipment and remove all trash,
cartons, and similar debris from the area. Make any necessary corrections or repair/replace any
damaged materials or equipment. Leave the entire systems in a thoroughly clean and orderly
manner.
D. Any finished surfaces that have been scratched or discolored shall be touched up or repainted
with paint to match the original color. If any part has been bent, broken or otherwise damaged,
it shall be replaced prior to final review.
E. The Contractor shall prime coat and finish paint the following items of equipment and piping
furnished. Painting shall be in strict accordance with the requirements and recommendations of
OSHA.
1. All equipment and piping installed outside the building exposed to weather.
2. All support steel, brackets, hangers, and other miscellaneous metals.
3. All insulation covering on exposed piping and equipment.
4. All uninsulated piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms.
F. Surfaces required to be finished painted shall be painted as follows:
1. All uninsulated piping shall be painted with one (1) coat of rust inhibitive red primer and
one (1) coat of gloss enamel.
2. All other ferrous metals shall be painted with one (1) prime coat of equipment and
machinery primer and one (1) finish coat of gloss enamel.
3. Coated cast iron or coated black steel piping need not be painted above ceilings;
however, rusted or scraped piping shall be touched up, to keep a like new finish.
4. All galvanized surfaces shall be painted with one (1) prime coat of galvanized steel
primer and one (1) finish coat of gloss enamel. All aluminum surfaces shall be painted
one (1) prime coat of aluminum primer and one (1) finish coat of gloss enamel.
5. All other copper and brass surfaces shall be painted with one (1) prime coat of zinc
chromate primer and one (1) finish coat of gloss enamel.
G. Color code all natural gas piping per Gas Company requirements, including on roof.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 15
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
H. Paint shall be of colors selected by the Architect.
I. Finish paint color samples shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
J. Paint shall be as manufactured by Rust-Oleum, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden, PPG, or approved
equivalent.
3.12 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. All major items of equipment shall have name and number stenciled on the equipment housing
for ease of identification. Stencils shall be two (2") inches high.
B. Such names and numbers for the specific items of equipment shall be keyed into the index of
the catalog data.
3.13 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. All pipes, exposed and concealed, covered and uncovered, shall be stenciled with the name of
the service and provided in accordance with the pipe marking table and with an arrow
indicating the direction of flow. Temperature of hot water lines shall also be included, as
applicable.
B. Stenciling shall be plain block letters, about one (1") inch high and shall be located near each
branch connection, near each valve, on both sides where piping passes through a wall or floor,
and at least every thirty (30’) feet on straight runs of pipe. On smaller runs of pipe, markings
shall be centered. Where pipes are adjacent to each other, markings shall be neatly lined up.
C. All stenciling shall be located in such a manner as to be easily legible from the floor.
D. In lieu of stenciling, snap-around pipe markers may be utilized, interior or exterior, Seton
Nameplate Co. “Set Mark”, or approved equivalent.
E. Pipe marking identification and color coding shall comply with ANSI A13.1.
F. Markings on dark colored pipes shall be white. Markings on light colored pipes shall be black.
G. All markings shall be as made by Seton Nameplate Company, MSI Services, Brady Co., or
approved equivalent.
H. Pipe Marking Table.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 16
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.14 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. All valves on the project shall be tagged with a name tag.
B. Valve tags shall be round 1-1/2" brass or aluminum tags with valve numbers stamped on the
face, attached to the valve by means of a brass or aluminum “S” hook or chain. The numbers
shall be prefixed "P" for plumbing and shall be keyed to the valve schedules. Gas valves shall
also be tagged. Valve schedules shall note the number, the general location of the valve, the
service, and the normal position of the valve (opened or closed). Refer to “Equipment
Identification Labels” this section for labeling of access panels or ceiling tiles for equipment
above ceilings.
C. Furnish two (2) copies of each valve schedule, showing location of valves, equipment or
service, and whether the valves should be normally opened or normally closed. Valve schedules
shall be typewritten and shall be mounted in a metal frame with glass front, hung in main
mechanical equipment room where directed by the Architect.
D. Numbers and tags shall be coordinated with those being installed under the HVAC Contract.
3.15 LEAD-FREE INSTALLATIONS
A. The Contractor shall certify that all materials used in the construction of the plumbing systems
are lead free. This certification shall apply to all plumbing used for drinking water. The
certification form shall be obtained from the Water Authority serving the building, by the
Contractor.
B. To be considered "lead free", solder and flux must not contain more than 0.2% lead. Pipe,
fittings, and fixtures must not contain more than 8% lead.
C. Water service will not be provided by the Water Authority for building use until the plumbing
system has been certified in compliance with these regulations.
3.16 FINAL CONNECTIONS
A. All equipment noted as furnished and installed by other contractors or by the Owner, that
requires plumbing services, will be furnished and installed complete with trim by that party,
except as herein specified. The Plumbing Contractor shall coordinate type and location of
equipment, rough-in services noted or required and make final connections. Final connections
SERVICE MARKINGS
Domestic Cold Water C.W.
Domestic Hot Water Supply (& Temperature) H.W. (& Temperature)
Condensate Drain COND. DR.
Sanitary Drain SAN
Storm Drain STORM
Sanitary Vent SAN VENT
Gas Line GAS
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 17
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
shall include items such as drain tailpieces, “P”-traps, running traps, water shut-off stops, gas
shutoffs, piping extensions, piping adapters, and like items.
B. Make final plumbing connections to HVAC equipment.
3.17 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Where valves, cleanouts, etc., are located above removable tile ceilings or above access panels,
the Contractor shall furnish and install identification labels on the corners of access panels or
removable ceiling tiles. Labels shall be provided with the word “VALVES,” “CLEANOUT”, and
similar designations, so that the equipment may be readily located in the future.
B. Identification labels shall not exceed 3" in length and 1" in height. Black letters shall be 1/4"
high on white background. Labels shall be manufactured of engraved Micarta or Bakelite with
pressure-sensitive backing and shall be nonabsorbent, nonporous and colorfast. Adhesive
backing shall be chemically compounded to hold tight and fast at wide temperature extremes.
Labels shall be as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Company, Brady Co., MSI Services, or
approved equivalent. Labels shall be additionally secured with screws or rivets if necessary.
Flexible plastic punched tapes will not be acceptable. Labels shall be coordinated with those
being installed under other contracts.
C. All major pieces of plumbing equipment shall include, at a suitable and accessible observation
point on the equipment, a manufacturer’s stamped brass or aluminum identification plate, with
all pertinent capacity data stamped on the plate. Identification plate shall include all specific
data, such as model number, serial number, motor data, horsepower, capacities, sizes,
amperes, power consumption, speed, flows in gpm, temperatures, working pressures, operating
pressures, and similar factors as applicable. In addition, pumps shall include total head in feet
and impeller sizes.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and attaching an identification plate for the
above mentioned major equipment if not provided by the equipment manufacturer.
E. Equipment marking tags shall be engraved phenolic, 1/16” thick, four edges binded, black with
white lettering. The tag shall be securely mounted to the equipment. Tags shall provide such
information as: “Water Heater – WH-1”, etc., and include “date of installation and project
number.”
F. The installations will not be considered acceptable unless identification plates and nameplates
are attached.
3.18 MAINTENANCE
A. Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of all equipment and apparatus included under
this Contract until final project completion.
3.19 PLUMBING PLANS
A. The plumbing plans are intended to be diagrammatic and are based on one (1) manufacturer’s
equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact location, the exact
dimensions, or all the details of the equipment. The Contractor shall verify the actual
dimensions of any specified or substituted materials and equipment to ensure that they will fit
in the available space. All apparatus shall be located as closely as conditions will permit and
deviations therefrom shall be made only with the consent of the Architect and without
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 18
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
additional charge to the Owner. The right is reserved by the Architect to make any reasonable
changes in the location of the equipment prior to rough-in without invoking additional expense
to the Owner.
3.20 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
A. Refer to Architectural Divisions.
3.21 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING
A. Refer to Architectural Divisions.
3.22 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All openings or chases required for the installation of the work in the building will be provided
by the General Contractor, providing this Contractor notifies the General Contractor of the size
and location of the required openings or chases in sufficient time before the work is closed in,
so that the work of the General Contractor will not be delayed.
B. If this Contractor fails to notify the General Contractor in sufficient time, this Contractor shall
cut, patch, finish, and paint the openings at his expense.
C. This Contractor shall set all sleeves, hangers and anchors required for his work and shall be
responsible for their proper and permanent location.
D. This Contractor shall seal all openings he has utilized in fire rated floors, ceilings or partitions
after his work has been installed. The material used for sealing the openings shall have a fire
rating equal to or greater than the rating of the floor, ceiling or partition material.
END OF SECTION 220500
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 220501 – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment
covered by this section with all auxiliaries, ready for Owner’s use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS, VALVES, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Materials for piping, valves and accessories shall be as specified in Section 220502 – plumbing
work.
B. Materials for fittings shall match the piping system category for pressure, temperature, and
corrosion.
2.2 PIPE JOINT MATERIALS
A. Screwed pipe joints shall be made up using Teflon tape, Rectorseal No. 5 pipe dope, or other
lubricants, as approved for the particular installation.
B. Soldered joints shall be made up with paste flux and Bridgit lead-free, Silvabrite 100, or silver
solder, or equivalent.
2.3 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. Provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering
practices using, where possible standard, commercially accepted pipe hangers and accessories.
B. All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of the ASA Code for
pressure piping, B31.1, and Manufacturers' Standardization Society documents MSS SP-58 and
MSS SP-69.
C. The pipe hanger assembly must be capable of supporting the line in all operating conditions.
Accurate weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the supporting force at each
hanger in order to prevent excessive stress in either pipe or connected equipment.
D. All pipe hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Michigan Hanger Co., Tolco
Company, Grabler Company, Modern Hanger Corporation, or approved equivalent. The
following catalog numbers are taken from the Michigan Hanger Co. Catalog to indicate the type
of installation required.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
E. Hangers for insulated lines shall be clevis type, Model 403 insulation hanger. Hangers for
uninsulated lines shall be Model 400 for steel, iron, or PVC pipe and Model 402 for copper
tubing.
F. Vertical runs of exposed uninsulated piping shall be supported from walls with sections of Model
437 channel-strut and Model 431 strut clamps for steel, iron, or PVC pipe and Model 432 for
copper tubing. For all insulated piping, use Model 431 strut clamps sized to permit a continuous
insulation installation.
G. Hangers for pipe and tubing installed horizontally shall be spaced as follows:
MAXIMUM SPACING IN FEET
PIPE SIZE STEEL - IRON PIPE COPPER PIPE PVC PIPE
Up to 1-1/2"8 5 6 3
2" to 2-1/2"10 5 8 4
3" and above 12 5 10 4
H. Where concentrated loads of valves, fittings, etc., occur, closer spacing may be necessary.
Hangers must be installed not more than 12" from each change in direction of pipes.
I. Where cast iron pipe is suspended, a minimum of one (1) hanger shall be provided for each
length of pipe at each fitting.
J. Brass chromium plated pipe shall be supported by suitable cast brass chromium plated
supports. All securing devices shall have all exposed heads, finished chromium plated.
K. All piping shall be supported from the building construction by the use of beam clamps,
concrete inserts, brackets, or other equipment as dictated by the type of building construction.
L. Perforated band iron, wire or chain will not be permitted for hangers or supports of pipe.
M. Trapeze type hangers may be used for multiple parallel line installations. The Contractor shall
submit sketches for the proposed hangers indicating the type of construction, number and size
of lines, and maximum spacing to the Architect for approval.
N. Lag Screws/Lag Bolts - Where piping is supported from wood construction, the Contractor shall
utilize lag screws, lag bolts, or other structural shapes capable of being attached to the wood
construction.
O. Beam Clamps - Where piping is to be supported from structural steel, beam clamps shall be
used. Beam clamp selection shall be on the basis of the required load to be supported. Holes
drilled in structural steel for hanger support rods will not be permitted.
P. Riser Clamps - All vertical runs of piping shall be supported at each floor and/or at specified
intervals, by means of riser clamps. Copper tubing shall be protected against electrolysis, such
as PVC coating or copper plating, or by the use of an all-copper clamp. Riser clamps placed on
floor construction in finished areas, including in stairwells, will not be permitted. Supports shall
be placed at minimum ten (10) foot intervals for vertical pipe.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Q. Auxiliary Steel - All auxiliary steel necessary for the installation of the pipe hangers and
supports shall be as designed in accordance with the ASIC steel handbook, shall be furnished
by the Contractor, and shall receive one (1) shop coat of primer paint and one (1) finish coat.
R. Auxiliary Wood - All auxiliary wood supports necessary for the installation of the pipe hangers
and supports shall be furnished, installed, and designed by the Contractor. All wood supports
shall be of fire-resistant construction.
2.4 AIR VENTS AND DRAINS
A. Air vents shall be of manual type where readily accessible, Dole No. 9, Hoffman, Spirax-Sarco,
or approved equivalent.
B. Air vents above concealed ceiling systems shall be extension type, Dole No. 14-1, Hoffman,
Spirax-Sarco, or approved equivalent.
C. Air vents in accessible areas, but not convenient for service, shall be automatic vent type with
the vent pipe carried to the nearest floor drain or acceptable receptacle, Dole No. 200,
Hoffman, Spirax–Sarco, or approved equivalent.
D. Provide a valve on inlet piping to each air vent of all types.
E. Drain points, consisting of hose end ball drain valves with vacuum breakers, shall be installed
for every low point of piping system for drainage.
F. Condensate drainage shall be provided for all HVAC equipment requiring such drainage.
Condensate drain lines shall be extended as shown on the Drawings, complete with final
connections.
2.5 STRAINERS
A. Strainers shall be installed as specified or shown in details on Drawings.
B. Strainer body shall be cast bronze to match the system pressure and temperature. The body
shall provide for removal of the strainer element without interruption of the pipe. Each strainer
shall have a blowdown valve installed. Strainers shall be as manufactured by Watts, Conbraco,
Mueller, Spirax-Sarco, or approved equivalent.
C. Strainer element shall be 0.045" perforated stainless steel with effective screen area of no less
than four (4) times the pipe area.
2.6 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be installed as specified or shown in details on the Drawings and on the
inlet and outlet of every item of equipment where the fluid is either heated or cooled.
B. Thermometers shall be dial type, with glass face no less than four (4") inches in diameter and
with adjustable head for visibility. The body and stem shall be stainless steel.
C. The range of the thermometer shall be such that the normal operating point with the system in
service shall be mid-range on the dial.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
D. Accuracy of the thermometer shall be such that the error will be no greater than 2% of the full
scale value.
E. The thermometer shall be provided with a brass or stainless steel well, installed in a threaded
coupling into the pipe being measured. Provide thermally conductive gel in the well for contact
with the bulb.
F. Thermometers shall be as manufactured by Weksler, Ashcroft, Trerice, Marshalltown, Weiss, or
approved equivalent.
2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Provide pressure gauges as specified or shown in details on the Drawings and at every item of
equipment receiving or producing flow in or from the system.
B. Gauges, except as herein specified, shall be no less than four (4") inches in diameter with glass
face and cast aluminum body.
C. Range shall be such that the gauge shall operate in mid-range during normal operation of the
system. Graduations between figure intervals shall not exceed 10% of the gauge range. Pointer
shall be adjustable for calibration.
D. Accuracy shall be such that error is less than 1% over the mid-range of the gauge and 2% out
of the mid-range area.
E. Every gauge shall be provided with a one-fourth (1/4") inch needle-type valve and an impulse
dampener.
F. Pressure gauges and accessories shall be as manufactured by Weksler, Trerice, Ashcroft,
Marshalltown, Weiss, or approved equivalent.
2.8 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Where noted or specified, vacuum breakers shall be rough bronze, nonremovable, the Watts
No. 8A, Wilkins, Chicago Faucet, or approved equivalent. Chrome vacuum breakers shall be the
Watts No. 8AC, Wilkins, Chicago Faucet, or approved equivalent.
2.9 EXPANSION COMPENSATION
A. Pipe installation shall allow for expansion due to temperature differences. Provide expansion
offsets in piping where necessary to control expansion.
2.10 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Provide pipe sleeves of Schedule 40 steel pipe at each wall, floor or foundation penetration.
Sleeves shall be built into the wall or floor during construction of the wall. Space between pipe
and sleeve shall be sealed with a fire stopping material. Where pipes are insulated, the sleeve
shall allow for continuous insulation thickness.
B. Wall sleeves shall be even with both sides of the finished wall.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
C. Floor sleeves shall project approximately one half (½") inch above the finished floor and be
even with the underside of the floor. Floor sleeves shall be cast in place or permanently sealed
into the floor structure to prevent any water on the floor above from following the pipe system.
D. Where pipe motion, due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeves of sufficient
diameter to permit free movement of pipe.
E. Sleeve installations in exterior and designated interior walls, foundations and slab on grade
floors shall consist of steel sleeves with the annular space between the carrier pipe and sleeve
continuously filled with modular, mechanical type, inter-locking synthetic rubber links. Sleeves
shall be Model WS and links, Model LS, all as manufactured by LINK-SEAL Division, Thunderline
Corporation, Advance Products & Systems, Inc., Metraflex, or approved equivalent.
F. Sleeves through fire rated construction shall be sealed as hereinafter specified under “Fire
Barrier Penetration Seals” section of this Specification
2.11 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Provide pipe escutcheons of each side of wall or floor penetrations to provide a finished
appearance. For insulated pipes, the escutcheon shall surround the outside of the insulation.
B. Escutcheons shall be chrome, cast brass, setscrew type.
2.12 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALS
A. Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors or ceilings used as passage for
mechanical components such as piping. Fire stopping of this type shall also be utilized for
openings through smoke rated construction.
1. Cracks, Voids or Holes up to four (4") Diameter - Use putty or caulking, one-piece
intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets,
and capable of expanding ten (10) times when exposed to flame or heat, UL-listed.
2. Openings four (4") Inches or Greater - Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire
tests in accordance with ASTM E-814, consisting or wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end
caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 degrees to 350
degrees F., UL-listed.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire barrier penetration seals of one (1) of the
following, or approved equivalent:
1. RectorSeal Metacaulk.
2. Nelson, Unit of General Signal.
3. Thomas & Betts.
2.13 UNDERFLOOR PIPE SLEEVES
A. Underfloor pipe sleeves for water lines shall be constructed of 4” diameter minimum size
Schedule 40 PVC or terra cotta piping and fittings. Split piping and fittings systems will be
acceptable.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Install concrete inserts, beam clamps, lag screws or lag bolts in wood, or other fixtures to
support the pipe hangers, acceptable to the Architect.
B. Provide hanger rods and loops or clevises to support the pipe at the height and grade required
for proper drainage and air elimination.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
A. All overhead piping shall be installed above the ceiling unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
B. Cut pipe accurately to measurements, and ream free of burrs and cutting splatter. Carefully
align and grade pipe and work accurately into place. Fittings shall be used for any change in
direction. Make adequate provisions for expansion and contraction. Install anchors to prevent
pipe movement. Provide for expansion at every building expansion joint.
C. Protect open pipe ends to prevent trash from being placed in the lines during installation. Clean
all dirt and cutting debris from pipes before making the next joint.
D. Small pipe shall be screwed or soldered as required to produce a tight system with full joints
and no leaks. Pipe joints showing seepage and drips shall be dismantled and remade in proper
way, as required by proper installation.
E. Copper pipe shall be carefully reamed back to full inside diameter and the mating surfaces shall
be cleaned by brush or sandpaper. When clean, the paste flux shall be applied and the joint
evenly heated and soldered. Any fittings discolored by heat shall be removed and replaced.
F. All valves to be soldered into lines shall be dismantled to prevent the heat from destroying
packing and seats.
G. Valves installed in screwed lines shall be properly supported and pipes carefully installed to
prevent damage or distortion of the valve.
H. Grooved pipe shall be carefully prepared and all burrs removed inside and outside the pipe. The
proper lubricant shall be applied and the gasket carefully placed prior to tightening the clamps
to the correct torque.
I. Install ball valve drains at every low place and air vents at every high place. Pipe shall slope as
shown on the Drawings or in the Specifications. If slope is not shown or specified, slope in the
direction of flow one (1") inch per every forty (40') feet. Install drain valves and air vents as
specified.
J. Install pressure gauges and thermometers as specified or shown in details and on the
Drawings.
3.3 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
A. The Contractor shall perform all necessary excavation and backfilling, required for the proper
installation of work under this Contract.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Excavation for this project shall be considered unclassified and shall include all types of earth
and soil, any pebbles, boulders, and bedrock; municipal trash, rubbish and garbage; and all
types of debris of the construction industry such as wood, stone, concrete, plaster, brick,
mortar, steel and iron shapes, pipe, wire, asphaltic materials, paper and glass.
C. All such materials encountered which are identified by this paragraph as unclassified shall be
removed to the required widths and depths to create a finished product as shown and/or noted
on the drawings and as written in the specifications. No additional compensation shall be made
to the Contractor for this unclassified excavation.
D. The Contractor shall perform all excavation as required to install his work. Earth, debris, rock,
or concrete formations required to be excavated, removed, backfilled or graded, shall be as
encountered and no additional charge will be allowed by reason of hard or unforseen
formations of conditions encountered. The excavation work shall be performed on an
"unclassified" basis in that the cost of excavation, removal, and disposition of all earth or rock
formations shall be included in the Contract price at the time of bidding. During excavation,
material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the
banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. All excavated
materials not required or suitable for backfilling shall be removed from the site and disposed of
in strict accordance with local code requirements, or stockpiled or wasted on the site as
directed by the Owner.
E. Trenches shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of the pipe and the banks shall be as
nearly vertical as practicable. The bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded to provide
uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every point
along its entire length. Except where hard rock, cemented gravel, old masonry or other hard
material is encountered, care shall be taken not to excavate below the depths indicated. Where
rock excavations are required, the rock shall be excavated to a minimum overdepth of six (6")
inches below the trench depths indicated on the Drawings or specified. Overdepths in rock
excavation and unauthorized overdepths shall be backfilled a minimum of six (6") inches with
sand or fine gravel, firmly compacted. Wherever cinders, fill containing refuse, organic matter
or similar substances, or wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the
bottom of the trench, such materials shall be removed to the depth required and the trench
backfilled to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or granulated blast furnace slag,
firmly compacted. Where necessary, concrete shall be utilized to provide firm support.
3.4 BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES
A. Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required pressure and other tests have been performed
and until the utilities systems, as installed, conform to the requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications, including recording of pipe locations. Final grading by Plumbing Contractor
where General Contractor is not performing any work.
B. All trenches, except as herein specified, shall be carefully backfilled by hand with fine materials
approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay and sand gravel, soft shale or
other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones, deposited in six (6") inch
layers, and thoroughly and carefully rammed until the pipe has a cover of not less than one (1')
foot. For the remaining trench depth, backfill in six (6") inch layers with earth or shale, except
the material may contain stones, rocks, concrete or masonry materials (but no cinders) with a
maximum dimension of two (2") inches, providing the voids in such coarse material are
completely filled with earth and granular material. In the event that suitable material as herein
specified for trench backfill is not available from trenching or other excavation for the project,
the Contractor shall supply and place the requisite additional material without increase in the
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 8
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Contract price. Thoroughly compact the backfill herein referred to in layers with a heavy
rammer or an approved mechanical tamper. Setting the backfill with water will not be
permitted.
C. Backfill for all piping under slabs on grade, within the building structures, concrete paving, and
asphaltic paving shall be with fine materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam,
sandy clay and sand gravel, soft shale or other approved materials, free from large clods of
earth or stones, deposited in six (6") inch layers, and thoroughly and carefully rammed. Provide
coarse sand or granulated slag to a point of twelve (12") inches above the pipe and backfill the
remainder of the trench.
D. Backfill around and for two (2') feet minimum over pipes installed prior to completion of fills,
shall be placed by hand or approved small equipment and compacted to six (6") inch layers as
detailed or approved by the Architect. Prior to running heavy equipment over such pipes, the
depth, width, and extent of protective backfill shall be approved by the Architect.
E. For underground gas piping included under this Contract, furnish and install 6” of river sand all
around piping-under, along side of, and on top of piping. Remaining backfill shall be as
specified herein.
F. The Architect may reject any on-site or bottom material which he considers unsuitable for the
intended use of the fill.
G. Sewer mains will be checked by the Architect to determine whether any displacement of the
pipe has occurred after the trench has been backfilled to two (2') feet or more above the pipe.
If the pipe line shows poor alignment, displaced pipe or any other defects, such defects shall be
remedied by the Contractor at his expense.
H. Complete installation of all underground piping, including pipe bedding and backfilling, shall be
in accordance with all requirements of the local Code Authorities and utility authorities. The
Contractor shall review such requirements with the local authorities prior to commencing work.
I. Any information on utilities, surface or sub-surface structures, roadways, lines or conditions
presented on the contract drawings does not guarantee that these utilities, surface or sub-
surface structures, roadways, lines or conditions shall be exactly as illustrated and described. It
is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain and/or verify such information prior to construction in
order that he may provide an installation in complete conformity with design intent of the
project.
J. The Contractor shall maintain the work safe to human life and property in conformance with all
Local, State and Federal Safety Regulations.
K. Any structures and existing services damaged in the course of the work shall be repaired by the
Contractor in kind equal to or surpassing the existing installation.
L. All Plumbing Contract work in public highway, street, or right-of-way is the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with appropriate governing
or municipal agency, make repairs, obtain and pay for all permits, inspection fees, tapping fees,
obtain approvals and all other incidental costs of work, relative to work under this Contract.
M. Provide marking strip for each underground utility included under this Contract. Refer to
“Utilities”, Section 220500.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 9
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.5 CLEANING AND TREATING OF PIPE SYSTEMS
A. Every pipe system shall be cleaned to remove trash, mill scale, cutting oil, welding, and burning
splatter from the lines before any control devices are installed. If such debris has collected in
valves, the valves shall be disassembled and cleaned prior to closing for the first time.
B. Brush and clean work prior to concealing, painting, and acceptance. Perform in stages if
directed.
C. Clean and repair painted exposed work, soiled or damaged, to match adjoining work before
final acceptance.
D. After several hours of operation, each strainer shall be blown down. This shall be repeated as
often as necessary to produce a clean discharge from the blowdown. Prior to turning the
system over to the Owner, each strainer shall be removed and cleaned.
3.6 TESTING
A. Refer to “Plumbing Tests”, Section 220503.
B. Pipe and fittings shall be tested before any insulation or other covering is applied.
C. Testing may be performed in sections before vital equipment is connected, if the test pressure
is above the equipment rating.
D. Test medium shall be water under hydrostatic pressure with all air removed from the system.
With the Architect’s consent, the test may be performed with compressed air to prevent danger
from freezing. Questionable joints shall be soaped to prove tightness.
E. The Architect shall observe all tests. Notice to the Architect shall be given 2 full days before the
testing is to be performed.
F. The Contract shall obtain certificates of approval, acceptance, and compliance with regulations
of all agencies having jurisdiction. Work shall not be deemed complete until such certificates
have been delivered to the Architect.
END OF SECTION 220501
PLUMBING WORK 220502 - 1
PNC Bank – Prototype General Specifications 0000000.00 08-26-11
SECTION 220502 – PLUMBING WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 CODE COMPLIANCE
A. All plumbing work and materials shall comply with all applicable codes. Energy conservation
shall be provided for plumbing systems as described in applicable State building energy
conservation acts.
1.3 ROUGH-IN
A. This Contractor shall verify roughing-in dimensions for all fixtures and equipment prior to his
roughing-in for such fixtures and equipment.
1.4 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work to be performed under these Specifications shall include providing all labor, materials,
and equipment necessary to furnish and install, complete, properly, and fully all plumbing work
as shown on the Drawings or herein specified. It is the intent of these Specifications that a
complete and operating system shall be installed and this Contractor shall carefully examine the
site, plans, and Specifications, and shall include all items necessary to accomplish this purpose.
The work, in general, shall include, but shall not be limited to the following:
1. Provide sanitary drainage systems as indicated.
2. Provide water service, arranged as detailed. Extend water service 5-0” outside of exterior
wall, for extension under the Site Contract. Final connections by Site Contractor.
3. Provide complete domestic hot and cold water distribution systems. Install water
metering equipment.
4. Provide plumbing services and final connections for equipment furnished under various
Contracts or by the Owner
5. Provide insulation for piping and equipment as specified.
6. Testing, adjusting and balancing all plumbing piping and equipment.
7. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim.
1.5 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Refer to Section 220500.
PLUMBING WORK 220502 - 2
PNC Bank – Prototype General Specifications 0000000.00 08-26-11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawing submittals shall not be regarded as installation manuals. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to obtain installation recommendations from the manufacturer of each item of
the equipment.
B. This Contractor shall submit prints of shop drawings and manufacturers’ data and
manufacturer’s data for approval in the manner prescribed. Include in this submission for the
following items. Additional items may be required at the Architect’s discretion.
1. Hangers, supports, inserts, flexible connectors, and pipe sleeves.
2. Plumbing fixtures and trim.
3. Valves, thermometers, pressure gauges, strainers, relief valves, air vents, mechanical
pipe couplings, pressure reducing valves, water hammer arrestors.
4. Location and size of sleeves for openings in floors and walls; escutcheons.
5. Thermal insulation.
6. Valve tags and lists, stenciling materials.
7. Access panels.
8. Identification labels.
9. Fireproofing materials.
10. Paint.
11. Piping.
12. Drainage specialties; trap primers.
13. All pumps and controls.
END OF SECTION 220502
PLUMBING TESTS 220503 - 1
PNC Bank – Prototype General Specifications 0000000.00 08-26-11
SECTION 220503 – PLUMBING TESTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Contractor shall make all preliminary and final tests at the site on piping systems included
under this Contract, on the storm and sanitary drainage systems, cold water and hot water
piping. Contractor shall provide all testing instruments, pumps, smoke machines, gauges and
other equipment for all tests, and the services of competent mechanics for conducting the
same. Contractor shall also pay all fees required by the local Authorities in connection with such
tests. All tests shall conform with the requirements of the prevailing local plumbing codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROCEDURES
A. All tests shall be made in the presence of a representative of the Architect, and in the presence
of representatives of the local Authorities having jurisdiction, and Insurance Authorities, whose
presence is required. This Contractor shall notify the Architect and all Authorities at least 48
hours in advance of such tests. Preliminary tests shall be made before giving such notification.
B. All systems shall be left in good operating condition. If defects of material or workmanship in
piping systems or equipment are disclosed as a result of these tests and operations, repairs
shall be made by this Contractor, using new materials; and all defective materials shall be
removed from the site immediately. Tests shall be repeated until a satisfactory test has been
made.
C. No caulking of screwed joints, cracks or holes will be acceptable. Replacing shall be the full
length of defective sections of pipe. Defective apparatus shall be removed from the site and
replaced by apparatus conforming to the requirements of these Specifications. The entire cost
of repairs shall be borne by this Contractor.
3.2 DRAINAGE SYSTEM TESTS
A. Tests of the sanitary and storm piping systems within the building shall be made with water.
Upon completion of the piping, all openings in the system shall be closed, and the systems
completely filled with water to the top of the highest stack. If the system is tested in sections,
each opening shall be tightly plugged except the highest opening of the section under test; and
each section shall be filled with water, but no section shall be tested with less than a ten (10')
foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the upper ten (10') feet of the next
proceeding section, shall be tested so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the
PLUMBING TESTS 220503 - 2
PNC Bank – Prototype General Specifications 0000000.00 08-26-11
uppermost ten (10') feet of the system) shall have been submitted to a test of less than a ten
(10') foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system or in the portion under test for
at least 15 minutes before inspection starts; the system shall then be tight at all points. All
exterior sewers included under this Contract shall be tested in accordance with local sewer
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. All water distribution piping, interior and exterior, included under this Contract, shall be
hydrostatically tested to a pressure one and one-half times the normal system pressure or 150
psi, whichever is greater, and maintained for a period of 2 hours with a pressure loss of not
more than 5 psi. The exterior water distribution system shall be tested in compliance with the
Water Authority. Confirm requirements prior to bidding.
3.4 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. The operation of all plumbing fixtures after installation and connection shall be tested to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
3.5 EQUIPMENT
A. All new equipment shall have an 8 hour operating test, during which time the Contractor shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Architect that the equipment is working properly and that
all controls and safety devices are functioning properly.
END OF SECTION 220503
PIPE INSULATION 220700 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 220700 – PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The pipe insulation shall be as hereinafter described in this section.
1.3 CODE COMPLIANCE
A. All insulation materials and installation procedures shall be in accordance with the minimum
requirements of applicable State energy code acts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION
A. Pipe insulation shall be as manufactured by Owens Corning, Knauf, Manville, or approved
equivalent. Insulation sundries and adhesives shall be made by Benjamin Foster, Childers,
Vimasco, or approved equivalent. Thicknesses shall be in accordance with the following
schedule:
MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION
Up
to 1 1/4"
1 ½"
to 2"
2 ½"
and Larger
Domestic Hot Water Supply
100º - Fahrenheit and
Greater 1.0" 1.0" 1.0"
Domestic Cold Water
40º - 60º Fahrenheit 1.0" 1.0" 1.0"
Storm and Rainwater
Conductors
Various Temperatures 1.0" 1.0" 1.0"
B. The type of insulation shall be the following:
1. Piping insulation shall be “heavy density,” 1-piece molded fiberglass with factory applied
Type ASN/SSL “All Service” jacket with self-sealing lap. Average thermal conductivity
shall not exceed .25 BTU-in per square foot per degrees Fahrenheit per hour at a mean
PIPE INSULATION 220700 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
temperature of 75 degrees. Thickness shall conform to schedule for pipe size and service
as specified herein. Insulate roof drain bodies.
2. Vapor-barrier jacket shall be white kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced
with glass fiber, and pressure sensitive, self-sealing lap adhesive conforming to the
physical properties listed in next paragraph.
3. The insulating system, including insulation, jacket adhesives, mastics and cements, shall
have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested under procedure ASTM E-84,
NFPA 255, and UL 723, not exceeding:
a. Flame Spread: 25
b. Fuel Contributed: 50
c. Smoke Developed: 50
4. All products or their shipping cartons shall have label affixed indicating smoke and flame
ratings.
5. Fittings shall also be 25/50/50 rated as described above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install non-conducting covering on the following piping and
apparatus installed under this Contract. For performing this work, this Contractor shall employ
an insulation subcontractor specializing and experienced in covering work, and approved by the
Architect.
B. Except chrome plated piping at plumbing fixtures and equipment, all domestic water piping
shall be insulated, exposed and concealed. The body of all roof drains and all unburied storm
water piping, exposed and concealed, horizontal and vertical, shall be insulated. Insulate all
HVAC condensate drains, exposed and concealed.
C. Insulate make-up cold water piping.
D. All exposed hot, cold, and drain piping below lavatories for handicapped and/or wheelchair use
shall be insulated, McGuire, Truebro, Brocar, Plumberex, Zurn, or approved equivalent. Include
insulation of P-Trap. Refer to Section 224000, “Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment”.
E. All valve bodies, fittings, and flanges in all piping specified to be covered shall be insulated the
same as the piping service.
F. Application of insulation materials to piping shall be done in accordance with the manufacturers'
written recommendations. Where thickness of insulation is not specified, use applicable
thicknesses recommended by the manufacturer for the specific use.
G. All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. All valves and fittings
shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation equivalent in density and thickness to the
adjoining insulation or with insulating cement equivalent in thickness to adjoining insulation or
with "Zeston" type, Proto Corp., or approved equivalent, premolded PVC fittings installed in
accordance with the manufacturers' instructions. Fittings shall be finished with 8 oz. glass mesh
and mastic (use breather mastic on systems operating 50º Fahrenheit; a vapor barrier mastic
on systems operating from 50º Fahrenheit down). Jackets on pipe insulation shall be stapled
using outward clinch staples spaced three (3") inches apart at least one-fourth (1/4") inch in
from the lap edge of systems. All insulation shall be stapled, tapered, and sealed regardless of
service.
PIPE INSULATION 220700 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
H. "Concealed" shall mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts or hung
ceilings. "Exposed" shall mean that piping or equipment is not "concealed" as defined
hereinabove. Piping and equipment in service tunnels, mechanical equipment rooms, storage
areas, or unfinished rooms shall be considered "Exposed".
I. All insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves. All covered
pipe shall be located a sufficient distance from walls, other pipes, ductwork, and other obstacles
to permit the application of the full thickness of insulation specified; and if necessary, extra
fittings and pipes are shall be used.
J. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Pipe hangers on
cold lines (under 50º Fahrenheit) shall be sized large enough to be installed over the outer
surface of the insulation. Load distributing corrosion-resistant metal shields shall be installed
around the lower one-third (1/3) circumference of the insulation. Shields shall be 12 gauge for
pipe sizes six (6") inch and larger; 16 gauge for smaller sizes. Length of the shield shall be
twelve (12") inches up through six (6”) inches; and sixteen (16”) inches for over six (6”) inches.
K. Pipe sizes greater than three (3") inches IPS require supplementary load bearing material, the
same thickness as the insulation used in combination with the hanger shields to resist
compression of the insulation.
L. Concealed work needs no further finish.
M. Insulate water lines within and around cabinetry and casework, installed under this Contract.
Insulate water meters, backflow preventers, pressure reducing valves, and strainers.
N. Do not insulate underground cold water piping in direct contact with the ground.
O. Do not insulate unions.
P. Cover heater expansion tank with 1" semi-rigid fiberglass board in roll form faced with a factory
applied ASJ vapor retarder, 25/50 rated, conforming to ASTM C-795.
Q. Hot water heater shall be furnished with a factory insulated jacket as specified with that
equipment.
R. Insulate inlets and outlets of trap primers, and outlets of trap primer distribution units. Insulate
bottom of distribution units.
END OF SECTION 220700
HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS 221116 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 221116 – HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The domestic hot and cold water piping shall be as hereinafter described in this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING ABOVE GROUND, INSIDE BUILDING
A. All shut-off valves in water lines shall be ball type. Hose end ball valves with vacuum breakers
shall be installed at all low points of piping system for drainage.
B. All valves for general use shall be Nibco Inc., Apollo, Milwaukee, Crane, Watts, or approved
equivalent.
C. Bronze valves, including check valves, shall be made to be “dezincification resistant”, with metal
components in the waterway, or not containing more than 15% zinc in their chemical makeup.
D. All valves shall be designated for a minimum 125 pounds per square inch (S.W.P.), 200 pounds
per square inch (W.O.G.).
E. The name or trademark of the manufacturer and the guaranteed working pressure shall be cast
or stamped on the body.
F. Pipe, All sizes: Hard Copper, Type L, ASTM B-88 (certified tube, including dimensions).
Standard copper tubing not meeting ASTM B-88 dimensional
requirements will not be acceptable. Soft temper, Type L, copper tubing,
acceptable in underfloor pipe sleeves, same specification.
Fittings: Solder type wrot copper, American-made. If the Contractor so desires,
the T-Drill system will also be acceptable, and by certified mechanics
only, as hereinafter specified. A copper grooved mechanical system and
the ProPress System will also be acceptable, as hereinafter specified.
Ball Valves: Valves shall be manufactured by Nibco, No. T/S-580-70, or approved
equivalent. Valves shall conform to MSS SP-110. The Nibco "Nib-Seal"
insulated ball valve will be acceptable. The Apollo Series 77C-200-AO full
port bronze ball valve with 2” tube extensions and conforming to MSS
SP-110, or approved equivalent, will be acceptable for installation with
the ProPress tubing assembly system.
HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS 221116 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Check Valves: Check valves in water lines, all bronze construction, horizontal swing,
Nibco Model S-413/T-413, or approved equivalent. Valves with brass
discs shall be regrinding type. Valves shall conform to MSS SP-80..
Drain Valves: All bronze ball type construction with vacuum breaker, Nibco, or
approved equivalent.
Unions: Wrot copper, ground joints, and solder ends – Nibco, or approved
equivalent.
G. Exterior Wall Hydrants: Type WH-1: Zurn No. Z1300-CL Series encased Ecolotrol "antisiphon"
automatic draining wall hydrant for flush installation, Josam, Watts, Wade, or Smith. Complete
with non-freeze type integral backflow preventer, bronze casing, all bronze interior parts, non-
turning operating rod with free-floating compression closure valve, replaceable bronze seat and
seat washer, 3/4" inlet/outlet, and key-operated control valve. Nickel-bronze box and hinged
cover with cylinder lock and "WATER" cast on cover. Nickel-bronze cover with polished face. A
stainless steel wall hydrant will not be acceptable. Mount wall hydrants with centerline 2' - 0"
above finished grade.
H. Backflow Preventers (except as herein specified): Reduced pressure zone type, bronze, Watts
Series 909QT-S, with 909-AG air gap fitting piped to nearest drain, Wilkins, Conbraco, or
approved equivalent. Quarter turn, full port ball valves and strainer, with bronze body ball test
cocks. A stainless steel backflow preventer will be acceptable.
I. Double Check Valve Backflow Preventer - 2”: Backflow preventer shall be the Watts Model
007MIQT-S, 2” size, Wilkins, Conbraco, or approved equivalent. Valve shall have cast bronze
construction. Valve shall include locked lever handle ball shutoffs, replaceable seats and discs,
strainer, and test cocks. For back siphonage and backpressure backflow. A stainless steel
backflow preventer will be acceptable. Provide quality locks with keys to Owner, Yale, Master
Lock, Bundy, or approved equivalent.
J. Small Dual Check Backflow Preventers: All bronze body, the Watts No. LF7RU2-2, Wilkins,
Conbraco, or approved equivalent, with bronze body ball test cocks and quarter turn, full port
valves. Provide strainer ahead.
K. Other Backflow Preventers ½” and Smaller: All bronze body, reduced pressure zone type, the
Watts No. 009QT-S, with 909-AG air gap fitting piped to nearest drain, Wilkins, Conbraco, or
approved equivalent. Quarter turn, full port valves, with bronze body ball test cocks, with tee
handle shutoffs, and strainer.
L. Type HB-1 Hose Bibbs: Single hose bibbs shall be the T & S Brass No. B-0720-RGH, modified
with four arm handle, rough chrome, with integral atmospheric vacuum breaker, Chicago
Faucet, Zurn, or approved equivalent. Polished chrome hose bibb acceptable. Mount hose bibbs
with centerline 36” to 42” above finished floor.
M. Vacuum Breakers: Refer to Section 220501.
2.2 VALVES (GENERAL)
A. Furnish and install all valves necessary to the proper operation of the system. A valve shall be
placed where each branch leaves the main and at such points, as required for the proper
HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS 221116 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
control and shut-off of all lines. Each piece of equipment that may have to be removed from
the system for repair shall be connected by union or flange, and provided with isolation valves.
2.3 STOPS
A. Each plumbing fixture furnished under this Contract and each piece of special equipment
furnished under other contracts or by the Owner shall, unless otherwise shown or specified, be
provided with a compression stop valve on the water supply lines. On copper lines, ball valves
shall be installed on branch water lines to equipment. Stops shall be finished brass,
chromeplated where exposed and shall be provided with key control.
2.4 ACCESS PANELS
A. Where required for access to concealed strainers, valves, and other plumbing equipment, all
removable panels complete with frame shall be furnished by this Contractor, turned over to the
General Contractor for installation. Panels shall be of sizes required for their intended service
and shall be of the type and material required for the finish and construction into which they
are installed. Access panels in fire rated ceilings or walls shall be similarly rated (Refer to
Architect’s finish schedule). Panel sizes shall be a minimum of 18" x 18", or larger as directed.
B. In suspended lay-in ceilings, use tile in place of access panel and provide in such tile a means
of identification as hereinbefore specified.
C. For acoustical ceilings, conform to Architectural panel pattern. Access panels and doors shall
have concealed hinge and vandalproof operated cam lock. Access doors accessible from
corridors; toilet rooms and other public areas shall be Style TMS stainless steel.
D. Access panels shall be J. L. Industries, Zurn, Karp, or approved equivalent. Styles shall be
compatible with the surrounding construction.
2.5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Pressure reducing valves shall be of bronze construction, the Watts Series 223 or N223B as
required, or approved equivalent.
B. Furnish and install a strainer ahead of each pressure reducing valve, of type specified. Reducing
valve with integral strainer will be acceptable.
C. Comparable pressure reducing valves as manufactured by Cash-Acme, Mueller, Conbraco,
Spirax-Sarco, or approved equivalent, will be acceptable.
2.6 WATER METERING EQUIPMENT
A. Water meter will be furnished by the Water Authority for installation by the Plumbing
Contractor. Exact rough-in dimensions shall be obtained from the Water Authority before
roughin. All costs shall be included in the Plumbing Contract as required; obtain exact costs
from Water Authority. Coordinate all remote meter reading installations with the Water
Authority, perform all related work, and include such costs in the Contract price.
HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS 221116 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION
A. All buried pipe for water service shall be installed to prevent any movement or blow-out of
fittings due to pressure surges in the line. Provide concrete anchoring as required by the Water
Authority. Provide restraining rods at the building entrance. Water piping shall be installed with
a minimum ground cover over top of pipe of four feet zero inches 4'-0", or as additionally
required by the Water Authority. All excavation and backfilling shall conform with the Water
Authority. The entire installation shall conform with Water Authority requirements. Confirm
requirements prior to bidding.
B. Interior water piping shall be installed exposed on ceilings and walls in unfinished areas and
concealed in pipe spaces, chases, partitions, floor or ceiling construction, and in spaces above
dropped ceilings of all other areas or as shown and noted on the Drawings. All piping shall be
installed in spaces and adjacent to other surfaces with sufficient clearances to permit air relief
of the hot water system. Air venting valves shall be installed at all trapped high points in the
hot water piping. Air venting valves shall be as hereinbefore specified; refer to Section 220501.
C. Provide a shut-off valve at the base of up-fed water risers and at the top of down-fed water
risers with a drain valve at the base of all water risers.
D. Provide a shut-off valve at the base of up-fed water risers and at the top of down-fed water
risers with a drain valve at the base of all water risers.
E. Refer to Section 220503 for plumbing testing.
F. The water system shall be thoroughly flushed upon completion of the installation. Clean out all
affected strainers.
3.2 MECHANICALLY FORMED TEES FOR HARD TEMPER COPPER TUBING
A. The T-Drill assembly of copper tubing will be acceptable. Mechanically extracted collars shall be
formed in a continuous operation consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the tube
surface to form a collar having a height not less than three (3) times the thickness of the tube
wall. The collaring device shall be fully adjustable as to insure proper tolerance and complete
uniformity of the joint. The joining branch tube shall be notched and dimpled in a single
process so as to set the proper penetration of the branch tube into the fitting to assure a free
flow joint.
B. All joints shall be brazed by certified mechanics only in accordance with the Copper
Development Association copper tube handbook using B-Cup Series metal filler metal. The
TDrill System shall conform to ASTM Designation F2014-00.
3.3 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Joints in copper tubing shall be assembled with lead-free solder using a non-corrosive flux. All
copper tubing and fittings of 2” size shall be tinned prior to making solder joint.
HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS 221116 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. If the Contractor so desires, for interior domestic water lines of 2” size, a Type "L" copper
grooved mechanical coupling system will be acceptable, for lines above floor level, Victaulic, or
approved equivalent. The copper tube ends must be expanded to accept an IPS size coupling.
Use ball valves as herein specified.
C. If the Contractor so desires, for domestic water lines of all sizes, the Viega ProPress System of
mechanical joint copper tubing assembly will be acceptable, for lines above floor level or below
grade. The ProPress System shall consist of an electro-hydraulic pressure crimping tool, with
sets of interchangeable crimping jaws, and ProPress special copper fittings. The fittings shall
include an O-sealing ring, and shall require no torches, solders, flux, or special pipe burnishing
or preparation. A permanent, watertight seal is made by crimping the fittings. Rated at 200 psi;
tested to 600 psi. The systems shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions and governing code requirements. Pipe supports shall be installed so that interior
horizontal piping is in uniform alignment.
D. Suitable adaptors shall be used when necessary for connection to fittings, valves or other
accessories having threaded ends.
E. All screw joint copper pipe shall be made with flake graphite and oil or other approved pipe
compound applied to the male threads only and screwed tight with not more than 2 threads on
the finished joint exposed, and where pipe and fittings are chrome plated, all threads shall be
concealed.
3.4 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM
A. Before being placed in service all water lines, interior and exterior, included under this Contract
work, shall be chlorinated to the satisfaction of the Architect.
B. Prior to chlorination, all dirt, foreign matter shall be removed by a thorough flushing.
C. A water mixture of hypochlorite solution shall be applied by means of a solution-feed device.
D. Treated water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy all non-spore forming
bacteria. This period shall be at least 3 hours and preferably longer as may be directed.
E. After the chlorine treated water has been retained for the required time, the chlorine residual at
the pipe extremities and at other representative points shall be at least 5 parts million.
F. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the newly installed
pipe line at its extremities until the replacement water throughout its length shall, upon test, be
equal to the water quality served from the municipal water supply system.
G. Should the initial treatment, in the opinion of the Architect, prove ineffective, the chlorination
procedure shall be repeated until confirmed tests show the water sampled from the newly
installed pipe conforms to the requirements.
3.5 ELECTROLYSIS CONTROL
A. The installation of copper tubing shall be accomplished in such a way as not to touch or come
in contact in any way with ferrous metal. Where copper tubing, piping, or fittings are anchored,
supported or may come in contact with metal construction, an insulating non-conductor spacer
similar to lead, rubber, fiber or plastic shall be installed to assure prevention of electrolysis.
HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS 221116 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Hangers supporting copper tubing shall be copper, copper-plated or be large enough to
accommodate the insulating pipe covering. Copper tubing lines shall not be (even temporarily)
supported or secured to ferrous metal.
C. Connections between ferrous and copper piping shall be with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings
shall be as manufactured by Watts, Wilkins, Walter Vallett, Clearflow, or approved equivalent.
3.6 BRANCH PIPING TO FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Branch or runout piping shall be extended and connected to all fixtures and equipment
requiring same. Sizes of such connections shall be as shown on the Drawings or as required by
the particular piece of equipment being served. If the sizes of such connections are not clearly
indicated, the Contractor shall verify the sizes required with the Architect prior to
commencement of any roughing-in work. Changes to piping necessitated due to the
Contractors' failure to properly verify the required sizes shall be made at the Contractors'
expense.
END OF SECTION 221116
Soil, Waste and Vent Piping Systems 221316 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 221316 – SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The soil, waste, and vent piping systems shall be as hereinafter described in this section.
B. All pipe materials shall be subject to the acceptability of that material with the prevailing local
plumbing code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY SEWER AND VENT PIPING BURIED UNDERGROUND (INSIDE BUILDING)
A. Pipe: Service weight cast iron soil pipe; polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Schedule 40 Plastic Pipe (DWV)
ASTM 2665.
Fittings: Service weight cast iron soil pipe type; or Schedule 40 PVC.
Joints: Neoprene compression gasket or leaded; PVC solvent cemented joints.
B. In Main Mechanical Equipment Room, for sanitary soil, waste, and vent lines, use cast iron only
below floor to a point 10’ – 0” outside the area in all directions, due to hot discharges.
C. Extra heavy weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be utilized where required by local
codes.
2.2 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING ABOVE GROUND (INSIDE BUILDING)
A. Pipe: Cast Iron "No-Hub" or Type "L" copper.
Fittings: Cast Iron "No-Hub" or DWV copper solder joint cast bronze or wrot copper drainage
fittings, American-made.
Joints: For cast iron, neoprene gasket with stainless steel band and screws, as manufactured by
Clamp-All, Husky, Mission, or approved equivalent; soldered for copper joints.
Vents:Vent lines to atmosphere shall be minimum 3" diameter and terminate a minimum of 12"
above roof level. Terminate vent lines at a higher height above roof level where required by
local codes. Rigidly support all vent lines extending through roof.
Soil, Waste and Vent Piping Systems 221316 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.3 TRAPS
A. Service weight or extra heavy weight cast iron, wrot copper, or PVC, in accordance with applied
piping system.
B. A separate trap shall be provided for each plumbing fixture which does not contain an integral
trap. In general, all fixture traps shall be provided with accessible cleanout plugs located on
the bottom of the bend.
C. Traps shall be set true with respect to their water seals.
D. Provide building sanitary sewers included under this Contract work, each with house traps,
vents, and cleanouts as required by prevailing plumbing code. Provide traps of same materials
as applied piping system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOINTS
A. Joints in cast iron soil pipes shall be made with compression gaskets. Compression gaskets
shall be neoprene, service weight or extra heavy weight as necessitated by the pipe, "Ty-Seal"
as made by Tyler Pipe Co., Eastern, Charlotte, Richmond, or approved equivalent. A caulked
joint using pig lead and oakum will be acceptable, with at least 12 ounces of lead per inch of
pipe diameter; add lead in one pouring.
B. Fittings for “no-hub” cast iron soil pipe shall be of the same weight class as the pipe. Joints
shall be made with “no-hub” neoprene sealing sleeves and stainless bolted clamps.
C. Screw joints shall be fitted accurately and put together with red lead and boiled linseed oil or
other approved compound. The surplus lead shall be wiped off before making joints. The ends
of all pipes shall be reamed free of burrs before joints are made. Threads shall be cleaned,
tapered, and cut so as not to extend beyond the fittings.
D. Joints between cast iron and steel, brass or copper lines shall be made with approved ring or
coupling forming a spigot end into which the steel or copper or brass pipe is screwed.
E. Fittings for Type L, hard temper copper waste pipe lines shall be wrot copper or cast bronze
soldering drainage fittings, American-made. Solder joints in copper tubing shall be made up as
follows. Ends of tubing and inside jointing surfaces of fittings shall be wiped with emery cloth;
tubes, and fittings heated to a uniform temperature and solder fed until a ring of solder is
visible around the tube at the end of the fittings. Wipe joint clean of all excess solder. Tubes
shall be held rigid until the solder has cooled.
F. Joints between pipes of dissimilar materials shall be made with pre-fabricated flexible couplings
and joint sealers as specified herein for transition joints.
G. Joints in interior PVC piping shall be made with socket type fittings and solvent-cement welding,
above floor or below bottom floor. Joints in exterior PVC sewer piping shall be made with
flexible elastromeric seal (ASTM D3212).
H. All joints shall be made permanently gas and water tight.
Soil, Waste and Vent Piping Systems 221316 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
I. For above ground drainage piping changes in direction, use long sweep fittings where possible;
otherwise, short-sweep 1/4 bends, or combination Y and 1/8 bends, also Y’s or in combination
with other bends; use 45 degree Y or 90 degree Y short turn type for horizontal branches
discharging to stacks; however, approval must be obtained for these locations.
J. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or required to suit grades or conditions, all main lines
shall be installed with a uniform slope of 1/8" to the foot and all branch lines shall be installed
with a uniform slope of 1/4" to the foot, or as otherwise required by local codes. Maintain 30"
minimum ground cover above exterior piping.
3.2 TRANSITION JOINTS
A. All transition joints in sewers between similar or dissimilar materials of equivalent or an
equivalent size shall be made gas and water tight by means of an approved connector or
adapter of the compression or mechanical seal type. The connector or adapter shall be
manufactured of preformed elastomeric plastic, conforming to the applicable sections of ASTM
Standards C-425, C-443, C-564, and D-1869.
B. Couplings of the mechanical seal type shall have tightening clamps or devices made of Series
300 stainless steel. The compression joint connector or adapter and flexible coupling shall be
installed as recommended and specified by the manufacturer. Each connector shall bear the
manufacturers' name clearly visible. Connectors shall be as manufactured by Fernco Joint
Sealer Company, Indiana Seal, NDS, Inc., or approved equivalent.
3.3 ELECTROLYSIS CONTROL
A. The installation of copper tubing shall be accomplished in such a way as not to touch or come
in contact in any way with ferrous metal. Where copper tubing, piping, or fittings are
anchored, supported or may come in contact with metal construction, an insulating non-
conductor spacer similar to lead, rubber, fiber or plastic shall be installed to assure prevention
of electrolysis.
B. Hangers supporting copper tubing shall be copper, copper-plated or be large enough to
accommodate the insulating pipe covering. Copper tubing lines shall not be (even temporarily)
supported or secured to ferrous metal.
C. Connections between ferrous and copper piping shall be with dielectric fittings. Dielectric
fittings shall be as manufactured by Watts, Wilkins, Walter Vallett, Clearflow, or approved
equivalent.
3.4 FLASHINGS
A. Openings in roof for extended vent piping will be flashed under the General Contract - Roofing
Contractor.
END OF SECTION 15405
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 224000 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 224000 – PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B. Refer to Section 018119- “Indoor Air Quality Requirements”.
C. All caulks, sealants, etc. shall comply with LEED criteria for volatile organic compounds (VOC).
1.2 SCOPE
A. The plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be as hereinafter described in this section.
B. All plumbing fixtures shall be new and of the best quality. All fixtures shall bear the
manufacturers' guarantee label or trademark, indicating first quality.
C. All vitreous china fixtures shall be white. All fixtures shall be specially selected, free from cracks,
chips, flaws, stains and warpage, and other defects which would - in the opinion of the
Architect - mar their appearance. Fixtures shall be replaced by the Contractor, and the
guarantee period on such replaced fixtures shall be extended for the full term of the guarantee
from the date of replacement.
D. The Contractor shall refer to the Drawings for the quantities of plumbing fixtures of each kind
to be furnished under these Specifications, and shall include all plumbing fixtures thereon
unless specified to the contrary hereinafter.
E. Provide adapters on all final piping connections to equipment furnished under other contracts or
by the Owner.
F. Item numbers listed herein are also noted on the Drawings. Refer to the Drawings for locations.
G. All fixtures shall be listed below:
1. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay, Just, Advance Tabco
2. Fixture Support Carriers: Zurn, Josam, Smith
3. Waste/Trap Assemblies: Elkay, Just, McGuire Mfg.,
4. Water Supplies/Stops: McGuire Mfg., Zurn, Chicago Faucets
5. Insulation Kits: McGuire, Truebro, Plumberex (white)
H. Model names and numbers are those of the first named.
I. All exposed water piping to fixtures shall be chrome-plated. Chrome traps and chrome tubing
shall be 17 gauge minimum. All traps of all types shall include cleanout each.
J. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for scheduled mounting heights.
K. Caulk with white silicone sealant caulk on all wall and floor contact edges on all fixtures, or of
color caulk selected by the Architect. Caulk shall be of type which can be painted.
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 224000 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
L. All escutcheons shall be chrome, cast brass, set screw type, including on drain assemblies and
water supplies at fixtures.
M. Upon completion of this Contract, the Plumbing Contractor shall provide the Owner’s
maintenance personnel with a Chicago Faucet repair kit, or similar kit furnished by the
approved faucet supplier.
N. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish templates to General Contractor for cut-out work for built-in
sinks included under this Contract. Confirm available cabinet sizes with the General Contractor
or Equipment Supplier prior to ordering counter sinks of any type.
O. Refer to Plumbing Appendix C of the architectural specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIXTURES
A. Sink "S-1" – ADA – Single Bowl
1. Elkay Company No. LRAD-2521-65, single bowl, Type 302, 18 gauge stainless steel
countertop ledgeback sink unit, 25” x 21-1/4”, 6-1/2” deep, three (3) hole punching for
three-hole faucet. Provide center drain. Sound deadened. Self rim.
2. Chicago Faucet No. 201-G8AE26-5-317AB chrome plated faucet, 8” centers, rigid/swing
gooseneck spout, 4” wrist blade handles, aerator, 1.0 GPM flow rate.
3. Elkay No. LK-35B stainless steel drain and tailpiece assembly.
4. Zurn Z1021 Water Saver Trap Primer assembly.
5. 1/2" copper water supplies with McGuire fixed key stops.
6. Sink countertop openings by General Contractor. Sink set and sealed by Plumbing
Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All fixtures, trim, and accessories shall be installed according to manufacturers'
recommendations in a neat and workmanlike manner.
B. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, trim, and accessories installed under this Contract.
C. Refer to Section 220500 for “Final Connections”.
END OF SECTION 224000
General Provision For HVAC Work 230500 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 230500 – GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B. Refer to Section 018113 – “Sustainable Design Requirements” and Section 018119 – “Indoor Air
Quality Requirements”.
1.2 HVAC WORK
A. These Specifications are issued to cover all work in connection with the complete installation of
the HVAC work. HVAC work is hereby defined to include work as herein specified and as shown
on the Drawings issued in connection with this project. Any reference in these Specifications to
the Contractor shall hereby be considered a reference to the HVAC Contractor. Any reference
or letting of work to subcontractors or manufacturers in these Specifications does not relieve
the Contractor of his responsibility for the work, materials, and equipment under this Contract.
1.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The Contractor shall do all cutting and patching required for installation of all HVAC work and
shall make all changes, relocations and installations with a minimum of noise.
B. Wherever it becomes necessary to cut out any portions of walls, floors, ceilings, or other
portions of the building as may be required to perform the work under this Contract, the
Contractor shall do all necessary cutting and fitting, shall remove all excess material, and shall
replace all damaged work so as to leave the premises in a finished condition. No cutting shall
be done which may in any way affect the building structurally or architecturally without first
securing the consent and approval of the Professional. Any damage incident to cutting or other
causes in the performance of this Contract shall be made good by replacement or repairs in a
manner satisfactory to the Professional. The Contractor must use extra precaution so as not to
disturb the bearing quality of construction.
C. All present and new equipment, floors, walls, etc., shall be adequately protected from dust and
dirt caused by the work. Protection shall include suitable temporary barriers or coverings. The
exterior and interior premises of the building shall be kept as clean as possible during
construction. At no time shall the contractor interfere with the normal operation of the building
by allowing debris, etc., to remain on the premises. Contractor shall use industrial type vacuum
cleaners for removal of plaster, dust, etc. in the building.
D. All patching and repairing shall be done by workmen skilled in this type of work and shall match
present or new finishes.
General Provision For HVAC Work 230500 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
E. All cutting performed under this Contract shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner.
The size of each new opening shall be kept to minimum size. The location of each new opening
must be approved by the Professional before the opening is drilled or cut.
1.4 HVAC PLANS
A. The HVAC plans are intended to be diagrammatic and are based on one (1) manufacturer's
equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact location, the exact
dimensions or all the details of the equipment. The Contractor shall verify the actual
dimensions of all materials and equipment to ensure that they will fit in the available space. All
apparatus shall be located and all ductwork run in the manner and locations shown thereon as
closely as conditions will permit, and deviations therefrom shall be made only with the consent
of the Professional and without additional charge. The right is reserved by the Professional to
make any reasonable changes in the location of the equipment and ductwork prior to rough-in
without involving additional expense.
B. Due to the magnitude of ductwork and the limited amount of overhead and ceiling space,
installation of ductwork shall have precedence over other trades. Installation of systems under
his designated contract shall be coordinated with all other contractors. HVAC Contractor shall
provide "interference drawings" to be coordinated with all other contractors. HVAC Contractor
shall submit 5 sets of prints for review by the Engineer No ductwork shall be installed until
"interference drawings" are reviewed by Engineer.
1.5 STANDARD OF QUALITY
A. All material shall be strictly in accordance with the quality, style and size as specified herein.
Manufacturers names and model numbers are given in the Specifications for the purpose of
establishing a standard of quality, style, size and type, and shall not be construed to exclude
equipment or material of other manufacturers.
B. When the Contractor elects to substitute materials or equipment other than that specified, the
Contractor will be held responsible for all structural, mechanical, and electrical changes required
for the installation of substituted materials or equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. All
changes shall be subject to architectural, mechanical, electrical and structural Professionals'
complete approvals.
C. When the Contractor desires to furnish equipment of another manufacturer, he shall include a
complete Specification of the substituted item with each submission copy of shop drawings
indicating the necessary modifications to his standard product to satisfy the requirements of the
Contract Specifications.
D. Final approval of competitive equipment is reserved by the Professional when in their opinion
the equipment does not correspond to that specified.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to starting any installation, prepare and submit detailed shop drawings by specification
sections for materials and equipment related to the mechanical systems. All shop drawings shall
be submitted sufficiently in advance of final requirements to allow ample time for checking and
resubmittal as needed without delaying the construction schedule.
General Provision For HVAC Work 230500 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. The work described in any shop drawings submission shall be carefully checked for all
clearances (including those required for maintenance and servicing), field conditions and proper
coordination with all trades on project. Each submitted shop drawing shall include a certification
that all related job conditions have been checked and that no conflicts exist.
C. Shop drawing submittals shall be clearly marked to show the intended item with identification
as to unit number or other marking to show location, service, and function. Submittals not
marked to identify the equipment and application will be rejected.
D. Prior to submitting each shop drawing, the Contractor shall review said shop drawing for
compliance with the contract documents. The Contractor's stamp and signature shall indicate
his approval. Any and all deviations from the contract documents and/or modifications
necessary to the equipment being submitted shall be identified on each shop drawing.
E. The submissions are the Contractor's documents and the Professional's approval constitutes an
acknowledgment that the documents have been submitted and nothing more. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to check his own submissions for compliance with the Contract
Documents and job conditions.
F. At the close of the job, prior to final review, three (3) bound copies of the following shall be
submitted by transmittal to the Professional for review and acceptance.
1. Equipment warranties.
2. Contractors' warranties.
3. Parts list and manuals for all equipment.
4. Operating instructions (in writing).
5. Written instructions on maintenance and care of the systems.
G. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's data for the following items in accordance with the
Contract Documents:
1. Hangers, supports, inserts, expansion compensators, flexible connectors.
2. Thermal insulation.
3. Grilles, registers, diffusers, dampers and air distribution system accessories.
4. Automatic temperature control equipment, wiring diagrams, component descriptions and
sequences.
5. Access panels.
6. Fireproofing materials.
1.7 VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL
A. All equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibrations within Noise Criteria
Curves listed in Sound And Vibration Control Fundamentals of the latest edition of the ASHRAE
Handbook of Systems and Applications. Sound and vibration measurements shall conform with
the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. If such objectionable noise or vibration shall be
produced and transmitted to occupied portions of the building by apparatus, piping, ducts or
other parts of this work, any necessary changes, as approved, shall be made without cost to
the Owner.
B. All mechanical equipment shall be isolated in accordance with the ASHRAE Guide and Data
Book HVAC Systems and Applications. All vibration isolators shall be of the same manufacturer
where possible and shall be furnished by Consolidated Kinetics, Korfund, Vibration Eliminator
Co. or approved equivalent.
General Provision For HVAC Work 230500 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.8 PAINTING
A. The HVAC Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and other equipment necessary for
all painting hereinafter specified. All painting shall be done by workmen skilled in this type of
work. Painting shall be in strict accordance with the requirements and recommendations of
OSHA.
B. All nongalvanized and unpainted iron and steel work installed above ceilings and gas piping
exposed outdoors installed under this Contract shall be painted with two coats of Rust-Oleum
rust preventative paint. First coat shall be Rust-Oleum No. X-60 red primer and second coat
shall be Rust-Oleum No. 634 black gloss. All galvanized and nongalvanized iron and steel work
installed at locations at the exterior of the Building shall be painted similar to the above, except
finish coats shall be of colors selected by the Professional. Galvanized surfaces shall be given a
special primer.
C. Prior to painting gas piping, remove rust, dirt, and grease.
D. Contractor shall paint all visible ductwork behind all air outlets with flat black paint.
E. Where the factory finish on equipment has been damaged, the equipment shall be refinished to
the satisfaction of the Professional.
1.9 MISCELLANEOUS IRON WORK
A. Furnish and install all miscellaneous iron work including, but not limited to, ductwork supports,
rooftop unit support, exhaust fan support and all other equipment supports. All additional
structural members shall be furnished and installed to support the heating, ventilating and air
conditioning equipment without excessive stress or strain on the building construction.
Structural beams and other structural members shall be furnished and installed under this
Contract where the building steel is not available or capable of supporting or anchoring
ductwork and equipment. Nothing shall be hung from the deck.
1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification labels shall not exceed 3” in length and 1” in height. Black Letters shall be ¼”
high on white background. Labels shall be manufactured with pressure-sensitive backing and
shall be nonabsorbent, nonporous and colorfast. Adhesive backing shall be chemically
compounded to hold tight and fast at wide temperature extremes. Labels shall be as
manufactured by Seton Name Plate Company, Brady Co. or Kimball Systems. Labels shall be
additionally secured with screws or rivets. Flexible plastic punched tapes will not be acceptable.
Labels shall provide such information as: “Exhaust Fan – EF-1”, “Air Handling Unit – AHU-1”,
“Rooftop Unit – RTU-1” and include date of installation and project number.
B. Where valves, cleanouts, dampers, etc., are located above removable tile ceilings or above
access panels the contractor shall furnish and install identification labels on the the corners of
the access panels or removable ceiling tiles. Labels shall be provided with the word “Valves”,
“Relay”, “Damper”, etc., so that the equipment may be readily located in the future.
1.11 FIRE STOPPING
A. Seal openings of fire rated construction with a material or product that has been tested at an
independent testing laboratory, such as UL, FM, etc. Fire stopping shall conform to ASTM
E-814 and UL 1479, with fire ratings equal to or exceeding the fire rating of the construction
General Provision For HVAC Work 230500 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
involved. Fire stopping shall be UL classified, and shall be similar to the 3M brand Fire Barrier
Penetration Sealing Systems, or approved equivalent. Fire stopping of this type shall also be
utilized for openings through smoke rated construction. To conform with BOCA Basic Building
Code Standards, refer to Section 1420, "Fire Stopping".
1.12 CLEANING
A. At the completion of the work all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. All
temporary replaceable air filters shall be removed and new replaceable air filters shall be
installed after the areas have been cleaned for occupancy.
B. Any stoppage or any discoloration or other damage to any part of the building, its finish or
furnishings due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean shall be repaired by the Contractor
without cost to the Owner.
C. All new equipment installed under this Contract, and new furnishings and finishes soiled or
damaged due to the work included under this Contract shall be thoroughly cleaned as required
to remove plaster, dust, paint splashes, labels and debris.
1.13 INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATING PERSONNEL
A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of qualified personnel, thoroughly familiar with the
completed installation, to instruct the permanent operating personnel in the proper operation
and maintenance of all systems. These services shall be furnished for a period of one 8-hour
day after the operation of the building has been taken over by the owner.
B. The contractor shall combine the written instructions and the manufacturers’ equipment
brochures in complete volumes with hard back binders which shall be turned over to the owner
before final acceptance of the contract work. The contractor shall furnish the owner with three
(3) complete sets of the manuals indexed by equipment and by manufacturer. The contractor
shall obtain a signed receipt from the owner for the written instructions and equipment
brochures.
1.14 UTILITIES
A. Do not interrupt any utility or service without adequate previous notice and schedule.
B. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, repair, replace and maintain in service any utilities,
facilities or services (underground, overground, interior or exterior) damaged, broken or
otherwise rendered inoperative during the course of construction.
1.15 AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of this project, the Contractor shall furnish one (1) full size set of record
drawings and the electronic files (PDF or ACAD). Record drawings, all of which shall be
dimensioned, shall be to the scale of one-eighth (1/8") inch or one-fourth (1/4") inch being
equivalent to one (1') foot zero (0") inches. This project shall not be considered complete until
record drawings have been submitted.
1.16 GUARANTEES
A. All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year,
beginning with the date of acceptance of the project in writing. This warranty shall be in
General Provision For HVAC Work 230500 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
writing and shall include written copies of factory warranties and expiration dates on items of
equipment where the warranty date might differ from the acceptance date, such as five (5)
year warranty of sealed refrigerant systems. No warranty shall start before the acceptance
date.
B. The Contractors' warranty shall include at least two (2) inspections of the system to repair and
replace any items found to be defective during this period. The first shall be approximately six
(6) months after the acceptance of the system and the second at the end of the first year.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. All work shall be performed by competent mechanics using proper tools and equipment to
produce first-quality work. All work shall be neatly installed, accessible for maintenance, and
complete with all accessories required.
3.2 ACCESSIBILITY
A.All equipment shall be installed in such a way that all components requiring access (control
operators, motors, drives, belts, filters, etc.) are so located and installed that they may be
serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and
equipment.
3.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All material and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, federal and state laws,
Specifications, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations.
B. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply within the requirements of the
applicable building codes, state laws and federal laws, local ordinances, industry standards,
and utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies.
C. This Contractor is assumed to be skilled in the trade and is solely responsible for compliance
with OSHA regulations, performing the work in a safe and competent manner, and in
installation procedures required for this work. All supervision assigned to this project shall be
experienced in this type of work. This Contractors' superintendent shall be designated as
Safety Inspector, unless the Contractor designates another person and notifies the Professional
of this change.
3.4 PERMITS, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall give all requisite notices, obtain and pay all deposits and fees, including
connection fees, necessary for the installation, tests, and inspections of all work provided
under this Specification.
General Provision For HVAC Work 230500 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
END OF SECTION 230500
TESTING AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS 230593 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 230593 – TESTING AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS 230593
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment
covered by this section with all auxiliaries ready for Owners use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INDEPENDENT TESTING AND BALANCING CONTRACTOR
A. The Testing and balancing of the systems shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor who shall
employ an independent Testing and Balancing Contractor certified with the National
Environmental Balancing Bureau to perform all testing and balancing of the air and water
system.
2.2 EVALUATION OF SYSTEMS
A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment necessary to
properly measure the air capacity of the systems, the electrical voltage and currents, fan
speeds, static pressures, air velocities, refrigeration pressures, and all other readings normally
necessary to evaluate the performance of a system, adjust the quantities to those called for,
and test the systems.
2.3 EQUIPMENT OPERATION
A. All equipment shall be checked for proper operation as soon as electrical power is available and
upon approval of the Professional. Any malfunction shall be reported to the manufacturer, and
corrective action taken as soon as possible to prevent delay of the acceptance of the work.
2.4 EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Required adjustments with mechanical equipment are to be expected, and it is this Contractors'
responsibility to determine if there are any in the work and to correct them without causing
delay of the job.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INITIAL BALANCING - AIR SYSTEMS
TESTING AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS 230593 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
A. Before commencing balancing, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the
following:
1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment
4. Final filters are clean and in place.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris
6. Correct fan rotation.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage has been minimized.
B. As soon as electrical power is available, the Contractor shall check all equipment for electrical
problems, check rotation of motors, read voltage and currents in each leg of each motor,
heater, etc., and check the readings against the nameplate.
C. Complete ductwork as soon as possible and operate the evaporator fans (with filter in place);
adjust the units for maximum air supply by reading motor power. Supply outlets shall be
adjusted to the required air quantity.
D. The return air system shall then be adjusted to design capacity with the proper outside air.
E. Check and balance each exhaust system to the design air quantity. Excess exhaust air will not
be permitted.
F. After supply and return air are in balance and the quantity correct, adjust the outside air
dampers to the air quantity shown on the Drawings (if not shown, use 10% of the supply air
quantity). If economizer control is specified, check for proper setting of the controls and for
proper operation of the dampers (outside air and relief).
G. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Owner's
Representative.
H. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system
balance.
I. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed.
J. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROPER BALANCING AND TESTING
A. The Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor is responsible for the performance of
the entire Building including the work in this section. After this Contractor has completed the
installation, the Superintendent for the Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor shall
monitor the balancing and testing of the systems, and shall certify that the readings required
under this section have actually been made and that all systems are in actual operation. The
test and balance report shall be certified by the Independent Testing and Balancing Contractor
and signed by the General Superintendent. At the time of final review, if it is suspected that
these readings have not been made or that equipment is not in operation, the expense for the
TESTING AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS 230593 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
return of the Professional and/or Professional shall be billed to the Heating Ventilating and Air
Conditioning Contractor.
3.3 READINGS REQUIRED TO BE REPORTED
A. The following readings shall be made and reported to the Professional. All readings shall be
submitted in a testing, adjusting and balancing report certified by the National Environmental
Balancing Bureau. All readings shall give the actual raw data read for each supply and return
opening, including exhaust hoods and openings. All readings made shall be recorded, and if any
readings are invalid, they shall be identified as such. Any readings out of line shall be explained
by a note in the report.
B. Air quantity readings shall include:
1. Actual measured air quantity of each supply and return outlet shall be read and recorded.
Measurements shall be made with a cone with a calibrated outlet and velometer
equivalent to Alnor.
2. Same for each return and exhaust inlet.
3. Same for each hood, giving supply (if any) and exhaust.
C. Temperature readings required as above are:
1. Outside air at equipment.
2. Return air at unit.
3. Supply air leaving unit.
4. Mixture of outside and return air BEFORE entering the cooling or heating coil or heater.
D. Electrical readings required are:
1. Measured voltage and amps on each phase of each major motor (compressor,
evaporator fan, condenser fans, roof exhaust fans, etc.) while the equipment is under
maximum normal load.
2. The nameplate voltage and current for each of the above motors.
E. Refrigeration readings required are:
1. Suction and discharge pressure of each compressor, or in the case of packaged
condensing units, the suction and liquid line pressures.
3.4 SYSTEM DIFFICULTIES
A. The above readings shall be made on each unit or piece of equipment and these readings sent
to the Professional for review as early as possible so that any apparent difficulties can be
resolved before the anticipated close of the job.
3.5 REVIEW BY PROFESSIONAL
A. After the above information is received by the Professional, it will be reviewed and compared
against the design. The Professional will generally review the job for the Owner. Such review
will not be scheduled until the above information can be reviewed and accepted. THE WORK
REQUIRED UNDER THIS CONTRACT IS NOT COMPLETE UNTIL THIS INFORMATION IS
ACCEPTED AS ACCURATE AND COMPLETE.
END OF SECTION 230593
DUCT INSULATION 230700-1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 230700 – DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment
covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for the Owners' use.
B. All (single wall) supply air ductwork shall be externally insulated.
C. All return air & transfer air ductwork shall be internally insulated with acoustical duct liner.
D. Exhaust air ductwork shall not be insulated nor lined.
1.3 CODE COMPLIANCE
A. All duct insulation shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the SMACNA Standards,
NFPA 90A, IECC, and all other applicable codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION AND ENCLOSURES
A. General
1. Furnish and install best grade insulation for all equipment, and sheet metal work as
specified herein or as may be necessary for properly insulated heating and ventilating
systems.
2. Insulation shall be applied to a clean, dry surfaces after ductwork and equipment have
been tested and approved.
3. All insulation, jackets or facings and adhesives used to adhere jacket or facing to the
insulation, including fittings and butt strips, shall have a fire and smoke hazard system
rating and label as tested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding flame
spread 25, smoke developed 50.
4. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics cements, tapes and cloth for fittings shall have
the same ratings as listed above.
5. Continue insulation through wall and ceiling openings, providing sleeves as required.
Insulate entire system, including fittings, joints, flanges, flexible connections, and
expansion joints.
DUCT INSULATION 230700-2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket (External Insulation): Conforming to ASTM C 553, Type I, and HH-I-
558B, Form B, Class 6.
1. Thermal Conductivity (K value) of at least .29 at 75 degrees F. Mean temperature.
2. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Foil Scrim Kraft (FSK); conforming to HH-B-100B, Type II and
ASTM C 1136, Type II having a maximum vapor transmission rating of 0.02 perms.
Secure in place using outward clinch staples and appropriate pressure sensitive foil tape
or glass fabric and vapor barrier mastic.
3. Installation: Maximum allowable compression is 25%.
4. Density: .75 PCF (pounds per cubic foot)
C. Internal Duct Lining: Conforming to ASTM C 1071, Type 1 or 2, NFPA 90A and 90B.
1. Thermal Conductivity (K value) not to exceed 0.25 at 75 degrees F. Mean temperature,
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of .45 or higher for the 2 PCF 1/2" product; and .65 or
higher for the 1.5 PCF 1" product as tested by ASTM C 723 using an ASTM E 795 Type A
Mounting.
3. Maximum Velocity on air stream side 6000 FPM for Type 1: and 4000 FPM for Type 2;
maximum service temperature of 250 degrees F.
D. Return Air and Transfer Air Ducts
1. Internally insulate return air and transfer air ducts with ½" thick internal, acoustical duct
liner. Apply duct Lining in strict accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA's HVAC
Duct Construction Standard Metal & Flexible". Meet Standards for Mechanical Fasteners.
2. Adhesive: Conform to ASTM C 916 and apply to the sheet metal with a 90% minimum
coverage. Coat exposed edges of the duct liner material with the same adhesive. Repair
rips and tears using adhesive.
PART 3 - GENERAL
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not use staples for securing any insulation.
B. Apply insulation only on clean, dry surfaces.
C. Continue insulation through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves, except terminate duct
insulation at flexible duct connections at equipment.
D. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
E.Insulate entire system, including fittings, joints, flanges, flexible connections, and expansion
joints.
END OF SECTION 230700
CONTROLS 230900-1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 230900 - CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment
covered by this section with all auxiliaries ready for Owners use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIELD DEVICES
A. Provide instrumentation as required for monitoring, control or optimization functions.
B. Room Temperature Sensors shall be Electronic
1. Digital room sensors shall have setpoint slide adjustment override options. The setpoint
slide adjustment can be software limited by the automation system to limit the amount of
room adjustment.
Temperature monitoring range +20/120°F -13° to 49°C)
Output signal Changing resistance
Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+/- 0.3°C)
Set Point and Display Range 55° to 95° F (13° to 35°C)
2. Duct (single point) temperature:
Temperature monitoring range +20/120°F (-7°/49°C)
Output signal Changing resistance
Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)
3. Duct Average temperature:
Temperature monitoring range +20° +120°F(-7°/+49°C)
Output signal 4 – 20 mA DC
Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+03°C)
Sensor Probe Length 25’ L (7.3m)
4. Outside air temperature:
Temperature monitoring range -58°+122° F(-50ºC to +50ºC)
Output signal 4 – 20 mA DC
CONTROLS 230900-2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)
C.Humidity Sensors:
Range 0 to 100% RH
Sensing Element Bulk Polymer
Output Signal 4 – 20 mA DC
Accuracy At 77°F(25ºC) + 2% RH
D.Pressure to Current Transducer
Range 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa) or
3 to 30 psig (21 to 207 kPa)
Output signal 4 – 20 mA
Accuracy + 1% of full scale (+ 0.3 psig)
E.Damper Actuators
1. Damper actuators shall be electronic fail safe spring return, all metal housing, manual
override.
a. The actuator assembly shall include the necessary hardware and proper mounting
and connection to a standard ½” diameter shaft or damper blade.
2. Actuators shall be designed for mounting directly to the damper shaft without the need
for connecting linkages.
3. All actuators having more than 100 lb-in torque output shall have a self-centering
damper shaft clamp that guarantees concentric alignment of the actuator’s output
coupling with the damper shaft. The self-centering clamp shall have a pair of opposed
“v” shaped toothed cradles; each having two rows of teeth to maximize holding strength.
A single clamping bolt shall simultaneously drive both cradles into contact with the
damper shaft.
4. All actuators having more than a 100 lb-in torque output shall accept a 1” diameter shaft
directly, without the need for auxiliary adapters.
5. All actuators shall be designed and manufactured using ISO900registered procedures,
and shall be listed under Standards UL873 and CSA22.2 No. 24-93 l.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A. Thermostats
1. Existing thermostats shall be reused and relocated.
2. For exhaust systems, thermostats shall be line voltage type, direct or reverse acting, as
applicable.
3. Thermostats shall be arranged for either horizontal or vertical mounting.
4. In the vertical position thermostat shall fit on a mullion of movable partitions without
overlap.
5. Mount the thermostat covers with tamper-proof socket head screws.
B. Current Sensing Relay:
CONTROLS 230900-3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Provide solid-state, adjustable, current operated relay. Provide a relay which changes
switch contact state in response to an adjustable set point value of current in the
monitored A/C circuit.
2. Adjust the relay switch point so that the relay responds to motor operation under load as
an “on” state and so that the relay responds to an unloaded running motor as an “off”
state. A motor with a broken belt is considered an unloaded motor.
3. Provide for status device for all fans.
C. Smoke Detector (For Unit Shutdown)
Supply air and Return air smoke detectors (furnished by HVAC contractor, factory installed by
rooftop manufacturer) shall input a smoke alarm to the controller when products of combustion
are sensed. When the alarm is received by the controller, it shall de-energize the rooftop unit
and shall alarm an audio/visual alarm. A/V alarm shall be located 84” above floor on wall above
thermostat. The controller shall close the outdoor air damper while opening the return damper.
The (return air) smoke detector shall be Model SL-2000 series duct smoke detector
manufactured by Air Products & Controls. Detector shall provide remote “alarm” and “trouble”
indication. Furnish with Model MS-RH/KA/P/R remote station providing alarm light, green pilot
light, test/reset keyswitch, and alarm horn. Furnished and installed by HVAC contractor. HVAC
contractor shall coordinate installation requirements with rooftop unit manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTROL WIRING
A. Control wiring for HVAC equipment shall be furnished and installed by HVAC Contractor unless
noted otherwise on the drawings.
B. All control wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor who provides the particular
equipment. Control wiring includes furnishing and installing all required motor controls, relays,
pilot devices, all related raceway systems, all related conductors and all final connections, other
than three phase power connections.
3.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Rooftop Unit
1. The rooftop unit is constant volume, consisting of an economizer section (OA & RA
dampers), direct expansion cooling, gas heating, factory installed controls.
2. Refer to Section 237413 for detailed sequence of operation of rooftop units.
B. General Exhaust Fan Controls
1. Exhaust fans shall be controlled by the lighting control panel. All wiring will be furnished
and installed by the Electrical Contractor. Programming of control panel shall be by
Owner.
C. Thermostatically Controlled Transfer Fans
1. A wall-mounted line voltage thermostat shall be provided for each transfer fan where
indicated which shall function to operate the transfer fan continuously upon a rise or fall
CONTROLS 230900-4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
in space temperature, (depending upon control mode setting of thermostat) and stop the
transfer fan upon reaching space temperature setpoint in heating or cooling mode. All
control devices and wiring shall be provided by this Contractor. All power wiring will be
furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. Thermostat shall be Barber Colman
TC-1151 so similar.
D. Electric Wall Heaters
1. Built-in thermostat shall activate heating element and fan upon fall in temperature below
setpoint. Thermostat shall de-energize heating element and fan upon satisfying
temperature setpoint. A high temperature limit shall de-energize unit if high limit
temperature setpoint is reached.
2. Heaters shall have a line voltage thermostat with remote bulb to permit operation below
50°F (adj.). Refer to control wiring diagram on drawings. Locate bulb on north exposure
where unaffected by the sun. Final location as approved by Architect.
E. Electric Cabinet Heater
1. Built-in thermostat shall activate heating element and fan upon fall in temperature below
setpoint. Thermostat shall de-energize heating element and fan upon satisfying
temperature setpoint. A high temperature limit shall de-energize unit if high limit
temperature setpoint is reached.
2. An outdoor sensor shall enable unit operation when outdoor temperature is 50 deg. F
and below. Locate bulb on north exposure where unaffected by the sun. Final location by
Architect.
END OF SECTION 230900
DUCTWORK 233113-1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B. Refer to Section 018119 – “Indoor Air Quality Requirements”.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The ductwork shall be as hereinafter described in this section.
B. All ductwork shall be galvanized steel.
1.3 CODE COMPLIANCE
A. All ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the SMACNA Standards, NFPA
90A, NFPA 90B, and all other applicable codes for the pressure classification as noted on the
Drawings and in the schedule.
1.4 DUCT CONSTRUCTION
A. Each duct system shall be constructed for two (2) inch W.G. pressure class.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK - (GALVANIZED STEEL)
A. All rectangular sheet metal duct shall be constructed as required in HVAC Duct Construction
Standards for low pressure ductwork as published by SMACNA. All rectangular ducts shall be
complete with four (4) sides and shall be of airtight construction. All ducts, unless otherwise
noted, shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel or iron in accordance with the following
table:
Width of Panel Sheet Thickness - USS Gauge Number
0" - 26" 24
27" - 40" 22
B. Duct panels over twenty (20") inches in width shall be crossbroken or otherwise stiffened.
Ducts shall be adequately braced in accordance with the following table:
Width of Panel Size of Angle - Inches
0" - 18"Standing Seams
19" - 36"1" x 1" x 1/8"
DUCTWORK 233113-2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
37" - 54"1 1/4" x 1 1/4" x 1/8"
55" and over 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 3/16"
C. Concealed round sheet metal duct shall be constructed as required in HVAC Duct Construction
Standards for low pressure duct as published by SMACNA. Low pressure duct may be
shopfabricated, using good practice. Round sheet metal ducts shall be in accordance with the
following table:
Diameter Spiral Seam Duct Long. Seam Duct Fittings
Up to 12"28 gauge 26 gauge 26 gauge
13" - 18" 26 gauge 24 gauge 24 gauge
D. Low pressure ductwork and fittings shall be made tight for minimum air leakage. Do not use
snap lock type round ducts, adjustable elbows, dovetail or spin connections.
E. Branch duct take-offs from rectangular ducts shall be full size bellmouth type (such as the
Buckley Air-Tite Bellmouth Take-Off) with a heavy duty volume regulator for round branch
ducts and 45º shoe tap type with volume regulator for rectangular branch ducts.
F.Flexible duct shall not be used in return and exhaust air duct systems.
G. Completely seal all joints at all duct junctions and all other joints with United McGill Duct Seal
and according to SMACNA HVAC Construction Seal Class B.
1. All sealants, mastics, etc. shall meet VOC limits identified in Section 018119 – “Indoor Air
Quality Requirements”.
H. Duct tape shall not be used to seal joints, to make transitions or for any other reasons except
on the outside of wrapped insulation. If duct tape is used on sheet metal, the job will be
rejected.
2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCTS (LOW PRESSURE)
A. Flexible air ducts shall have impervious inner core with wire reinforcement. The inner duct shall
be covered with one and a half (1.5") inches fiberglass insulation with a polyethylene vapor-
proof jacket.
B.Flexible air ducts shall be UL 181 listed, Class 1, and shall meet all local codes.
C. Adjustable stainless steel or nylon straps shall be used to secure duct fittings and equipment. A
second band shall be applied over the jacket to maintain the vapor barrier.
D. Fittings to connect the flex duct to the trunk duct shall be designed to twist into the trunk duct
and shall have a butterfly-type volume damper. Fitting shall extend into the duct to provide
some air scoop device for airflow.
E. Flexible air ducts shall be the product of an established manufacturer of such products and
equivalent to Certainteed Model G-25, Wiremold Model WGC or P.P.G. "Gloss Flex".
2.3 CURVED ELBOWS
DUCTWORK 233113-3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
A. Curved elbows shall have a throat radius equivalent to the duct width. Provide splitter vanes in
radius elbows where indicated on the Drawings.
2.4 SQUARE ELBOWS
A. Square elbows shall have double-thickness turning vanes.
2.5 TRANSITIONS
A. Transitions in ductwork shall be made with a slope not exceeding 1 - 5, preferably 1 - 7.
2.6 SUPPLY DUCT SPLITS
A. Supply duct splits shall be provided with splitter dampers and adjustable locking quadrant.
Splitter blade shall be 1.5 times the smaller split width.
2.7 DUCT SUPPORTS
A. All ducts shall be adequately supported from construction above by means of strap iron hangers
spaced at not more than six (6') foot intervals.
B. Stiffeners shall be placed at not more than six (6') foot intervals.
2.8 DUCTMATE
A. All joints between sheet metal sections may be made with prefabricated joining systems such
as Ductmate Industries System. System shall consist of side rails complete with mastic sealer
for the ends of a cleat to join the side rails, and the corner pieces. The side angles and cleats
shall be made with not lighter than 20 gauge galvanized steel, corner pieces shall be fabricated
of not lighter than 12 gauge galvanized steel. Completed assembly shall result in a zero percent
(0%) leakage of air.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible connections shall consist of a thickness of fabric fastened to both the air handling
equipment and the duct in an air tight manner. Flexible connections shall provide not less than
two (2") inch clearance between sheet metal. Flexible connections shall be UL approved,
neoprene coated, 30 oz. glass fiber fabric. Fabric shall be Ventglas made by Ventfabrics, Inc. or
approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FLEXIBLE DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Flexible duct shall be limited in length to that necessary to make connections between trunks
and terminal units. This shall not exceed three (3') feet.
B. All flexible duct shall be fully stretched out to reduce resistance.
C. Connections to fittings or terminals shall be made with stainless steel or nylon bands, designed
for that service. The inner liner shall be clamped tight with the band, then the insulation and
DUCTWORK 233113-4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
jacket pulled up tight against the duct or terminal. Install a second band around the outside of
the jacket. Installation shall be as recommended by the duct manufacturer.
D. Support the flexible duct by the hanger strap with support wires on thirty (30") inch intervals to
relieve strain on any fitting. Unnecessary bends, sags, twists, turns, etc. will not be allowed.
END OF SECTION 233113
DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 233300 – DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 STIPULATIONS
A. The specifications sections "General Conditions", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The duct accessories shall be as hereinafter described in this section.
1.3 CODE COMPLIANCE
A. All ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the SMACNA Standards, NFPA
90A, NFPA 90B, and all other applicable codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS
A. Access doors shall be provided into all spaces between the several items of equipment where
necessary to give access to pipes, dampers, valves, bearings or other equipment. Doors shall be
large enough to allow for the proper service for which they are intended.
B. All doors and frames shall be rigid and provided with permanently locked felt or sponged rubber
seals. Fasteners are to suit conditions. Seams of doors shall not extend into the ducts. Access
doors shall be "Ventlock" doors as made by Vent Fabrics, Inc. or equivalent as made by Air
Balance, Inc.
2.2 ACCESS PANELS
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install to the General Contractor for installation access panels
for access to all concealed dampers (mechanical and gravity), and all other equipment where
no other means of access is provided. All access panels shall be of sufficient size to service and
remove the equipment for which they are provided and to open fully the access doors in ducts.
In no case shall the clear opening be less than 24” x 24” unless restricted by space limitations.
B. This Contractor shall determine in advance the location and sizes of all access panels necessary
for the proper installation of his work and have the same provided during the erection of the
work in which such access panels occur and he shall be responsible for their proper and
permanent location. Furnish rods at all lift-out panels. Tops shall be permanently fixed to the
panels.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
C. Access panels shall be all steel construction, having frame of not less than No. 16 rust-proofed
steel, rabbetted to receive cover and set flush with the finished wall or ceiling surfaces. In
plaster walls and ceilings, they shall have plaster keys. In acoustically treated surfaces, they
shall have suitable supporting anchors. Covers shall be rust-proofed stretcher leveled steel, of
not less than No. 14 gauge and shall be secured with lockable clips and locking cams or
countersink screws. The covers shall be flush with the frames and the finished wall or ceiling
surfaces. Frames and covers shall be prime painted for finishing by others.
2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Manual dampers shall be placed in branch ducts of all supply, return and exhaust systems for
proper operation and adjustment of individual registers and diffusers and any part of the
system. Supply grilles in walls and all exhaust grilles shall have the volume control incorporated
in the grille. All volume control dampers shall be opposed blade type. No wood shall be used in
construction of the dampers, all of which shall be the pan type.
B. All dampers shall be made strong, rigid, fitted tightly and provided with angle iron stops, if
necessary, the design, method of hanging, and control being suitable for location and service
required. Where ducts are concealed above furred ceilings, flush type operators attached to the
extended shaft of the dampers shall be provided.
2.4 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Backdraft damper blades shall be aluminum construction (.051) with one half (1/2") diameter
shaft with ball bearings and mounted into a 16 gauge galvanized steel frame. Each damper to
have adjustable counter balanced feature for easy field adjustment. Backdraft dampers shall be
Airstream Products Company model CBD-6 or approved equivalent.
B. Lightweight backdraft dampers with felted edge shall be placed in all gravity vent openings.
2.5 TURNING VANES
A. Provide turning vanes constructed of one and a half (1 1/2") inches wide curved blades set at
onefourth (3/4") inches o.c. supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at two (2") inches
o.c., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.
B. Turning vanes shall be as manufactured by E.H. Price Company, Anemostat or approved
equivalent.
2.6 FILTERS
A. Unless otherwise specified, the filters will be furnished with the equipment and will be so
specified in the equipment specifications.
B.In all cases the equipment will be turned over to the Owner with new filters in place after all
construction dirt and debris has been cleaned up. If it becomes necessary for the HVAC air
handling equipment to operate while construction is still in progress, this Contractor shall use
(MERV 8) throw away filters to protect the coils, fans and ductwork.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.7 MOTOR OPERATED DAMPERS
Furnish and install motor operated dampers of the low-leakage type with a leakage rate of not
greater than 6 CFM/sq. ft. based on a pressure differential of 4” w.g. Dampers and frames shall
both be of extruded aluminum construction with airfoil type blades and plated steel damper
shafts which rotate in nylon bushings. The drive shaft shall be extended to the outside of the
section to permit connecting of damper motors. Operators shall be electric. Dampers shall be
provided with flexible compression type stainless steel seals installed along the top, bottom,
and sides of the frame. Seals along each blade edge shall be extruded vinyl in integral ribbed
grooved inserts in blades. Dampers shall be the Model CD-50, as manufactured by Ruskin,
Arrow, or approved equivalent. Interlock dampers and warm weather exhaust fans.
2.8 DUCT SILENCERS (SOUND ATTENUATORS)
A. Provide duct silencers of type and sizes shown on drawings with outer casing of 22 USS gage
minimum galvanized steel, constructed in accordance with ASHRAE Guide Recommendations for
high pressure ductwork. Perforated galvanized sheet metal interior baffles not lighter than 24
USS gage and with annular space between baffles filled with inorganic mineral or glass fiber of
a density sufficient to provide sound attenuation with acceptable limits at the return and supply
outlets nearest the fan.
B. Combustion rating for silencer acoustic fill shall be not less than the following when tested in
accordance with ASTM E83, NFPA 255 or UL 723:
Flame Spread Classification 20
Smoke Development Rating 20
Fuel Contributed 15-30
C. Airtight constructed and leakproof when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8" H2O inside
to outside of silencer casing.
D. Submit silencer test data. Testing shall be done in accordance with ASTM E477 and AMCA 1011.
E. Rectangular or tubular type as manufactured by Rink Corporation, Industrial Acoustics Co.,
Ruskin, Semco, Dynasonics, or Aero-Sonics.
F. Refer to the drawings for capacity requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. All duct accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations
and with the SMACNA Standards and all applicable codes.
END OF SECTION 233300
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260210 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260210 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXECUTION OF THE WORK
A. These Specifications call out certain duties of the Electrical Contractor and/or Subcontractors.
They are not intended as a material list of items required by the Contract.
B. This division of the Specifications covers the electrical systems of the project. It includes work
performed by the electrical trades as well as trades not normally considered as electrical trades.
C. Provide all items and work indicated on the Drawings and all items and work called for in this
division of the Specifications in accordance with the conditions of Contract (Division 1 General
Requirements Documents). This includes all incidentals, equipment, appliances, services,
hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools, supervision, labor, consumable items, fees, licenses, etc.,
necessary to provide complete systems. Perform start-up and checkout on each item and
system to provide fully operable systems.
D. Comply with all provisions of the Contract Documents including (Division 1), (General
Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions) of the Specifications.
E. Certain terms such as "shall, provide, install, complete, start up" are not used in some parts of
these Specifications. This does not indicate that the items shall be less than completely
installed or that systems shall be less than complete.
F. Examine and compare the Electrical Drawings and Specifications with the Drawings and
Specifications of other trades, and report any discrepancies between them to the Engineer and
obtain written instructions for changes necessary in the work. At time of bid the most stringent
requirements must be included in said bid. Install and coordinate the electrical work in
cooperation with other trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, make proper
provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Engineer. All changes required
in the work of the Contractor caused by neglect shall be corrected at the expense of the
Contractor.
G. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete workable system ready
for the Owner's operation. Any item not specifically shown on the Drawings or called for in the
Specifications, but normally required to conform with the intent, are to be considered a part of
the Contract.
H. These Specifications are basically equipment and performance Specifications. Actual
installations shall be as shown on the Drawings. Installations and details shown on the
Drawings shall govern where these differ from the Specifications.
I. All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be new and unused (temporary lighting and
power products are excluded) and free from defects. All materials used shall bear the
Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. label provided a standard has been established for the material in
question.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260210 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
J. All products and materials to be new, clean, free of defects and free of damage and corrosion.
K. No exclusion from, or limitation in, the symbolism used on the Drawings for electrical work or
the languages used in the Specifications for electrical work shall be interpreted as a reason for
omitting accessories necessary to complete any required system or item of equipment.
L. The use of words in the singular shall not be considered as limiting where other indications
denote that more than one item is referred to.
M. Except for conduit, conduit fittings, outlet boxes, wire and cable, all items of equipment or
material shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout. Multiple manufacturers will not
be permitted.
1.2 COORDINATION OF THE WORK
A. Certain materials will be provided by other trades. Examine the Contract Documents to
ascertain these requirements.
B. Carefully check space requirements with other trades and the physical confines of the area to
insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto including finished
suspended ceilings. Make modifications thereto as required and approved.
C. Transmit to other trades all information required for work to be provided under their respective
sections in ample time for installation.
D. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure
that all trades have the information necessary so that they may properly install all the necessary
connections and equipment. Identify all items of work that require access so that the ceiling
trade will know where to install access doors and panels.
E. Due to the type of the installation, a fixed sequence of operation is required to properly install
the complete systems. Coordinate, project and schedule work with other trades in accordance
with the construction sequence.
F. The locations of lighting fixtures, outlets, panels and other equipment indicated on the Drawings
are approximately correct, but they are understood to be subject to such revision as may be
found necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed in consequence of increase or
reduction of the number of outlets, or in order to meet field conditions or to coordinate with
modular requirements of ceilings, or to simplify the work, or for other legitimate causes.
G. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels, outlets, switches, etc., and
have precise and definite locations approved by the Engineer before proceeding with the
installation.
H. The Drawings show only the general run of raceways and approximate location of outlets. Any
significant changes in location of outlets, cabinets, etc., necessary in order to meet field
conditions shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Engineer and shall receive
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260210 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
approval before such alterations are made. All such modifications shall be made without
additional cost to the Owner.
I. Obtain from the Engineer in the field the location of such outlets or equipment not definitely
located on the Drawings.
J. Circuit "tags" in the form of arrows are used where shown to indicate the home runs of
raceways to electrical distribution points. These tags show the circuits in each home run and
the panel designation. Show the actual circuit numbers on the finished record tracing and on
panel directory card. Where circuiting is not indicated, the Electrical Contractor must provide
required circuiting in accordance with the loading indicated on the drawings and/or as directed.
K. The Drawings generally do not indicate the exact number wires in each conduit for the branch
circuit wiring of fixtures, and outlets, or the actual circuiting. Provide the correct wire size and
quantity as required by the indicated circuiting and/or circuit numbers indicated and control
wiring diagrams, if any, specified voltage drop or maximum distance limitations, and the
applicable requirements of the NEC.
L. Adjust location of conduits, panels, equipment, pull boxes, fixtures, etc. to accommodate the
work to prevent interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route
and location of each raceway prior to installation.
1. Right of way: lines which pitch to have the right- of-way over those which do not pitch.
For example: steam, condensate, and plumbing drains normally have right-of-way.
Lines whose elevations cannot be changed to have right-of-way over lines whose
elevations can be changed.
2. Make offsets, transitions and changes in direction in raceways and as required to
maintain proper head room in pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the
Drawings.
M. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional Detail Drawings to scale
similar to that of the bidding Drawings, prepared on tracing medium of the same size as
Contract Drawings. With these layouts, coordinate the work with the work of other trades.
Such detailed work to be clearly identified on the Drawings as to the area to which it applies.
Submit for review Drawings clearly showing the work and its relation to the work of other
trades before commencing shop fabrication or erection in the field.
N. Contractor shall furnish services of an experienced Superintendent, who shall be in constant
charge of all work, and who shall coordinate his work with the work of other trades. No work
shall be installed before coordinating with other trades.
1.3 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. Prior to submitting of bids, the Contractor shall visit the site of the job and shall familiarize
himself with all conditions affecting the proposed installation and shall make provisions as to the
cost thereof. Failure to comply with the intent of this paragraph will in no way relieve the
Contractor of performing all necessary work shown on the Drawings.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260210 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.4 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall order the progress of his work so as to conform to the progress of the
work of other trades and shall complete the entire installation as soon as the conditions of the
building will permit. Any cost resulting from the defective or ill-timed work performed under
this section shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Ship and store all products and materials in a manner which will protect them from damage,
weather and entry of debris. If items are damaged, do not install, but take immediate steps to
obtain replacement or repair. Any such repairs shall be subject to review and acceptance of the
Engineer.
B. Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer's unopened
container fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and
color.
C. Storage of Materials, Equipment and Fixtures: Store materials suitably sheltered from the
elements, but readily accessible for inspection by the Engineer until installed. Store all items
subject to moisture damage in dry, heated spaces.
1.6 EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Establish sizes and location of the various concrete bases required. Coordinate with General
Contractor and provide all necessary anchor bolts together with templates for holding these
bolts in position.
B. Provide supports, hangers and auxiliary structural members required for support of the work.
C. Furnish and set all sleeves for passage of raceways through structural, masonry and concrete
walls and floors and elsewhere as will be required for the proper protection of each raceway
and passing through building surfaces.
D. Wall mounted equipment, total weight of 100 pounds or less, may be directly secured to wall by
means of steel bolts. Maintain at least 1" air space between equipment and supporting wall.
Groups or arrays of equipment, with total weight of more than 100 pounds, shall be mounted
on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars. Prefabricated steel channels providing a
high degree of mounting flexibility, such as those manufactured by Kindorf, Globe-Strutt and
Unistrut, may be used for mounting arrays of equipment.
1.7 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
A. Provide excavation for the work. Excavate all material encountered, to the depths indicated on
the Drawings or required. Remove from the site excavated materials not required or suitable
for backfill. Provide grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260210 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
trenches or other excavations. Remove any water accumulating therein. Provide sheeting and
shoring as may be necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of personnel.
B. Provide trenches of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of
the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at
every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below
the depths indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum
overdepth of four inches below the trench depths indicated on the Drawings or required. Backfill
overdepths in the rock excavation and unauthorized overdepths with loose, granular, moist
earth, thoroughly machine tamped to a compaction level as specified by the Engineer.
Whenever unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the work is encountered in the bottom
of the trench as determined by the Engineer, remove soil to a depth required and backfill the
trench to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material.
C. Excavate trenches for utilities to a depth that will provide the following minimum depths of
cover from existing grade or from indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, unless otherwise
specifically shown.
1. Secondary electric service: 2 feet (minimum).
2. Telephone service: 2 feet (minimum).
1.8 BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES
A. Do not backfill trenches until all required tests have been performed and the installation
observed by the Engineer. Comply with the requirements of other sections of these
Specifications. Deposit backfill in 6 inch layers and thoroughly and carefully tamp until the work
has a cover of not less than 1 foot. Backfill and tamp remainder of trench at 12 inch intervals
until complete. Uniformly grade the finished surface. Install a 6” wide marking ribbon 12”
above conduits.
1.9 CUTTING, PATCHING, ETC.
A. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of
floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces is necessary for the proper installation,
support or anchorage of raceway, outlets or other equipment, the work shall be carefully done.
Any damage to the building, piping, equipment or defaced finish plaster, woodwork, metalwork,
etc. shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the
Owner.
B. The Contractor shall do no cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of unfinished masonry, tile,
etc., unless he first obtains permission from the Engineer. If permission is granted, the
Contractor shall perform this work in a manner approved by the Engineer.
C. Where conduits, outlet, junction, or pull boxes are mounted on a painted surface, or a surface
to be painted, they shall be painted to match the surface. Whenever support channels are cut,
the bare metal shall be cold galvanized.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260210 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
D. Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs will be provided
by the various trades in their respective materials. The trade requiring them to properly locate
such openings and be responsible for any cutting and patching caused by the neglect to do so.
1.10 NOMINAL VOLTAGES (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
A. Secondary distribution: 120/208 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire.
1.11 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Unless otherwise noted or required because of special conditions, locate outlets as follows:
1.Heights listed are from finished floor to center of device. Verify exact locations with the
Engineer before installation.
a. Wall switch outlets 40"
b. Bracket outlets 7'- 0" to bottom
c. Convenience outlets (general) 18"
d. Convenience outlets (mechanical areas) 4' - 0"
e. Panelboard and distribution cabinet to top 6' - 6"
f. Desk telephone outlets 18"
g. Wall telephone outlets 4' - 9"
h. Desk intercommunication outlets 1' - 6"
i. Signal bells below ceiling 1' - 0"
j. Clock outlets below ceiling 1' - 0"
k. Chimes below ceiling 1' - 0"
l. Television outlets 1' - 6"
m. Pushbuttons 4' - 8"
1.12 CLEANING UP
A. Contractor shall take care to avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, crates, etc., resulting from
the installation of work. Contractor shall remove from the premises each day all debris, boxes,
etc., and keep the premises clean, subject to the Architect’s instructions, which shall be
promptly carried out.
B. Contractor shall clean all fixtures and equipment at the completion of the project.
C. All switchboards, panelboards, wireways, trench ducts, cabinets, enclosures, etc. shall be
thoroughly vacuumed clean prior to energizing equipment and at the completion of the project.
Equipment shall be opened for observation by the Architect as required.
1.13 WATERPROOFING
A. Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs, machine room
floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary, perform it prior to the
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260210 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitch-pockets required. Advise the Architect and obtain
written permission before penetrating and waterproof membrane, even where such penetration
is shown on the Drawings. Perform work so as to maintain any warranties currently in effect.
B. If this Contractor penetrates any walls or surfaces after they have been waterproofed, this
Contractor shall restore the waterproof integrity of that surface at the expense of this
Contractor and as directed by the Architect.
1.14 1.14 SUPPORTS
A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice and the following.
B. Include supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work indicated
as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the weight. In
particular, provide such frames or racks in electric closets.
C. Include supporting frames or racks for equipment, intended for vertical surface mounting, which
is required in a free-standing position.
D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support
system steel members. They shall be rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced
to form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike
arrangement of all equipment mounted on them.
E. Nothing, (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on electric
conduits, raceways, or cables for support, except that threaded hub type fittings having a gross
volume not in excess of 100 cubic inches may be supported from heavy wall conduit, where the
conduit in turn is securely supported from the structure within five inches of the fitting on two
opposite sides.
F. Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceilings media (tiles, lath, plaster, as
well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling).
G. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit, equipment, etc., so that loading will not
exceed allowable loadings of structure.
1.15 FASTENINGS
A. Fasten electric work to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice and the
following.
B. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to the attachment points is 100 pounds or less,
fasten to building elements of:
1. Wood -- with wood screws.
2. Concrete and solid masonry -- with bolts and expansion shields.
3. Hollow construction -- with toggle bolts.
4. Solid metal -- with machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260210 - 8
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
5. Steel decking or subfloor -- with fastenings as specified below for applied weights in
excess of 100 pounds.
C. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 100
pounds, but is 300 pounds or less, conform to the following:
1. At concrete slabs utilize 24" x 24" x 1/2" steel fishplates on top with through bolts.
Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and grouted flush with the top of slab screen line,
where no fill is to be applied.
2. At steel decking or subfloor for all fastenings, utilize through bolts or threaded rods. The
tops of bolts or rods shall be set at least one inch below the top fill screen line and
grouted in. Suitable washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the
decking or subfloor manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with his decking or
subfloor such hangers shall be utilized.
D. Where weight applied to building attachments points exceeds 300 pounds, coordinate with and
obtain approval of Architect and conform to the following:
1. Utilize suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural steel
elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall be suitably welded or
clamped to building steel. Utilize threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members.
E. Floor mounted equipment shall not be held in place solely by its own dead weight. Include floor
anchor fastenings in all cases.
F. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the
building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle
iron bridging tying to the building structural elements.
1.16 FIRE STOPS
A. Openings for electrical equipment penetrating a fire rated floor, wall or ceilings, shall be
resealed as required by Code. Install fire rated sealant equal to or greater than the fire rating
of the penetrated surface.
1.17 PRODUCTS
A. If products and materials are specified or indicated on the Drawings for a specific item or
system, use those products or materials. If products and materials are not listed in either of
the above, use first class products and materials, subject to approval of Shop Drawings where
Shop Drawings are required or as approved in writing where Shop Drawings are not required.
1.18 OMISSIONS FROM THE DRAWINGS
A. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the drawings or specifications or be in
doubt as to their meaning, he shall notify the Engineer before submitting his proposal. The
Engineer will in turn, send written instructions to all Bidders. Neither the Engineer nor the
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260210 - 9
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Owner will be responsible for oral instructions. If the Contractor fails to comply with this
requirement, he shall accept the Engineer’s interpretations as to the intended meaning of the
drawings and specifications.
1.19 EXECUTION
A. Follow manufacturer's instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting all equipment.
Provide one copy of such instructions to the Architect before installing any equipment. Provide
a copy of such instructions at the equipment during any work on the equipment. Provide all
special supports, connections, wiring, accessories, etc.
B. Use mechanics skilled in their trade for all work.
C. Keep all items protected before and after installation. Clean up all debris.
D. Perform all tests required by local authorities in addition to tests specified herein, such as life
safety systems.
E. Applicable equipment and materials to be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and Manufactured
in accordance with ASME, NEMA, ANSI or IEEE standards and as approved by local authorities
having jurisdiction.
F. Before commencing work, examine all adjoining, underlying, etc., work on which this work is in
any way dependent for perfect workmanship and report any condition which prevents
performance of first class work. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions to
which connections must be made or which must be changed or altered.
1.20 VERIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY
OTHERS
A. Prior to the installation of wiring systems for any equipment furnished by others, this contractor
shall verify that the electrical requirements of the equipment match those shown on the
electrical drawings by examining the approved shop drawings of that equipment. Any
discrepancies shall be immediately reported to the engineer.
B. If the contractor fails to comply with this requirement, he shall be responsible for any additional
costs incurred at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.21 PAINT, ADHESIVES, AND SEALANTS
A. Refer to Section 018119, “Indoor Air Quality Management” for allowable VOC content and
submittal requirements for all paints, adhesives and sealants used.
END OF SECTION 260210
ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 260210.10- 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260210.10 - ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Utilize the following abbreviations and definitions for discernment within the Drawings and
Specifications.
1. Abbreviations:
a. NEC National Electrical Code
b. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
c. ANSI American National Standards Institute
d. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
e. ASA American Standards Association
f. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
g. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
h. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
i. IES Illuminating Engineering Society
j. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
k. ASTM American Society of Testing Materials
l. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc.
m. CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers
n. EIA Electronic Industries Association
o. OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
p. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
2. Definitions:
a. "PROVIDE" means to supply, purchase, transport, place, erect, connect, test and
turn over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation, the particular work
referred to.
b. "INSTALL" means to join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect
together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular
operation, the particular work referred to.
c. "FURNISH" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus,
controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper
and complete application for the particular work referred to.
d. "WIRING" means the inclusion of all raceways, fittings, conductors, connectors,
tape, junction and outlet boxes, connections, splices, and all other items necessary
and/or required in connection with such work.
e. "CONDUIT" means the inclusion of all fittings, hangers, supports, sleeves, etc.
f. "AS DIRECTED" means as directed by the Architect or his representative.
g. "CONCEALED" means installed behind wall furring or within double partitions or
installed within hung ceilings.
ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 260210.10- 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
h. "EMBEDDED" means contained within floor slabs, masonry or other construction.
END OF SECTION 260210.10
WORK INCLUDED 260210.15 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260210.15 - WORK INCLUDED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
PART 2 - GENERAL
2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide the work included in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, appliances, auxiliaries, services, hoisting,
scaffolding, support, supervision, and Project Record Documents, and perform all operations for
the Documents, and perform all operations for the furnishing and installing of the complete
electrical furnishing and installing of the complete electrical system, including but not limited to
the work described hereinafter. The work shall meet or exceed the latest codes, regulations
and requirements of the local community and the state.
C. The electrical work is shown schematically on the Drawings to indicate the general system
arrangement and configuration. The work of this Division shall include coordination with the
work of other Divisions of the Specifications and the Contract Documents so as to provide a
complete and operational system capable of being readily operated and maintained, including
approved re-arrangement of the systems and equipment and re-routing of distribution services
to enable the complete system to fit within the confines of the allotted electrical spaces, all to
the satisfaction of the Architect.
D. The work includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Wiring system for power and lighting.
2. Lighting system.
3. Installation of electrical distribution equipment.
4. Grounding.
5. Telephone and Data System wiring and raceway system.
6. Final connections to mechanical equipment.
7. Cable TV wiring and raceway systems.
END OF SECTION 260210.15
CODES, FEES 260210.16- 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260210.16 - CODES, FEES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Comply with Codes in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 CODES
A. The electrical installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of OSHA, NEC and the
rules, regulations and requirements of the power company supplying power to the building.
B. The electrical installation shall comply fully with all county and state laws, ordinances and
regulations applicable to electrical installations.
C. All equipment shall be equal to or exceed the minimum requirements of NEMA, IEEE and UL.
D. Should any change in Drawings or Specifications be required to comply governmental
regulations, the contractor shall notify Architect prior to execution of the work. The work shall
be carried out according to the requirements of such code in accordance with the instruction of
the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.3 FEES
A. All local fees and permits and services of inspection authorities shall be obtained and paid for by
the Contractor. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with local utility companies with respect to
their services. Contractor shall include in his bid, any costs to be incurred relative to power
service (primary and/or secondary) and telephone service.
1.4 CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION
A. Certificate of Inspection and approval shall be procured and paid for by this Contractor from the
Middle Department Inspection Agency and delivered to the Architect before final payment is
made.
END OF SECTION 260210.16
REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES 260210.17 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260120.17- REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES
PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT
A. Materials specified by name or catalog number are base bid items and substitutions are not
permitted. If the Contractor elects to submit a substitution, it shall be listed on his base bid as
an addition or deletion to his base bid.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit detailed shop drawings for materials, systems and equipment as listed
herein, including locations and sizes of all openings in floor decks, walls and floors.
B. The work described in any shop drawing submission shall be carefully checked for all clearances
(including those required for maintenance and servicing), field conditions, maintenance of
architectural conditions and proper condition with all trades on the job. Each submitted shop
drawing shall include a certification that all related job conditions have been checked and that
no conflict exists.
C. All drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of final requirements to allow ample time
for checking and resubmittal as may be required. All submittals shall be complete and contain
all required and detailed information. Copies of catalog pages are not acceptable. All
submittals shall be legible.
D. Acceptance of any submitted data or shop drawings for material, equipment apparatus, devices,
arrangement and layout shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility of furnishing same of
proper dimensions and weight, capacities, sizes, quantity, quality and installation details to
efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the Contract. Such acceptance shall not
relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions or inadequacies of any sort on
submitted data or shop drawings.
E. Shop drawings shall be submitted by specification section. Each section requiring submission
shall be complete, partial section submissions will not be accepted. Each submission shall
contain a coversheet with the required information completely filled out. The coversheet shall
contain the project title and reference to applicable drawing and specification articles. Blank
forms will be provided upon request.
1.3 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for the Architect's approval shop drawings of the following and any other shop drawings
requested:
1. Panelboards
2. Disconnect switches
3. Fuses
4. Circuit breakers
REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES 260210.17 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
5. Light fixtures
6. Wiring devices
7. Conduits and wiring.
END OF SECTION 260210.17
GUARANTEE 260210.18 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260210.18- GUARANTEE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide a guarantee in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Submit a single guarantee stating that all portions of the work are in accordance with Contract
requirements. Guarantee all work against faulty and improper material and workmanship for a
period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where
guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term to apply.
Within 24 hours after notification, correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee
period at no additional cost to Owner, all to the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect. Obtain
similar guarantees from subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and subtrade specialists.
END OF SECTION 260210.18
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 260210.22 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260210.22 - EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide final connections to equipment and coordinate same in accordance with the
Contract Documents. Reference shall be made to “Electrical General Provisions” for contractor’s
responsibility for verification of equipment furnished by others.
B. Equipment to receive final connections shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Mechanical equipment
2. Appliances
3. Miscellaneous equipment
4. Owner furnished equipment
1.2 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to the submitting of bids, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with all conditions
affecting the proposed installation of equipment requiring electrical connections and shall make
provisions as to the cost thereof. Failure to comply with the intent of this paragraph shall in no
way relieve the Contractor of performing all necessary work required for final electrical
connections and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A. All power wiring and connections for all motors including starters, controllers, and breakers as
indicated on the drawings and the riser diagrams shall be furnished and installed under this
section of the specifications.
B. Motors shall be connected in a neat and skillful manner. Ones delivered with terminal boxes
that are inadequate shall be equipped with special boxes that suit the conditions.
C. In general, rigid conduit or tubing shall be used, but motors that require movement or ones that
would transmit vibration to conduit shall be wired with liquid tight flexible steel conduit not over
18" long.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 260210.22 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
D. All motors shall be grounded with a green covered ground wire run inside the conduit and
connected to motor frame on one end and to grounding system on the other end.
E. Motors and their starters not located in the motor control center are only approximately located
on the drawings and the Contractor shall allow for the relocation that developed conditions may
demand. The motor control center is specified in Division 23 of the Specifications.
F. The location of motors, starters and control equipment and the arrangement to be followed
shall be determined on the job jointly by the Contractor whose equipment is involved, this
Contractor and the Architect.
G. Starting equipment shall be either wall mounted or free standing, as best suits conditions. If
free standing, this Contractor shall make and install a suitable frame structural steel to
accommodate it.
H. Furnish and install one motor snap switch of the proper size for disconnect of each single phase
motor indicated on the drawings.
I. This Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the proper rotation for three phase motors.
J. The equipment supplier shall be responsible for verifying the proper rotation for single phase
motors.
3.2 CONTROL WIRING
A. Control wiring for HVAC and Plumbing equipment will be furnished and installed by Plumbing
and HVAC Contractor as specified in Division 23.
B. All control wiring in Division 23 is the responsibility of the Contractor who provides the particular
equipment. Control wiring includes the providing of all required motor controls, relays, pilot
devices, all related raceway systems, all related conductors and all final connections other than
three phase power connections.
C. For single phase equipment provided under HVAC and Plumbing Contracts, this Contractor shall
provide single phase feeders and make final connection.
D. All other control wiring required by other Divisions of the Specifications shall be furnished and
installed by this Contractor. Unless specifically indicated on the drawings or specified
hereinafter to the contrary, all control devices such as starters, pushbuttons, limit switches, etc.,
are furnished under other Divisions of the Specifications. This Contractor shall receive and store
all electrical equipment to be installed by him. Conduit layout and arrangement of control
wiring shall be done by this Contractor.
3.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. This Contractor shall make final connections to all mechanical equipment.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 260210.22 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
END OF SECTION 260210.22
WIRE AND CABLE 260513 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260513 - WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide raceways in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest
applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1. Conductors:
a. ASTM
b. ICEA
2. Terminal Blocks:
a. UL-1059
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRE AND CABLE
A. General
1. Provide wire with a minimum insulating rating of 600 volts, except for wire used in 50
volts or below applications for control of signal systems use 300 volt minimum or 600 volt
where permitted to be incorporated with other wiring systems.
B. Conductor
1. Electrical grade, annealed copper, tinned if rubber insulated, and fabricated in
accordance with ASTM standards. Minimum size number 12 for branch circuits; number
14 for control wiring.
2. The conductors shown on the drawings are copper, except as noted otherwise.
C. Stranding and Number of Conductors
1. Number 12 and number 10 solid.
2. Cables larger than number 10, stranded in accordance with ASTM Class B stranding
designations.
3. Control wires stranded in accordance with ASTM Class B stranding designations.
4. Cables, multi-conductor unless otherwise noted for low tension systems.
D. Insulation
WIRE AND CABLE 260513 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Type THWN/THHN insulation suitable for use in wet locations up to 75 degrees
Centigrade. Use for lighting, receptacle and motor circuits and for panel and equipment
feeders.
2. Type THHN - Flame retardant: Heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation, nylon jacket rated
for 90 degrees Centigrade operation. Use for lighting branch circuit wiring installed and
passing through the ballast channels of fluorescent fixtures, wiring in metal roofdecks in
or near roof insulation, in attic or joist spaces, or in raceways exposed to the sun.
3. Type XF - Crosslinked polyolefin insulated heat-resistant wire suitable for 150 degrees
Centigrade operation. Use for fixture wiring or any wiring within 3 feet horizontally or 10
feet above any furnace, boiler or similar appliance.
E. Color Coding
1. Provide consistent color coding of all feeders, sub feeders, motor circuits and the likes as
follows:
120/208 Volts Code
Phase A - Black
Phase B – Red
Phase C – Blue
Neutral – White
Ground - Green
2. Color-code wiring for control systems installed in conjunction with mechanical and/or
miscellaneous equipment in accordance with the wiring diagrams furnished with the
equipment. Factory color code wire number 2 and smaller. Wire number 1 and larger
may be color coded by color tapping of the entire length of the exposed ends.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Make connections, splices, taps and joints with solderless devices, mechanically and electrically
secure. Protect exposed wires and connecting devices with electrical tape or insulation to
provide not less than that of the conductor.
B. Branch Circuit wires (Number 10 and smaller): Use any of the following types of terminals and
connecting devices:
1. Hand Applied
a. Coiled tapered, spring wound devices with a conducting corrosion-resistant coating
over the spring steel and a plastic cover and skirt providing full insulation for splice
and wired ends. Screw connector on by hand.
2. Tool Applied
a. Steel cap, with conduction and corrosion resistant metallic plating, open at both
ends, fitted around the twisted ends of the wire and compressed or crimped by
means of a special die designed for the purpose. Specifically fitted plastic or rubber
insulating cover wrap over each connector.
2.3 ELECTRICAL TAPE
A. Specifically designed for use as insulating tape.
WIRE AND CABLE 260513 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.4 LUBRICANT
A. Use lubricant only where the possibility of damage to conductors exists. Use only a lubricant
approved by the cable manufacturer and one which is inert to cable and raceways.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway system. Mount wiring through a specified
raceway, regardless of voltage application.
B. Drawings do not indicate size of branch circuit wiring. For branch circuits whose length from
panel to furthest outlet exceeds 100 feet for 120-volt circuits, use number 10 or larger.
C. Do not install wire in incomplete conduit runs nor until after the concrete work and plastering is
completed and moisture is swabbed from conduits. Eliminate splices wherever possible. Where
necessary, splice in readily accessible pull, junction, or outlet.
D. Provide cable supports for all vertical risers where required by code.
E. Flashover or insulation value of joints to be equal to that of the conductor. Provide
Underwriters' Laboratories listed connectors rated at 600 volts for general use and 1,000 volts
for use between ballasts and lamps or gaseous discharge fixtures.
F. Use terminating fittings, connectors, etc., of a type suitable for the specified cable furnished.
Make bends in cable at termination prior to installing compression device. Make fittings tight.
G. Extend wire sizing for the entire length of a circuit, feeder, etc. unless specifically noted
otherwise.
3.2 NEUTRAL WIRE
A. A separate neutral wire shall be installed for each circuit. A common neutral for two or three
circuits is not permitted.
END OF SECTION 260513
GROUNDING 260526 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide a low impedance grounding system in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest
applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1. Underwriters Laboratory Standard No. UL 467
2. ANSI C-1 1978.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install an electrical grounding system as indicated on the Construction Documents
and as specified herein.
B. Grounding systems shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the local
authorities, NEC Section 250, and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
C. All ground wires and bonding jumpers shall be stranded copper installed in conduit. All ground
wires shall be without joints and splices over its entire length.
2.2 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A. The system neutral shall be grounded at the service entrance only, and kept isolated from
grounding systems throughout the building.
B. Each system of continuous metallic piping and ductwork shall be grounded in accordance with
the requirements of the NEC Section 250.
C. Bond each section of switchboard housing and service conduits entering switchboards to ground
bus.
D. Metal conduits and portions of metallic piping and duct systems which are isolated by flexible
connections, insulated couplings, etc., shall be bonded to the equipment ground with a flexible
bonding jumper, or separate grounding conductor.
GROUNDING 260526 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
E. All conduits, metal raceways, boxes, cabinets, etc. installed by this Contractor and all motors
and equipment connected shall be properly bonded and grounded.
F. In all feeders and branch circuits install a green colored ground wire to each panel, cabinet,
receptacle, motor or a piece of control equipment.
G. The green ground wires shall be extended and connected to the ground bus in the panels or
equipment enclosure. Neutral wiring system shall not be used for this purpose. Green ground
wire shall be connected to all junction or pull boxes through which they pass and to all cabinet
and panel enclosures.
H. This ground wire shall be run in same conduit as phase and neutral wires feeding equipment,
motor or receptacles and conduit size shall be increased if necessary. This conductor shall be
installed whether or not shown on the drawings and shall be sized in accordance with NEC but
shall not be smaller than #12 AWG. Motors shall be grounded by a grounding terminal in their
connection box. Tie all ground wires together in panels and connect to ground bus in panel
cabinet.
I. All electrical equipment including lighting fixtures shall be grounded in the same manner as
motors. All equipment shall be solidly grounded to the green covered wire and this Contractor
shall furnish grounding lugs as required.
2.3 GROUNDING METHODS
A. Ground rods where shown shall be copper not less than 3/4 inch in diameter, ten (10) feet long,
driven full length into the earth. The maximum resistance shall not exceed 25 ohms. Separation
between ground rods shall be 20 ft.
B. Install a bare 4/0 copper ground wire around the perimeter of the building a minimum of 30 in.
below surface and connect to columns where noted.
C. A metal underground water piping system used for grounding shall be in direct contact with the
earth for ten feet or more and shall be electrically continuous. Provide bonding jumpers at
water meter and at insulating joints. The initial point of bonding to the metal water pipe shall
be within the first 5 ft. of penetration into the building
D. Concrete encased electrode (re-bar) only in conjunction with new construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Grounding connections and splices shall be brazed molded exothermic welded, bolted clamp
terminal or pressure- connector type. Bolted connections and pressure- connectors shall be
used for connections to removable equipment. Brazed connections shall be made where noted
on drawings.
END OF SECTION 260526
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide raceways and in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents comply with the latest
applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1. Rigid Conduit - RMC
a. UL Standard UL-6
b. ANSI C80-1
c. Federal Specification WW-C-581E
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing - EMT
a. UL Standard UL-797
b. ANSI C80-3
c. Federal Specification WW-C-563
3. Flexible Steel Metal Conduit - FMC
a. UL Standard UL-1
4. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit - LFMC
a. UL Standard UL-360
5. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit - RNC
a. UL Standard UL-651
b. ANSI standard C33.91
c. Federal Specifications GSA-FSS and W-C1094-A
6. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters
a. UL Standard UL-870
7. Metal Clad Cable – MC
a. UL standard 1581
b. Federal spec J-C-30B
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY TYPES
A. Rigid Steel Conduit - RMC
1. Rigid steel conduit heavy wall galvanized.
B. Electric Metallic Tubing - EMT
1. Continuous, seamless tubing galvanized or sheradized on the exterior coated on the
interior with a smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish or enamel.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2. All couplings, connectors, etc., used in conjunction with this raceway which are 2 inch in
size and smaller shall be watertight compression type. EMT fittings shall be malleable iron
zinc coated. With conduits of 2-1/2 inch in size and larger, set screw type couplings are
permitted.
C. Flexible Metal Conduit - FMC
1. Single strip, continuous, flexible interlocked double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and
outside forming smooth internal wiring channel.
2. Maximum length: 6 feet
3. Each section of raceway must contain a bonding wire bonded at each end and sized as
required. Provide connectors with insulating bushings.
D.Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit - LFMC
1. Same as flexible steel conduit except with tough, inert watertight plastic outer jacket.
2. Cast malleable iron body and gland nut, cadmium plated with one-piece brass grounding
bushings which thread to interior of conduit. Spiral molded vinyl sealing ring between
gland nut and bushing and nylon insulated throat.
E. Metal Clad Cable – MC
Non-Health Care
1. Type MC cable shall be armored galvanized steel sheath cable with copper conductors
and THHN 90°C insulation. Furnish with insulated grounding conductor.
F. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit - RNC
1. Composed of polyvinyl chloride suitable for 90 degrees C.
2. Raceway, fittings and cement must be produced by the same manufacturer who must
have had a minimum of ten (10) years experience in manufacturing the products.
3. Materials must have a tensile strength of 7,000 – 7,200 psi and compressive strength of
9,000 psi.
4. All joints shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Install expansion fittings per NEC.
G. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters
1. Of sizes and shapes indicated on the Drawings and as required.
2. Provide all necessary elbows, trees, connectors, adaptors, etc.
3. Hinged cover secured with captive screws.
4. Wire retainers not less than 12 inches on center.
H. Duct Banks
1. Provide duct banks as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Reinforce duct banks with steel where such duct banks are positioned beneath roads and
parking areas.
3. Concrete to be minimum 3,000 pounds per square inch.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
4. Provide rigid steel raceway across all excavated and backfilled ditches and for a length of
10 foot from building and manhole walls. Pitch conduit away from building at every point
where duct bank enters the building or equipment.
5. Support raceways installed in duct banks every 5 feet to assure correct alignment prior to
placing concrete.
6. Terminate raceways with flared bells to enable ease of pulling cable and to eliminate
stress on the cable. Free bells and raceway terminations of burrs and rough edges.
7. Provide concrete markers at grade where duct banks are stubbed out for future use.
8. Install duct banks not less than 30 inches below grade. Install 6” marking ribbon 12”
below grade.
2.2 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Provide zinc-coated or cadmium-plated sheet steel outlet boxes not less than 4 inches octagonal
or square, unless otherwise noted. Equip fixture outlet boxes with 3/8 inch no-bolt fixture studs
where required. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessible type ceiling, provide a
junction box and extend flexible conduit to each fixture. Fit outlet boxes in finished ceilings or
walls with appropriate covers, set flush with the finished surface. Where more than one switch
or device is located at one point, use gang boxes and covers unless otherwise indicated.
Sectional switch boxes or utility boxes will not be permitted. Provide Series "GW" (Steel City) tile
box, or as accepted, or a 4 inch square box with tile ring in masonry walls which will not be
plastered or furred. Where drywall material is utilized provide plaster ring. Provide outlet boxes
of the type and size suitable for the specific application.
B. Construct junction or pullboxes not over 150 cubic inches in size as standard outlet boxes, and
those over 150 cubic inches the same as "cabinets" with screw covers of the same gauge metal.
C. Plug any open knockouts not utilized.
D. Provide surface mounted outlet and junction boxes in indoor locations where exposed to
moisture and outdoor locations of cast metal with threaded hubs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS
A. The following applications must be adhered to except as otherwise required by Code. Raceways
not conforming to this listing must be removed by this Contractor and replaced with the
specified material at this Contractor's expense.
Raceway types Application
Rigid Conduit - RMC Application: Where exposed on exterior of building and
exposed to mechanical injury, where specifically
required, where required by codes and for all circuits in
excess of 600 volts.
Electrical Metallic Applications: Use in every instance except where
Tubing – EMT another material is specified.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Flexible Metal Applications: Use in dry areas for connections to
Conduit – FMC lighting fixtures in hung ceilings, connections to
equipment installed in removable panels of hung ceilings
at all transformer or equipment raceway connections
where sound and vibration isolation is required.
Liquid Tight Flexible Applications: Use in areas subject to moisture
Conduit - LFMC where flexible steel is unacceptable at connections to all
motors, and all raised floor areas.
Rigid Non-Metallic Application:
Conduit – RNC a. Schedule 40 - Where raceways are in slab in below
grade levels, for raceway duct banks.
b. Schedule 80 - For underground raceways outside of
the building which are not encased in concrete
Metal-Clad Cable Application: Use for branch circuit wiring above
suspended ceilings or in metal stud walls. Cable shall not
be run exposed. Home run wiring from panelboard to
first outlet box shall be installed in conduit. MC cable not
permitted for fire alarm wiring systems. Use prohibited if
not allowed by local jurisdiction.
Wireways and Application: Where indicated on the drawings
Auxiliary Gutters and as otherwise specifically approved.
3.2 RACEWAY SYSTEMS IN GENERAL
A. Provide raceways for all wiring systems unless noted otherwise. Where non-metallic raceways
are utilized, provide sizes as required with the grounding conductor considered as an insulated
additional conductor. Minimum size 3/4 inch for home runs and 1 inch minimum for power
distribution. Wiring of each type and system must be installed in separate raceways.
B. Install capped bushings on raceways as soon as installed and remove only when wires are
pulled. Securely tie embedded raceway in place prior to embedment. Raceways installed below
or in floor slabs must extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished slab to the first
connector. Lay out the work in advance to avoid excessive concentrations of multiple raceway
runs.
C. Locate raceways so that the strength of structural members is unaffected and they do not
conflict with the services of other trades. Install 1-inch or larger raceways in or through
structural members (beams, slabs, etc.) only when and in the manner accepted by the
Architect. Draw up couplings and fittings full and tight. Protect threads from corrosion with one
(1) coat red lead or zinc chromate after installation.
D. Above Grade - Defined as the area above finished grade for a building exterior and above top
surface of any slabs (or other concrete work) on grade for a building interior. Above-grade
raceways to comply with the following:
1. Install raceways concealed except at surface cabinets and for motor and equipment
connection in electrical and mechanical rooms. Install a minimum of 6 inches from flues,
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
steam pipes, or other heated lines. Provide flashing and counter- flashing for
waterproofing of raceways, outlets, fittings, etc., which penetrate the roof. Route
raceways parallel or perpendicular to building lines with right-angle turns and
symmetrical bends. Run embedded raceways in a direct line and, where possible, with
long sweep bends and offsets. Provide sleeves in forms for new concrete walls, floor
slabs and partitions for passage of raceways. Waterproof sleeved raceways where
required.
2. Provide raceway expansion joints for exposed and concealed raceways with necessary
bonding conductor at building expansion joints and between buildings or structures and
where required to compensate for raceway or building thermal expansion and
contraction.
3. Provide one (1) empty 3/4 inch raceway for each three (3) spare unused poles or spaces
of each flush-mounted panelboard. Terminate empty 3/4 inch conduit in a junction box,
which after completion, is accessible to facilitate future branch circuit extension.
4. Provide raceway installation (with appropriate seal-offs, explosion-proof fittings, etc.) in
special occupancy area, as required. Provide conduit seal-offs where portions of an
interior raceway system pass through walls, ceiling or floors which separate adjacent
rooms having substantially different maintained temperatures, as in refrigeration or cold
storage rooms.
5. Protect raceway in earth or fill with two (2) coats of asphalt base paint. Touch up
abrasions and wrench marks after conduit is in place.
6. In lieu of the above, protect raceways with a minimum of 20 mil tape approved for the
purpose and overlapped a minimum of one-half tape width.
7. Provide drag wire in spare or empty raceways. Tag both ends of wire denoting opposite
and termination location with black India ink on flameproof linen tag.
E. Below Grade: Defined as the area below finished grade for a building exterior and below or
within the bottom floor slab for a building interior. Below grade raceways to comply to the
following:
1. Project below-grade raceways 2 inches minimum above floor or equipment foundation.
Install exterior underground conduits 24 inches minimum below finished grade. Do not
penetrate waterproof membranes unless proper seal is provided.
F. No raceway may be installed in a concrete slab except with the permission of the Structural
Engineer and with the written consent of the Owner. Conduits embedded in structural concrete
slabs shall have the following minimum thickness and shall conform to the following.
Min. Thickness
Raceway Sizes of Concrete Slab
3/4 in. 4-1/2 in.
1 in. 5 in.
1. Unless specifically approved in writing, raceways 1-1/4 inch size and larger shall not be
installed in structural concrete slabs.
2. In no case will installation of raceways be permitted to interfere with the proper
placement of principal reinforcement.
3. Raceways in structural slabs shall be placed between the upper and the lower layers of
reinforcing steel. This will require careful bending of conduits.
4. Raceways embedded in concrete slabs shall be spaced not less than 8 inches on centers
and as widely spaced as possible where they converge at panels or junction boxes.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 6
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
5. Raceways running parallel to slabs supports, such as beams, columns and structural
walls, shall be installed not less than 12 inches from such supporting elements.
6. To prevent displacement during concrete pour of lift slab, saddle supports for conduit,
outlet boxes, junction boxes, inserts, etc., shall be secured with suitable adhesives.
G. Rigid non-metallic conduit installations shall conform to the following:
1. All joints are to be made by the solvent cementing method using the material
recommended by the raceway manufacturer. Fittings, cement and conduit shall be
supplied by the same manufacturer.
2. Raceway cutoffs shall be square and made by handsaw or other approved means which
does not deform the conduit. Raceway shall be reamed prior to solvent cementing to
couplings, adapters, or fittings.
3. Electrical devices which are served by PVC raceways to be grounded by means of a
ground wire pulled in the raceway.
4. Male box adapters shall be used for all box or raceway fittings to terminate plastic
raceways.
5. Where separable terminations are required, they shall be made using PVC Threaded
Adapters with locknuts or bushings. If such terminations must be watertight, "O" rings
shall be installed.
6. Bends shall be made by methods that do not deform or damage the conduit. The radii of
field bends shall not be less than those established by the NEC.
7. Raceway expansion fittings shall be provided in accordance with NEC. The position of the
expansion fitting shall be adjusted proportional to the temperature at installation.
8. Raceway supports shall be installed in such a manner to allow the PVC Conduit to slide
through the supports as the temperature changes.
9. Elbows must be galvanized rigid steel.
10. Rigid non-metallic conduit is not permitted to be installed within the building.
H. Raceways in hung ceilings shall be run on and secure to slab or primary structural members of
ceiling, not to lathing channels or T-bars or other elements which are the direct supports of the
ceiling panels. Secure conduit firmly to steel by clips and fittings designed for that purpose.
Install as high as but not less than 1'-0" above hung ceilings.
I. Exposed raceways shall be run parallel or at right angles with building lines. Secure raceway
clamps or supports to masonry materials by toggle bolts, expansion bolts, or steel inserts.
Install raceway on steel construction with approved clamps which do not depend on friction or
set-screw pressure alone.
J. Clear raceway of all obstructions and dirt prior to pulling in wires or cables. This shall be done
with ball mandrel (diameter approximately 85% of conduit inside diameter) followed by close
fitting wire brush and wad of felt or similar material. This assembly may be pulled in together
with, but ahead of the cable being installed. All empty raceways shall be similarly cleaned. Clear
any raceway which rejects ball mandrel.
K. Support less than 2" trade size, vertically run, raceways at intervals no greater than eight feet.
Support such raceways, 2" trade size or larger, at intervals no greater than ten feet.
L. Support less than 1" trade size, horizontally run, raceways at intervals no greater than seven
feet. Support such raceways, 1" trade size or larger, at intervals no greater than ten feet.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 7
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
3.3 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTER
A. Wireways installed in hung ceilings shall be placed such that the cover will hinge upward from
the side.
B. 12" clear shall be provided from wireway cover when it is in the open position.
3.4 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULLBOXES
A. Provide outlet, junction, and pullboxes as indicated on the Drawings and as required for the
complete installation of the various electrical systems, and to facilitate proper pulling of wires
and cables. J-boxes and pullboxes shall be sized per NEC minimum.
B. The exact location of outlets and equipment is governed by structural conditions and
obstructions or other equipment items. When necessary, relocate outlets so that when fixtures
or equipment are installed, they will be symmetrically located according to the room layout and
will not interfere with other work or equipment. Verify final location of outlets, panels
equipment, etc., with Architect.
C. Back-to-back outlets in the same wall or "thru-wall" type boxes not permitted. Provide 12-inch
(minimum) spacing for outlets shown on opposite sides of a common wall to minimize sound
transmission.
3.5 FLOOR BOXES
A. Where shown on the drawings, furnish and install watertight floor boxes. Boxes shall be
furnished with all necessary nozzles, receptacles, outlet covers, etc. to make finished and
complete installations.
B. Boxes shall be cast iron RFB Series, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
C. Service fittings shall be aluminum, satin finish, furnished complete with receptacle and plates.
D. Multiple service floor box shall be cast iron RFB Series concealed service floor box complete with
all parts for telephone and power services
END OF SECTION 260533
TELEPHONE RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES 260533.10 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 260533.10 – TELEPHONE RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide raceways and accessories for telephone systems in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
1.1 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents comply with the latest
applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1. Local telephone company regulations.
B. The Contractor shall contact the local telephone company and the local installer to coordinate all
telephone work. Any deviations from the Contract Documents shall immediately be brought to
the attention of the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY TYPES
A. E.M.T. shall be utilized for all telephone raceway within buildings except as otherwise noted.
B. P.V.C. shall be utilized for underground raceways. If P.V.C. is utilized, 90 degree elbows shall be
P.V.C. coated galvanized rigid metal conduit. Underground P.V.C. conduit shall be encased in 3"
concrete.
2.2 BACKBOARDS
A. 3/4" A-D Plywood - sizes shown on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS
A. Install capped bushings on raceways as soon as installed.
B. Raceways below grade shall be installed at 24 inches minimum below the finished grade.
TELEPHONE RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES 260533.10 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
C. Arrange raceway runs less than 100 feet from point to point so that they contain no more than
2-90 degree standard factory bends or 3-90 degree 24 inch radius bends. Provide pull boxes in
raceway runs exceeding 100 feet from point to point with more than 1-90 degree bend.
Raceway runs shall not contain square or oval conduit fittings ("Condulets"). Enter feeder
raceways to telephone terminal boards top or bottom on the extreme right or left side.
3.2 OUTLET AND PULLBOXES
A. Provide outlet pullboxes as indicated on the Drawings and as required for the complete
installation of the telephone system.
B. Pullboxes shall be provided where 3-90 degree bends are exceeded with a single conduit run.
3.3 RECEPTACLES
A. Provide a double duplex receptacle at each telephone terminal mounted at 7'-0" A.F.F at the
right hand side of the backboard.
3.4 FLOOR TO FLOOR SERVICES
A. 4" D rigid steel raceway nipples shall be installed between floors in quantities indicated on the
Drawings. Nipples shall extend 4" above and below finished floor of the telephone closets. All
nipples shall be threaded.
B. Fire seal all openings to maintain fire rating after telephone cables are installed.
C.Unused raceways shall be capped at both ends with approved threaded caps.
3.5 TELEPHONE OUTLETS
A. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, telephone outlets shall be connected and home run to
the nearest telephone terminal. Each telephone home run shall be 1" unless otherwise noted.
B. All security wiring to be run in conduit.
END OF SECTION 260533.10
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 262416.11 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 262416.11 – LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Install lighting and appliance panelboard(s) as specified
herein and where shown on the associated schedule(s) on the drawings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The panelboard(s) and circuit breaker(s) referenced herein are designed and manufactured
according to the latest revision of the following specifications.
1. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards
2. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
3. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
4. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
5. UL 67 – Panelboards
6. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
7. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 29-M1989 - Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards
8. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5-M91 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
9. Federal Specification W-P-115C - Type I Class 1
10. Federal Specification W-C-375B/Gen - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit And
Service.
11. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
12. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
1.3 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Approval documents shall include drawings. Drawings shall contain overall panelboard
dimensions, interior mounting dimensions, and wiring gutter dimensions. The location of the
main, branches, and solid neutral shall be clearly shown. In addition, the drawing shall
illustrate one line diagrams with applicable voltage systems.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Company specializing in manufacturing of panelboard products with a minimum of fifty (50)
Years documented experience.
B. Panelboards shall be manufactured in accordance with standards listed Article 1.02 -
REFERENCES.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 262416.11 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Handle carefully to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
C. Store in a clean, dry environment. Maintain factory packaging and, if required, provide an
additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect enclosure(s) from dirt, water,
construction debris, and traffic.
1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer shall provide installation instructions and NEMA Standards Publication PB 1.1 -
Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or
Less.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment free from defects in materials and workmanship
for the lesser of one (1) year from the date of installation or eighteen (18) months from the
date of purchase.
1.8 RELATED WORK
A. Section 262416.10 – Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design – Eaton “Pow-R-Line 2a”
B. Approved alternate manufacturers – Siemens “P2”, Square D “NQOD”
2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD TYPE
A. Panelboard
1. Interior
a. Shall be panelboard rated for 240 Vac maximum. Continuous main current
ratings, as indicated on associated [schedules] [drawings], not to exceed 600
amperes maximum.
b. Minimum short circuit current rating: 42,000 or as indicated in rms symmetrical
amperes at 240 Vac.
c. Provide one (1) continuous bus bar per phase. Each bus bar shall have
sequentially phased branch circuit connectors suitable for plug-in or bolt-on branch
circuit breakers. The busing shall be fully rated. Panelboard bus current ratings
shall be determined by heat-rise tests conducted in accordance with UL 67.
Busing shall be copper. Bus bar plating shall run the entire length of the bus bar.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 262416.11 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
Panelboards shall be suitable for use as Service Equipment when application
requirements comply with UL 67 and NEC Article 230.
d. All current-carrying parts shall be insulated from ground and phase-to-phase by
high dielectric strength thermoplastic.
e. A solidly bonded copper equipment ground bar shall be provided.
f. Split solid neutral shall be plated and located in the mains compartment up to 225
amperes so all incoming neutral cable may be of the same length. [UL Listed
panelboards with 200% rated solid neutral shall be plated copper for non-linear
load applications. Panelboards shall be marked for non-linear load applications].
g. Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction to shield user from energized
parts. Dead-front trim shall have pre-formed twistouts covering unused
panelboard positions.
h. Nameplates shall contain system information and catalog number or factory order
number. Interior wiring diagram, neutral wiring diagram, UL Listed label and short
circuit current rating shall be displayed on the interior or in a booklet format.
2. Main Circuit Breaker
a. Main circuit breakers shall have an overcenter, trip-free, toggle mechanism which
will provide quick-make, quick-break contact action. Circuit breakers shall have a
permanent trip unit with thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Each
thermal element shall be true rms sensing and be factory calibrated to operate in a
40° C ambient environment. Thermal elements shall be ambient compensating
above 40° C.
b. Two- and three-pole circuit breakers shall have common tripping of all poles.
Circuit breakers frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have a single magnetic trip
adjustment located on the front of the circuit breaker that allows the user to
simultaneously select the desired trip level of all poles. Circuit breakers shall have
a push-to-trip button for maintenance and testing purposes.
c. Breaker handle and faceplate shall indicate rated ampacity. Standard construction
circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or
load markings.
d. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall have international I/O markings, in addition to
standard ON/OFF markings. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide
provisions for locking handle in the ON or OFF position.
e. Lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid or stranded copper conductors only. Lugs
shall be suitable for 90° C rated wire, sized according to the 75° C temperature
rating per NEC Table 310.16. Lug body shall be bolted in place; snap-in designs
are not acceptable.
f. The circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for use with the following accessories:
Shunt Trip, Under Voltage Trip, Ground Fault Shunt Trip, Auxiliary Switch, Alarm
Switch, Mechanical Lug Kits, and Compression Lug Kits.
3. Branch Circuit Breakers
a. Circuit breakers shall be UL Listed with amperage ratings, interrupting ratings, and
number of poles as indicated on the associated [schedules] [drawings].
b. Molded case branch circuit breakers shall have bolt-on type bus connectors.
c. Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter toggle mechanism which will provide
quick-make, quick-break contact action. Circuit breakers shall have thermal and
magnetic trip elements in each pole. Two- and three-pole circuit breakers shall
have common tripping of all poles.
d. The exposed faceplates of all branch circuit breakers shall be flush with one
another.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 262416.11 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
e. Lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid or stranded copper conductors only. Lugs
shall be suitable for 75° C rated wire, sized according to the 75° C temperature
rating per NEC Table 310.16.
4. Enclosures
a. Type 1 Boxes
1) Boxes shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance with UL 50
requirements. Galvanized steel will not be acceptable.
2) Boxes shall have removable endwalls with knockouts located on one end.
Boxes shall have welded interior mounting studs. Interior mounting
brackets are not required.
3) Box width shall be 20” wide.
b. Type 1 Fronts
1) Front shall meet strength and rigidity requirements per UL 50 standards.
Front shall have ANSI 61 gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned
phosphatized steel.
2) Fronts shall be hinged 1-piece with door. Mounting shall be as indicated on
associated schedules and drawings.
3) Panelboards shall have MONO-FLAT fronts with concealed door hinges and
mounted with trim screws. Front shall not be removable with the door
locked. Doors on front shall have rounded corners and edges shall be free
of burrs.
4) Front shall have cylindrical tumbler type lock with catch and spring-loaded
stainless steel door pull. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. One (1)
key shall be provided with each lock. A directory cardholder shall be
mounted on the inside of door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, NEMA PB 1.1 and
NEC standards.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding.
B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for
multi-wire branch circuits.
C. Check tightness of bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque
wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written specifications.
END OF SECTION 262416.11
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 262726 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 262726 – SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide wiring devices in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest
applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1. 1. Switches
a. Federal Specification Standard WS-896E.
2. 2. Receptacles
a. NEMA Standards WD-1, WD6
b. UL Standard 498 Federal Specification WC596-D
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts and specifications for all wiring devices and plates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SWITCHES
A. Switches controlling lighting shall be as specified on the drawings and shall be furnished by the
contractor unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
B. Color of normal devices shall be white.
C. Switches shall be Hubbell, Legrand or Leviton.
2.2 DUPLEX CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES
A. Provide 3-pole NEMA and ANSI standard type, with bronze contacts that accept plug with 2
parallel blades and 1 grounding blade. Heat-resistant white plastic enclosure with nylon face.
Two grounding screws. Break-off terminals for 2-circuit wiring. Rated 20 amperes at 125-volt
electrical alternating current.
B. Color of normal devices white, unless otherwise indicated on the plans.
C. Receptacles shall be Hubbell, Legrand or Leviton.
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 262726 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Provide 3-pole NEMA and ANSI standard type, with bronze contacts that accept plug with 2
parallel blades and 1 grounding blade. 5mA for personnel protection. Heat-resistant white
plastic enclosure with nylon face. Two grounding screws. Indicator light that shows when the
GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. Rated 20 amperes at
125-volt electrical alternating current.
B. Color of normal devices white, unless otherwise indicated on the plans.
C. GFCI Receptacles shall be Hubbell, Legrand or Leviton.
2.4 COVER PLATES
A. Provide cover plates for wiring devices shall be white, high impact nylon with smooth finish,
unless otherwise noted on the plans. When two or more devices are shown in one location,
mount under a common plate. Cover plates shall be from the same manufacturer as the wiring
devices.
2.5 OUTDOOR LOCATIONS
A. Each receptacle installed in a damp location shall be corrosion resistant having all metal parts
from stainless steel or be nickel plated brass.
B. Protect exterior switches and those in mechanical rooms which act as plenums by a cast
aluminum metal plate with a fiber shield and spring loaded cover.
C. Protect exterior receptacles and those in mechanical rooms which act as plenums by a cast
aluminum metal plate with a stainless steel spring-loaded, gasketed, double flap lift cover to
remain locked in either open or closed position.
D. Where indicated or required provide ground fault circuit interrupters which will interrupt
leakage currents between 4-6 mA having a maximum circuit current of 20 amperes. Employ
feed through or non-feed through devices as indicated, or required.
2.6 SPECIAL RECEPTACLES
A. Where receptacles other than specified above are noted they shall be as shown on the
drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SWITCHES
A. Mount switches vertically with the "on" position on top, unless noted or specified otherwise.
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 262726 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Where switches are indicated to be installed near doors, corner walls, etc., mount same not
less than 2 inches and not more than 12 inches from trim. Verify exact location with the
Architect.
C. Carefully coordinate the location of switches to ensure locations at the strike side of doors.
D. Furnish and install an engraved legend for each switch that controls motors, equipment
systems, etc., not located within sight of the controlling switch.
3.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Prior to final payment replace all receptacles which have broken faceplates.
B. Mount receptacles with long axis vertical and U-shaped ground position at bottom except
where specifically noted on the plans to be mounted with the long axis horizontal with the U-
shaped ground position on the right.
3.3 GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTERS
A. Swab all conduits clear of moisture.
B. Do not combine GFI protected circuits with other circuits in same raceway.
C. Limit maximum number of GFI protected circuits in any one raceway to a maximum of one
circuit.
END OF SECTION 262726
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262816 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 262816 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide disconnect switches in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest
provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1. UL Standards #98 (File #4776) and #508.
2. Federal Specification W-S-865C.
3. NEMA Standard KSI-1975.
4. UL 20 and Federal Specification Test Standards for Toggle Switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturers' data for all disconnect switches.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Heavy-duty, single-throw knife switch with quick-make, quick-break mechanism, capable of full
load operations, shall meet NEMA and U.S. Government specifications for Class A switches.
B. Provide with contact arc-quenching devices, such as magnetic blowouts or snuffing plates.
Provide self- aligning switchblades with silver alloy contact areas and designed so that arcing
upon making and breaking does not occur on the final contact surfaces. Provide with
high-pressure, spring-loaded contact. Mount switch parts on high-grade insulating base.
C. Enclosure: NEMA I with hinged door, and defeatable interlock when switch is in "On" position
and can be positively padlocked in "On" and "Off" positions. Utilize NEMA 3R (rainproof)
enclosure for exterior installations. NEMA 3R enclosures must be galvanized.
D. Size, fusing and number of poles as shown or as required. Where fused, the devices must be
provided with UL listed rejection feature to reject all but Class R fuses. Provide horsepower
rated switch to match motor load if no size is shown. Use 3 pole plus solid neutral switches on
four wire circuits and 3 pole switches on all other circuits unless otherwise noted.
E. Lugs must be UL listed for aluminum and/or copper conductors and be front removable.
F. Manufacturer to be the same as that for transformers, switchgear, etc.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262816 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
G. Acceptable manufacturers: Square D, Westinghouse, General Electric, Eaton Electrical/Cutler
Hammer.
2.2 TOGGLE TYPE MANUAL CONTROL SWITCHES
A. Provide switches that operate at their full rating with fluorescent, tungsten, and resistance loads
- and at 80% of their rated capacity with motor loads.
B. Switches to be heavy duty and have:
1. Arc-resisting bodies.
2. Slow make-and-break mechanisms,
3. Silver alloy contact buttons.
4. Side or back wiring with up to No. 10 AWG solid conductors.
C. Acceptable manufacturers: Square D Class 2510, 11, or 12; Westinghouse Type MS or B100;
General Electric Type RB and Eaton/Cutler Hammer Type MST with enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Each piece of equipment utilizing multi-phase power shall be supplied with a safety-type
disconnect switch.
B. Each piece of equipment utilizing single-phase power but protected at over 30 amperes shall be
supplied with a safety-type disconnect switch.
C. Equipment other than mentioned above may utilize a toggle type manual control switch
properly sized and rated for the equipment it disconnects.
D. Factory installed disconnect switches may be used to satisfy the above requirements with the
Architect's prior approval.
3.2 MOUNTING
A. Disconnect switches shall be mounted on adjacent wall or from the floor with independent
supports unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
B. Disconnect switches shall be mounted on adjacent wall or from the floor with independent
supports. Switches shall not be mounted on fan housing.
END OF SECTION 262816
LIGHTING 265100 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and installation of all lighting as
indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as necessary for the proper and complete
performance of the work.
1. Major items:
a. Emergency lighting.
b. Exit lighting.
c. Adequate fixture supporting systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply
with the following:
1. ANSI-UL Standards
a. C78.377-2008 – Solid State Lighting Products
2. NFPA
a. 70 - NEC
b. 101 - Life Safety
3. IESNA
a. IES LM-79-08 – Testing of Solid State Lighting Devices (LED)
b. IES LM-80-08 – Measuring Lumen Depreciation of LED Light Sources
1.3 FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. No substitutions will be accepted. The lighting equipment specified herein has been carefully
chosen for its ability to meet luminous performance requirements of this project. Substitutions
in all likelihood will be unable to meet all of the same criteria as specified equipment. No
exceptions.
B. When only one manufacturer is listed within the description of the luminaire, the design
engineering of architectural aesthetics will not allow substitution of another manufacturer. The
contractor shall provide a separate list of unit costs for these luminaries with shop drawings.
Shop drawings will not be reviewed without unit cost information.
C. Once Bids, Shop Drawings, are approved, all lighting is to be ordered in a timely manner. The
Contractor is then to inform the Engineer immediately, in writing, the date when equipment
orders are completed and delivery scheduled.
LIGHTING 265100 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' data for the following items in accordance with the
conditions of the contract and as specified below.
1. Major luminaries and special luminaries shall show full size cross sections. Indicate
finished dimensions, metal thicknesses, and materials.
2. Show mounting details, including hung ceiling construction.
3. Indicate type of ballast and manufacturer and ballast quantity and location. Include
information as to power factor, input watts, and ballast factor.
4. Shop drawings shall include a complete listing of all luminaries on a single sheet. This
listing of shall contain the luminaire type, manufacturer's catalog number, applied
voltage, lamps and ballasts.
5. Submit manufacturer's fixtures and accessories Shop Drawings and data in booklet form,
including rough-in dimensions, instructions for installation and maintenance.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect lighting fixtures and work against dirt, water or mechanical damage before, during, and
after installation. Damage prior to final acceptance shall satisfactorily be repaired or replaced at
no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND FIXTURES
A. General:
1. PNC will provide all lighting fixtures in accordance with Lighting Fixture Schedule and as
indicated and required on Drawings.
2. Lighting Fixture Schedule is provided on the Drawings for reference so that the contractor
can familiarize himself with the fixtures being provided.
3. Provide continuity of ground on all fixtures used as raceways and mounted end to end.
4. Luminaire Wiring: Minimum individual luminaire wiring -- number 18 gauge with
insulation with rated operating temperature of 105 degrees Centigrade or higher.
Terminate wiring for recessed luminaries, except fluorescent units, in an external splice
box.
5. Where utilized as raceway, luminaries shall be suitable for use as raceways. Provide feed
through splice boxes where necessary. Wiring shall be rated for 90 degrees Centigrade.
B. Emergency Lighting
1. Emergency lighting systems shall be provided by PNC as indicated in Drawings, complete
with all equipment.
2. This equipment is to provide instantaneous emergency lighting in the event of a power
failure by means of batteries controlled by solid state controls.
C. Exit Lighting
LIGHTING 265100 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Exit lighting system shall be as indicated on Drawings.
2. Equipment shall be furnished complete with lamps by PNC.
3. Equipment shall meet BOCA, OSHA, NFPA and NEC illumination standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. General
1. Examine architectural and other pertinent details and ceiling and wall construction and
finish being installed.
2. Lighting fixture catalog numbers and mounting indicated on the electrical drawings are
for reference only.
3. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to determine what suspension or mounting
method is required and provide fixtures complete with all trim, flanges, brackets, levelers,
etc. required for mounting at the location indicated.
3.2 BASIC INSTALLATION METHODS AND MATERIALS
A. General
1. Install outlets, surface mounted, recessed or semi-recessed fixtures to maintain the
alignment, spacings, layout and general arrangements indicated in the Drawings. Obtain
approval of ENGINEER for all changes in layout required to avoid interferences with other
trades.
B. Coordination:
1. Work incorporating with ceiling trades in locating and framing recessed fixtures in
acoustical tile pattern or grid system to conform to layout.
2. Inform affected trades of the location and framing details necessary for the installation of
flush fixtures and deliver all framing rings of these fixtures that become a part of the
ceiling construction.
3. Before equipment is ordered, electrical contractor to review luminaire and ceiling
mechanical compatibility in each area and verify luminaire on the drawings. Contractor
shall be responsible for all fixture quantities, lengths and clearances required and shall
inform the ARCHITECT of the job conditions at variance with the fixture(s) specified or
detailed which affect installation or location. (All stages of installation).
4. Mechanical and electrical contractors are to review and coordinate lighting locations in
relationship to mechanical systems to minimize conflicts prior to installation. Electrical
contractor is to submit a written memo with minutes of these meetings to both the
Architect and Engineer.
5. This contractor is responsible for coordinating the characteristics and the U.L. labeling of
the luminaries and their components with the ambient conditions which will exist when
the luminaries are installed. No extra compensation will be permitted for failure to
coordinate the luminaries with their ambient conditions.
C. Mounting and Supports
LIGHTING 265100 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1. Install luminaries in mechanical and unfinished areas after ductwork and piping
installation. Locate fixtures 8 feet 6 inches above the floor, or at suitable locations within
space on walls but not lower than 7'-0" AFF. Where mounted lower than 8'-6" luminaries
shall be protected by an approved wire guard.
2. Where luminaries are surface mounted, they shall be labelled for such and a minimum of
one-half (1/2) inch air space and shall be maintained between top of luminaire and
mounting surface by an approved means.
3. Pendant mounted units shall comply with the following:
a. Where luminaries are mounted in a continuous row, luminaries, eight feet in length
shall have stems placed within 2'-0" apart. Stems shall be spaced symmetrically. A
fixture, four feet or three feet in length, placed in a row, shall have a stem
connected to center luminaire.
b. Individual luminaries, four feet in length, shall have two stems placed
approximately 3 inches from each end.
c. Individual luminaire, three feet in length, shall have dual stems and a single
canopy.
d. Each stem shall have a brass or steel swivel or other self-aligning device of type
approved by the Architect/Engineer.
4. Where luminaries are mounted on surface-mounted outlet boxes in surface mounted
conduit runs, this Contractor shall furnish and install a luminaire canopy sufficiently deep
to permit exposed conduits to pass through. Canopy shall have proper openings cut by
luminaire manufacturer through which conduits may pass. Submit sample of canopy for
approval before installation.
5. Prior to final payment, this contractor shall clean all luminaries and replace all lamps. He
shall also touch up all scratch marks, etc. in an approved manner.
6. Provide a minimum of two support points for all surface, pendant or recessed mounted
luminaries. The supports shall be tied to the building structural system. The support
points shall be totally independent of the ceiling system.
7. Recessed luminaries to be installed in metal panel or acoustic modular ceilings shall be
modified as required to fit into openings in ceiling construction. This contractor shall
coordinate and verify this work with the General Construction Contractor. Shop Drawings
showing details shall be submitted for approval.
8. All luminaries hung ceilings are to be installed with earthquake clips.
D. Emergency Systems Raceway and Hook-up
1. Circuit wiring for the emergency systems shall be installed in separate raceway and kept
entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment.
2. Replace all burned out incandescent and dimmed lamps.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. At project completion, before final approval:
1. Aim adjustable fixtures as directed and observe and adjust at night as required.
2. Clean interior of all fixtures, all lens and lamps.
END OF SECTION 265100
LED LIGHTING 265100 - 1
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
SECTION 265119 – LED LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology.
2. Lighting fixture supports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 265100 "Lighting”.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply
with the following:
1. ANSI-UL Standards
a. C78.377-2008 – Solid State Lighting Products
2.NFPA
b. 70 - NEC
c. 101 - Life Safety
3. IESNA
d. IES LM-79-08 – Testing of Solid State Lighting Devices (LED)
e. IES LM-80-08 – Measuring Lumen Depreciation of LED Light Sources
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Retain terms that remain after this Section has been edited for a project.
B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
C. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
D. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
E. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
F. LED: Light-emitting diode.
G. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
H. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
LED LIGHTING 265100 - 2
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 265100, Section 1.4.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Retain one of two "Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications"
paragraphs below, or both, to specify qualifications for laboratories providing photometric
data. Retain first paragraph for testing laboratories that are associated with a luminaire
manufacturer's production facility. Retain second paragraph for testing laboratories that
are independent of a luminaire manufacturer's production facility.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's
laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
C. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an
independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,
that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for
Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing
standards.
D. Retain one of or both paragraphs below for luminaires with integral lamps.
E. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
F. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color
consistency among luminaires.
G. Mockups: For interior lighting luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with
power and control connections.
1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations.
2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the 4.
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
4. Retain subparagraph below if the intention is to make an exception to the default
requirement in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for demolishing and
removing mockups.
5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective
covering before shipping.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. When warranties longer than one year are required and would exceed the "one-year
period f or correction of Work," verify with Owner's counsel that warranties stated in this
article are not less than remedies available to Owner under prevailing local laws.
B. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
C. Verify available warranties and warranty periods.
D. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
LED LIGHTING 265100 - 3
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated
class and division of hazard by an NRTL.
C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
D. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.
E. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.
F. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.
G. CRI of minimum 80. CCT as indicated in Fixture Schedule.
H. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours.
I. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 10 percent of maximum light output.
J. Internal driver.
K. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated in Fixture Schedule.
2.2 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
L. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy.
Finish same as luminaire.
M. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
N. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
O. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
LED LIGHTING 265100 - 4
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.
3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100
percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
A. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Secured to outlet box.
2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around
circumference of luminaire.
3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.
B. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box.
2. Retain first subparagraph below to require ceiling grid to be connected to building
structure at four corners of luminaire opening.
3. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four
locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
4. Retain subparagraph below if ceiling grid is not connected to building structure at four
corners of the luminaire opening.
5. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and
building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Coordinate "Operational Test" Subparagraph below with requirements in Section 260923
"Lighting Control Devices."
2. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
3. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
LED LIGHTING 265100 - 5
PNC Bank – Pennwood Office 2019190.32 06-18-19
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 265119